IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)

/..

1.0

1.1

1.25

|£5

1^ l^

^ lis IIIIIM

1.4

1.6

Photographic

Sciences
Corporation

23 WEST MAIN STREET

WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580

(716) 872-4503

CIHM/ICMH

Microfiche

Series.

CIHIVI/ICIVIH
Collection de
microfiches.

Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques

Technical and Bibliographic Notas/Notas tachniquaa at bibliographiquaa

The Instituta has attamptad to obtain tha bast
original copy available for filming. Faaturas of this
copy which may ba bibliographically uniqua,
which may altar any of tha images in tha
reproduction, or which may significantly change
the usual method of filming, are checked baiow.

L'Institut a microfilm^ la meilleur exemplaire
qu'il lui a M possible de se procurer. Les details
de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-itre uniques du
point de vue bibliographiqua, qui peuvent modifier
une image reproduite. ou qui peuvent exiger une
modification dans la m^thoda normale de filmaga
sont indiquAs ci-dessous.

Coloured covers/
Couvertura do coulour

I I Covers damaged/

D
D
D
D
D

Couverture endommagte

Covers restored and/or laminated/
Couver«ure restaur^ et/ou pelliculie

Cover title missing/

La titre de couverture manque

Coloured maps/

Cartes giographiquas an coulaur

Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/
Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleuo ou noi

Coloured plates and/or illustrations/
Planches et/ou illustrations an couleur

Bound with other material/
Ralii avoc d'autras documents

Tight binding may causa shadows or distortion
along interior margin/

La re liure serrie peut causer de I'ombre ou de la
distorsion la long da la marge intirieura

Blank leaves added during restoration may
appear within the text. Whenever possible, these
have been omitted from filming/
II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajoutias
lors d'une restauration apparaissant dans la toxta.
mais, lorsqua cela itait possible, ces pages n'ont
pas M film^as.

D
D
D

Q
Q
D
D
D
D

Coloured pages/
Pages do couleur

Pages damaged/
Pages endommagias

Pages restored and/or laminated/
Pages restauries et/ou pelliculAes

Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/
Pages dAcolories, tachatAes ou piqu^es

Pages detached/
Pages ditachies

Showthrough/
Transparence

Quality of print varies/
Qualiti inigala de ('impression

Includes supplementary material/
Comprend du materiel supplAmantaira

Only edition available/
Saule Edition disponible

Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata
slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to
ensure the best possible image/
Les pages totalement ou partiellement
obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure,
etc., ont it6 filmiea A nouveau de facon d
obtanir la meilleure image possible.

Additional comments:/
Commentaires supplimentaires;

This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/

Ce document est filmi au taux de rMuction indiqui ci-dessous.

10X tm im 22X

26X

30X

12X

16X

20X

24X

28X

32X

Th« copy filmed h«r« has b««n raproducad thanks
to tha ganaroaity of:

McLennan Library
McGill University
(Montreal

Tha imagaa appaaring haia w tha baat quality
poaaibia eonaidaring tha condition and iagibility
of tha original copy and in icaaping with tha
filming contract spacifieationa.

Original coplaa in printad papar oovara ara fllmad
baginning with tha front covar and anding on
tha laat paga with a printad or iilustratad impraa-
sion, or tha back covar whan appropriata. All
othar original coplaa ara fllmad baginning on tha
first paga with a printad or illuatratad impraa-
sion, and anding on tha laat paga with a printad
or illuatratad impraaaion.

L'axamplaira fiimi f ut raproduit grica i la
g4n4roaiti da:

IMcLennan Library
McGill University
Montreal

Laa imagaa suh/antaa ont 4tA raproduitca avac la
plua grand soln, compta tanu da la condition at
da la nattatA da l'axamplaira fiimA, at an
conformiti avac laa conditions du contrat da
fllmaga.

Laa axamplairas origlnaux dont la couvartura an
papiar aat imprimia sont filmte wn commandant
par la pramlar plat at an tarminant salt par la
damlAra paga qui comporta una amprainta
d'impraaaion ou d'llluatratlon, solt par la sacond
plat, salon la caa. Tous laa autraa axampiairaa
origlnaux sont filmis an comman9ant par la
pramlAra paga qui comporta una amprainta
d'impraaaion ou dllluatration at an tarminant par
la darnl4ra paga qui comporta una taila
amprainta.

Tha laat racordad frama on aach microficha
shall contain tha symbol -^i moaning "CON-
TINUED"), or tha symbol ▼ (moaning "END"),
whichavar applias.

Un daa aymbolaa auivanta apparaltra sur la
damlAre Imaga da chaqua microficha, salon la
caa: la symbda — ^signlfla "A SUIVRE", la
aymbola ▼ signifia "FIN".

Mapa, plataa, charts, ate., may ba fllriad at
diffarant raductlon ratloa. Thoaa too larga to ba
antiraly includad in ona axpoaura ara fllmad
baginning in tha uppar laft hand comar, laft to
right and top to bottom, aa many framaa aa
raqulrad. Tha following diagrama llluatrata tha
mathod:

Laa cartaa, planchaa, tablaaux, ate, pauvant itra
fllmia A daa taux da reduction diffirants.
Lorsqua la documant aat trap grand pour Atra
raproiduit an un aaul cllchA, ii aat film* i partir
da I'angia supAriaur gaucha, da gaucha i droita,
at da haut an baa, an pranant la nombra
d'Imagaa nAcaaaaira. Las diagrammaa suivants
illuatrant la mithoda.

'^^OA'V

.1*^

■1
i

i 1

.1 I

"v-*^

. *.

K ■;
>'■ 1

; !

SAILING DIRECTIONS

/.-.J.,

rOft THE

^7 ^ c ISLAND AND BANKS

We w f d u n d l A n d.

AND

COAST OF LABRADOR
4

rBou

\\ CAPE WHITTLE TO SANDWICH BAY,'

INCLUDING THE

COMFIKD CSJEFLT FBOM THB^SURYEYS

^S.^UR^

BRi

By Captains H. W. F/^JrAT

fMENTS,

flSuLLocE, R.N., Michael Lane,

AND OTHERS; AND BT CaFTAIN C. F. LaYAUD, OF THE FBENCH NaYY.

LONDON :

PCBLISHED BY JAMES IMRAY»

CHART AND NAUTICAL BOOKSELLER,

102, MINORIES.

1851.

;sSF*''

"■'. *

•■■H

■.#;|

.11

£*sfe._^^jSajt2

*.• COMMUNICATIONS FOB THE FUTUEE IMPROVEMENT OF THIS WORK WILL
BE THANKFULLY RECEIVED AND ACKNOWLEDGED.

if :

? t

.«'*■■

■■i*:.f

^.t'

ERRATA.

'V.^

o... Line from top Line from bottom «^-
'*«'» of me. of page. '«'

, ,

• •

6, 11

• •

22,25.26,28 Oat

•«,

-•-...- Read

Cat
Miquelin Miquelon

VilTa Village

Miqueon Miquelon

In^enachoix In^ornaohoix

-^ Point Relies Amour§ Point Amour

Cape Mecattina The Grand Point of Mecattina*

CONTENTS.

ma*

PART I.

NEWFOUNDLAND.
GENERAL REMARKS.

Dimensions, History, 1 j— Banks, 2; — Passage to, 4 {—Currents, 0;— Ioe,6.

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

CAPE RACE TO CAPE ST. FRANCIS.

Cape Race, Renowes, Fermouse Harbour, Aquafort Harbour, 7 ; — ^Ferryland
Harbour, Caplin Bay, Cape Brqyle Harbour, &c., 8 ;— Witless Bay, Bay of
Bulls, Cape Spear, St John's Harbour, 9 ;— Torbay, Cape St. Francis, 10.

CAPE ST. FRANCIS TO BOCALIEU ISLAND.

Conception Bay, 10;— Belle Isle, Salmon Cove, Collier's Bay, Brigus Bay, Fort-
grave Bay, 11; — Bay Robert, Spaniard's Bay, Harbour Grace, Carboniere
Island and Harbour, 12 ;— Green or Western Bay, Bay Verde, 13,

BOCALIEU ISLAND TO CAPE BONAVISTA.

Trinity Bay, Old Perlican, New Perlican, 13 ;— Heart's Content, Heart's Desire,
Heart's Delight, Dildo Harbour, Bav of Bulls, Random Sound, 14 ; — Smith's
Sound, Port Bonaventure, Trinitv Harbour, 15; — Robinhood's Bay, Salmon
Cove, English Harbour, Raggea Harbour, Catalina Harbour, Little Catalina
Bay, 16 ;— Bird Island, 17.

CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE FREELS.

Cape Bonavista, Bonavista Bay, 17 ;<— Port Bonavista, Black Head Bay, Keels,
18; — Plate Cove, Indian Arm, Southward Bay, Bacon-bone Rock, Kate Har-
bour, Sweet Bay, Great Chance Harbour, 19 ; — Chandler's Reach, Goose
Bay, Clode Sound, Lion's Den, Long Islands, Newman's Sound, South Broad
Cove, Mincbin's Cove, 20; — Barrow Harbour, Sandy Cove, Great and Little
Adventure Coves, North Broad Cove, 21 ; — Salvage Bay, Damnable Hatbourj
Morris Cove, Bay of Fair and False, Gooseberry Isles, &c., 22 ; — ^New Har-
bour, Cat Cove, North- West Arm, 23 : — Greenspond Tickle, 24.

CAPE FREELS TO CAPE NORMAN.

Cape Freels, Penguin Islands, Funk Islands, Brenton Rock, 24 ; — Cleopatra
Rock, Durel's Ledge, Ragged Harbour, Wadham Islands, S.S.W. Roek,
Fogo Islands, Fogo Harbour, 25 ; — Little Fogo Islands, Ireland Rock, Change
Islands Tickle, Island of Toulinguet, Cape St. John, 26 ; — Pacqu?t Harboury
The St. Barbe, or Horse Islands, Hardy Harbour, Fleur de i ys Harbour,
White Bav, 27 ; — Lobster Harbour, Southern Arm, Middle Ain., Western
Arm, Sop s Arm, Jackson's Arm, Great and Little Coney Arms, Great and
Little Cat Arms, 28 ; — Little Harbour Deep, Grand Vache, Orange Bay, ox
Great Harbour Deep, Fourch6e, Hooping Harbour, Canada Head, Canada
Bay, Engine Harbour, 29; — Goufre Harbour, Conch Harbour, Cape Rdttg«
Harbour, Belle and Groais Islands, Croc Harbour, Great and Little St. Julien,
Fishot Islands, 31 ; — Hare Bay, How Harbour, Goose Harbour, Cremallire
Harbour, St. Anthony Harbour, Braha Bay, St Lunaire Bay, 32 ; — Griguet
Bay, North Harbour, White Islands, Quirpon Island, 33 , — Degrat and Pigeon
Coves, Cape Bauld, Great Quirpon Harbour, Noddy Harbour, Sacred Islands,
Ha-Ha Bay, Pistolet Bay, 34 ;— Cook's Harbour, Belle Isle, Cape Norman, 36.

SOUTH COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

CAPE RACE TO CAPE CHAPEAU ROUGE.

Cape Race, 35 ;— Trepassey Harbour, St Shot's Bay, St. Mary's Bay, St Mary^i
Harbour, 36 ;— Mai Bay, Great Ssdmon River, Collinet Bay, Nortih Harbour,
' Cape St. Maiy, Placentia Bay, 37 ; — ^Placentia Harbour, Little Placentia Har-

< bour. Ship Harbour, 38;— Fox Island, The Ram Islands, Little Harbour,

Little South Harbour, Great South Harbour, Come-by-Cbance Barbour,
North Harbour, Pipei^s Hole, Great Sandy Harbour, 39;— Little Sandy
Harbour, Clatise Harbour, GrammerVt Rocks, Merasheen Island, Red Island,
Lonff Island, Harbour Buffet, Muscle Harbour, 40r-Pre8que Harbour, L»
Percne Harbour, Paradise Sound, Petit Fort Harbour, Cape Roger Harbour,
Great and Little Gallows Harbours, Little Harbour, Bay de I'Eau, 41 j— Bo*(

il.

• r

CONTENTS.

Harbour, Bane Harbour, Red Harbour, Audierne Island, The Saddle-baok,
Cape Judas, or Middle Island, Mortier Bay, 42 ;— Little Morticr Bay, Iron
Island, Oreatand Little Burin Harbours, 43 ; — Burin Bay, Burin Inlet, Gorbin
Harbour, Little St. Lawrence, Great St. Lawrence, Garden Bank, 44.
CAPE CHAPEAU ROUGE TO CAPE RAY.

, Ferryland Head, Great and Little Laun, 44 ; Laun Islands, Taylorls Bay,
' Point Aux Gaul, Island of St. Pierre, Island of Columbier, Green Island,

Langley or Little Miquelon, 46 ;— Miquelon, Fortune Bay, Plate Islands,
Brunet Islands, Sagona Island, 46 ; — Point May, Dantric Coves, Ship Cove,
Bay L'Argent, Harbour Mill6, Grand le Pierre, 47 j — English Harbour, New
Harbour, Harbour Femme, Harbour La Conte, Long Harbour, Belle Har-

' hour, Cinq Isles Bay, Corben Bay, 48 ;— Bande de L'Arier Bay, Harbour of

St. Jacques, Harbour of Blue Pinion, Boxy Harbour, Great Bay de L'Eau,
Little Bay Barrysway, Harbour Briton, 49 j — Connaigre Bay, Pass Island,
Fortune Bay, Hermitage Bay, Long Island, Galtaus Harbour, 50 ; Picarre
Harbour, Round Harbour, Long Island Harbour, Bay of Despair, Great
Jervis Harbour, Bonne Bay, Bays of Facheux and Dragon, 61 ;— Hare Bay,
Devil's Bay, Bay of Rencontre, Bay of Chaleur, Bay Frangais, Oar Bay, Cape
La Hune, The Penguin Islands, Whale Rock, La Hune Bay, 52 ; — Ramea
Isles, Old Man's Bay, Mosquito Harbour, 53 ; — White Bear Bay, Red Island
Harbours, The Burgeo Isles, Wolf Bay, King's Harbour, Ha-Ha, 64 ;— Great
Barachais Point, Connoire Bay, Bay of Cutteau, Harbour of Grand Bruit,
Bay of Rotte, La Poile Bay, '55 j — Great and Little Harbours, Gaily Boy's
Harbour, Broad Cove, N.E. Arm, Harbour la Coue, La Moine Bay, Rose

< Blanche Harbour, 50 ;— Conney Bay, Otter Bay, Dead Islands Harbour, Port

au Basque, Grand Bay, Cape Ray, 57; — The 1 ides, 58. ,;

WEST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND. . ,'-

CAPE RAY TO CAPE NORMAN. ' ^

Island of Cod Roy, Cod Roy Road, St. George's Bay, Cape St. George, Port-
au-Port, 69 j— Bay of Islands, 60 ; Lark Harbour, York Harbour, Cape St.
Gregory, Bonne Bay, 61 ; — Cow Head, Ingornachoix Bay, Port Saunders and
Hawkes Harbour, Point Rich, Port au Choix, 62; — Bay of St. John, Point
Ferolle, New FeroUe Bay, St. Margaret's Bay, Old Ferolle, Bay of St.
Genevieve, 63 ; — Bay of St. Barbe, Savage Cove, 64 j — Cape Nqiman, Sound-
ings in the Strait of Belle Isle, &c., 65.

-■> .'•:

PART n.

■ '^'

COAST OF LABRADOR. -i]

YORK POINT TO SANDWICH BAY.

York Point, Chateau or York Bay, 66 ; — Henley Harbour, Antelope Harbour,
Pitt's Harbour, St. Peter's Bay, Camp Bay, Niger Sound, 67 ; — St. Lewis
Sound, St. Lewis Inlet, 68 ; — Battle Harbour, St. Charles Harbour, 69 ; — St.
Lewis Cape, Petty Harbour, Sophia Harbour, Port Charlotte, 70 j — ^Mecklen-
burgh Harbour, St. Francis Harbour, Cape St. Francis, Sealing Bight, Fish-
ing Ship Harbour, 71 ; — Gilbert's River, Cape St. Michael, Occasional Har-
bour, St Michael's Bay, Duck Harbour, Hawke Island and Bay, 72 ; — Eagle
Cove, Caplin Bay, Partridge Bay, Seal Islands, Shallow Eay, Sandy Bay,
Spotted Island, Sand-Hill Cove, Table Bay, 73;— The Ganhetlslands, Curlew
Harbour, Isthmus Bay, Hare Harbour, Sandwich Bay, 74.
YORK POINT TO CAPE WHITTLE.

Wreck Bay, 74 ; — Greenish Bay, Red Bay, Carrol Cove, Black Bay, 76 ; — For-
teau Bay, Bradore Harbour, 76; — Belles Amours Harbour, Middle Bay,
Five Leagues Harbour, 77 ; — Bonne Esperance Harbour, Whale Island, Es-

Suimaux Bay and Harbour, 78 ; — Esquimaux Islands, Old Fort Bay, Lobster
lay. Rocky Bay, Mistanoque Harbour, 79 ; Shag Islet, Ci'mberknd Harbour,
Sheeatiea Bay, Sandy Harbour, Port Augustine, Eagle Harbour, 80 ; — Ha-
Ha Bay, Great Mecattina Island, Mecattina Harbour, Grand Point of Mecat-
tina, 81 ; — Portagfe Bay, Little Mecattina Island, Hare Harbour, 82 1 Aylmer
Sound, Watagheutic Island, 83 ;— Wapitagun Harbour, Cape Whittle, 84.

BA
BO;
BE1
HA

the 1

coast

milei

69° 3

The

haib(

theS

on th

of Si

Race

lengtl

oppoa

surve]

make

The

being

the pu

and fe

These i

and SOI

is St. J

the isla

trading

New

John ai

•WW*"

SAILING DIRECTIONS

FOR THE

ISLAND OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

•»• The Beabinqs and Courses are all by Compass, unless when otherwise
BXPRESSED. The soundinqs are all reduced to the level of low water,

SPRING-TIDES. THE DISTANCES ARE IN NAUTICAL MiLES OF 60 TO EACH DEGREE.

It HAS RECENTLY BEEN ORDERED BY THE LORDS COMMISSIONERS OF THE ADMI-
RALTY THAT THE WORD " PoRT" 13 TO BE SUBSTITUTED FOR THE WORD " LAR-
BOARD," IN ALL H.M. Ships or Vessels, on ACCoyNT of the similarity existing

BETWEEN THE WORDS STARBOARD AND LARBOARD, FROM WHICH MANY MISTAKES
HAVE ARISEN.

PART L

NEWFOUNDLAND.

GENERAL REMARKS.

TBB iblaho or nswrammxjijm is the most eastern part of America, and
the nearest to Europe. The distance between the island of Valentia on the south-west
coast of Ireland, and St. John's on the east coast of Newfoundland, is 1656 nautical
miles. The island is situated between 46° 40' and 51° 39' N. lat, and 52°. 44' and
69° 31' W. long., on the north-east side of the entrance to the Gulf of St. Lawrence.
The form of it is iiery irregular, and the shores are broken by numerous bays and
hai'bours. Its north-western extremity is separated from the coast of Labrador by the
tiie Strait of Belle Isle. The south-west point is opposite to Cape Breton ; it is open
on the east to the Atlantic, and its west coast forms the eastern boundary of the Gulf
of St. Lawrence. Its extreme length, measured on a line extending from Cape
Race in the south-east to Cape Norman, at its northern extremity, is 326 miles, and the
length from Cape Freels, the northern entrance to the Bay of Bonavista, to Cape Ray,
opposite to Cape Breton, is about 250 miles. The island has never thoroughly been
surveyed, but it is computed to contain 35,500 squares miles, though some estimates
make it considerably more.

The appearance of Newfoundland, from the sea, is extremely rugged, the coast line
being broken into many inlets and harbours. All the settlements have been made for
the purpose of prosecuting the fishery^' they have been uniformly placed on the coasts
and few or no attempts have been made even to acquire any knowledge of the interior.
These settlements now amount to 60 or 70, the greater part of which are on the eastern
and southern shores, and particularly the former. The only large town on the island
is St. John's, situated in about 47° 35' N. lat., 52° 48' W. long., on the east side of
the island, which, besides being the seat of government, is the principal harbour for
trading vessels.

Newfoundland was probably first discovered by the Northmen about the year 1000.
John and Sebastian Cabot, on their second voyage, discovered Cape Bonavista, on this

BANKS OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

island, on th« 24th of June, 1497. Lnndinff in the adjoining bay, thsy found a«TeraI
nativeH dresseil in the Hkins of animaU, and formally took pouodaion of the island,
which they called Baccalaoa, the name given to cod-fish by the natires ; a name, it may
be remarked, which has been adopted into the language of Portu(^al (baaalhao), firom
which country some adventurers subsoquently proceeded to the island and formed a
settlement, from which they were driven by the English under Sir Francis Drake in the
reign of Elizabeth. In 1610 a charter was granted to a company of adventurers of
London and Bristol, for colonising Newfoundland, and a colony was established at
Conception Day. Four years lutcr, courts of justice were established bjr ro^al authority
in the island ; and the first Lord Baltimore, in 1623, established a flourishmg colony at
Ferrylund,on the east coast, where ho himself resided for many years. From this time
numerous settlements were continually made along the east coast by the English,
while the French established themselves on the south, at Placentia, in the bay of
that name, and maintained possession of it until the treaty of Utrecht, in April, 1713.
By this treaty Newfoundland and its dependencies were declared to belong wholly to
Great Britain, but the French were allowed to fish and cure what they should catch
on some parts of the shore, but were not allowed to erect fortifications or any other
buildings, except such as were strictly required for the purposes of the fishery.

It was agreed in 1818, thatthe vessels belonging to the United States should have, in
common wiih the British subjects, the privilege of catching fish on the southern coast,
between Cape Ray and the Kamea Islands, and on the western and northern coasts,
from Cape Kay to the Quirpon Islands ; also on the shores of the Magdalen Islands, and
on the coasts, bays, harbours, an^ creeks of Labrador, from Mount Joli through the
Straits of Belle Isle, and thence northward, indefinitely along the coast as heretofore,
but without prejudice to the exclusive rights of the Hudson s Bay Company. Ami
they have also the liberty to dry and cure fish in any of the unsettled bays, harbours,
and creeks, of the southern parts of Newfoundland and Labrador, but so long only as
they shall remain unsettled.

BARKS or RBwromiDZiAifD.— To the eastward, as well as to the southward
of the Island of Newfoundland, are several extensive aand-bankt, abounding with fish
of various kinds. In sounding, the bottom is commonly covered with great quantities
of shells, and frequented by shoals of small fish, most of which serve as food for the
cod ; and these thrive so amazingly, and are so inconceivably numerous, that although
many hundreds of vessels have been annually supplied with tliem for more than two
centuries, yet such a prodigious consumption has not apparently diminished their
numbers. The fishery is not confinedonly to the banks, but extends,in equal luxuriance,
to the shores and harbours of Newfoundland, Nova Scotia, and Breton Island. The fish
commonly are most abundant where the bottom is sandy, and the depth about 30
fathoms : where the bottom is of mud they are observea to be less numerous. In
winter they appear to retire to the deep water, but in February, March, and April,
thev' come again on the banks, and fatten rapidly.*

THE GREAT BANK to the south-eastward of the island, extends from about
the lat. of 43° 47' N. to 47° 42' N. Its form, like that of the other banks, is
not easily defined ; but about the latitude of 45°, its breadth is nearly 5 degrees,
whence , to the southward, it narrows almost to a point, and seems suddenly to drop
into fathomless water. The north end, which is nearly in the latitude of Cape Broyle,
is about 60 miles across having 45 to 48 fathoms, sand and shells. In the latitude of
Cape Race, or in 46° 40' N., and long. 47° 30' W., soundings in 76 fathoms,
whitish sand, will be obtained ; this will be about 140 miles to the eastward of the
Virgin Rocks. Although, in this parallel, the Grand Bank extends farther to the east-
ward, than when you are farther to the southward, it cannot be recommended as a safe one,
on account of the rocky shoal of only 21 fieet water, of about 100 or 200 feet in extent,
reported to have been seen by Mr. Jesse Ryder, of the fishing schooner Bethel, in 1845,
in latitude 46° 30' and about 50 miles to the eastward of the Virgin Rocks, it is, there-
fore, necessary to proceed with caution when running on this parallel. We will sup-
{lose that you are approaching the St. Lawrence from the westward, in that case, in
at. 45° 30', you will obtain soundings on the edge of the bank in long. 48° 46'
W. ; here the bank is very steep. In lat. 44° N. and long. 49° W., you will
strike the edge of the bank in 105 fathoms, very fine grey sparkling sand ; but im-

• In "British America," by Mr. McGregor, Vol. 2, 1838, is given a copious description of
the mode of fishing and curing in NewfounHlnnd, as shown also, by a quotation from the said
work, in the " NanticRl MagRsine," J una, 188!^, p. 190.

'r^

-«'

BANKS OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

^n of

aaid

V'-

mediately you are to the westward of this position, the soundi.^.gs decrease. Hence,
the edffe of the bank has a south-westerly direction to lat. 43** N. and long.
49° 60' W., where are 60 fathoms, hafing immediately to the eastward shoal water of
40 fathoms, fine sand, shells and mud, and to the westward, deep water. In the
western part of the bank, in long. 52' 30' W., is a deep gullny called the Trou de
la Baleine or Whale Deep, in which are 61 to 69 fathoms, with a bottom of mud or
case having a fetid smell; this deep abounds with different sorts offish, but more
particularly the cod, which are inconceivably numerous. The depths of the Great
Banks vary from 20 to 80 fathoms, and the bottom also varies considerabW, but it

Generally consists of sand, or sand mixed with shells and gravel, rarely with stones,
he eastern face of the bank is of clear whitish sand, and often sparkhng. But the
best idea of the shape and soundings of the bank will be gained by referring to the
chart which accompanies this work.*

The Virgin Hock*.— Should you make the Great Bank between 46° and 47° parallels
of latitude, you must be very careful to avoid being drifted upon Cape Race or Virgin
Rocks. These rocks were surveyed by Captain Bishop, R.N., ana Mr. Rose, R.N.,
and the following particulars are the result of their observations. The bank on which
the Virgin Rocks are situated was found to extend 4^ miles in an E. by S. and
W. by N. direction, and to be 2^ miles wide in its broadest part, the depths
being regular from 28 to 30 fathoms. Beyond these limits, the depth increased
suddenly to 39 and 43 fothoms. In the Nautical Maaraxine for 1832, p. 10,
it is stated that " their meridian distance from Halifax was found to be 12^ 46' 6" E.,
and the longitude of the rocks depends on Halifax Dock-yard, which is supposed to
be in 63° 38' 41" W." Mr. Rose describes these rocks as extending in an irregular
chain, or cluster, 800 yards in the direction of N.E. b;^ E. and S.W. by W., their
breadth varying from 200 to 300 yards. They were distinctly seen under water, par-
ticularly a large nass of white lock, in 4| fathoms, having 5 and 6^ fathoms round
it. The shoal was traced in 7 fathoms, on detatched, rocks, near the edge of it, having
deeper water between them. On the southern edge of the shoal, from S.E. to West,
the depth increases gradually to 30 fathoms, at the distance of half a mile from the
■hoalest part. The same depth was found to the N.W. and N.E. of the shoal, at the
distance of one-third of a mile, and also between N.E. and S.E., at the distance of one
mile. The current was found setting to W.S.W., at the rate of one mile per hour
over the shoal, with a confused cross swell.

ShoaL — A shoal of 21 feet water was lately discovered (1846), by Mr. Jesse Ryder,
of the fishing schooner Bethel, in lat. 46° 30' N., which appeared to be a rode
of 100 or 200 feet surface. He discovered it aooidentally wnile searching for the
9-fathom bank, to fish upon, and supposed it to be about 60 miles to the eastward of the
Virgin Rocks, and to bear S. by W. about 1| mile from the 9-fathom bank. Mr
Ryaerwas certain that it formed no part of the Virgin Rocks, havino: afterwai-ds seen them,
and from his experience of the different fishing grounds knows it to exist.t

To the westward of the Great Bank is a series of banks, called the Green, St. Pierre,
Mizeu, Banquereau, Canso, and the extensive bank which extends off Sable Inland,
to the westward, along the coast of Nova Scotia. All these banks have from 20 to 70
fathoms on them, and afford a good indication of a ship's approach to land.

THE FLEMISH CAP, called also the Outer or False Bank, is a patch of rising
ground to the eastward of the Great Bank, inHong. 44° 30' W. and between latitudes
47° and 48° N. It has lately been partially surveyed by M. Lavaud, of the
French Navv, from whose observations it appears to be very steep on the western
edge, thsre being no bottom immediately alter sounding in 13( or 160 fathoms on
its edge. From long. 44° 62' W. and lat. 46° 63' N., in a depth of 73 fathoms,
large stones, a line of soundings gradually increasing in depth, was carried to the
northward, to lat 47° 50' N. and long. 46° 12' W., where the depth was found
to be 147 fathoms, bottom of soft mud. Between it and the western edge of
t he Great Bank is much deeper water, with >t bottom of fine sand and oaze, w hich will

• Or the reader may refer to the large chart of the banks, on two sheets, pabliahed by tba
proprietor.

f On the French charts of the banks, a shoal of 9 fathoms, seen by a Captain Bertel, in 1844
is stated to lie iu lat. 44° 43' N. and lon(i-. 49° 01' W., but the position is somewhat
ODoertain. The words Bertel and Bethel (the name of Mr. Ryder's vessel) are not so unlike,
bat that they may have been confounded ; in that case, the dangers may be the same, but
(hey differ widely iu latitude.

BANKS OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

scarcely stick to the lead, and as you proveed westward towards the Great Bank you
will meet with fine whitish sand, speckled black.

If bound to St. John's Harbour, it is advisable to keep on the parallel of 46°, or IJ"
to the southward of the parallel of that port, and until you appioach the outer edge
of the Great Bank, and obtain soundings in long. 48° 30' or 49° W., to steer
directly to the north-westward for Cape Spear ; but if bound for the Gulf of St. Law-
rence, you should endeavour to cross the bank in 45° 30', and when about in the
55" or 56° of longitude, shape your course north-westerly for St. Paul's Island, ox
Cape North or Breton Island.

In thick weather the lead should be kept going when leaving the western edge of
the Green Bank, to ascertain when you fall into the deep gulley of 80 to 90 fathoms,
mud, which runs N.N.E. and S.S.W., about 60 miles, between St. Peter's and the
Green Bank. The middle of the gulley is in lat. 45° 35' N. ; by- sounding in this
gulley, and feeling the edges of the banks on each side of it, you will obtain a fresh
departure.

If making St. Pierre or St. Peter's Island, adopt the following course which is
followed by the French fishing vessels. From the longitude of 52° W"., in lat. 45° N.,
steer a N. W. course, which will carry you across the Green Bank in about 48 fathoms
water, and when in the meridian of 55° 10' W., in about 45° 50' N., you will suddenly
deepen your water to 90 fathoms. A farther run on the same course for about 10
miles, will carry you across this gulley, when you will shoal your water to 35 and 30
fathoms ; and after a farther run of 23 miles, may steer about N.N.E. directly for the
island.

In the spring or summer, vessels from Great Britain should keep well to the north-
ward ; for it has been long observed that vessels from the Pentland Frith and the
Clyi'e, have always made quicker passages than those from Bristol or the English
Channel. During the winter season the American packets always keep well to the north-
ward. The preferable course for vessels bound for the Bay of Fundy, in the summer,
is to keep as far to the northward as lat. 47°, until reaching long. 40° W., then to edge
away so as to cross the tail of the bank in about lat. 43° 30' N. At this season of the
year you will be more clear of the numerous fishing-vessels that resort to the banks,
and perhaps fall in with less ice, but a strict look-out for the latter is always necessary.
After being to. the westward of the banks, endeavour to keep in lat. 43°, to avoid the
northern edge of the Gulf Stream ; but in the winter the bank should be crossed well
to the northward to guard against the north-westers, which blow very heavily.

Two vessels bound to the lower ports in the St. Lawrence have been known to pass
the'Pentland Frith together, in the month of April ; the one bad a passage of 21 days,
and the other, the faster sailer, of 7 weeks. In comparing logs afterwards, it appeared
that they were both in about long. §0° W. on the same day, but the one was about 100
miles to the southward, with a gale at West, while the other to the northward was
running 9 knots, with a fresh gale at N.E. All the ships which kept to the northward
bad fine passages.

To these remarks on the passages from England to Newfoundland, the following, by
a correspondent of the Nautical Magazine, 1833, p. 329, may prove not unacceptable.

" Although the voyage to and from North America, between the parallels of 60° and
40°, has always been attended with a degree of peril, from masses of ice which drift
to the southward, during the summer months from the polar regirfns, yet many an
unwary mariner makes his run across th» Atlantic without any apprehension of meet-
ing these floating dangers, or without sufficiently exercising a proper discretion and
vigilance to guard against coming in collision witn them. This is not mere conjecture,
but the information of persons who annually perform the voyage, beside the result of
my own observation, in accidents which have repeatedly occurred to vessels between
Newi'outidland and England, and in the number of missing ships on this route. Com-
manders of ships should therefore bear in mind the imperative necessity there is for
using their utmost vigilance and attentir>a when crossing the above-named parallels,
especially between the meridians of 30^ and 60° West, to guard against coming in con-
tact with these formidable dangers of the ocean.

"The New York packet ships, well supplied with every essential equipment, and
elegantly fitted for the accommodation of passengers, when making their winter voyage
from Liverpool, keep in high latitudes until nearing Newfoundland. 1 his they do for
the two-fold object of avoiding the tempestuous weather so generally experienced to
the southward, and of obtaining fairer winds; and thus, by slipping within the

/ '■ -^^1

CURRENTS. fl

mighty stream from the Florida Channel, the^Prade its retarding influence. The
voyage by this route is shortened; and, although bad weather must be expected, it in
not BO violent as farther south; besides which, the eastern current is avoided. I believe
it is an unusual thing to meet with i||e in this part of the Atlantic in the winter ; but
yre have the following recent instance to the contrary, so that a look-out should be
kept in that season, as well as in the summer, by vessels making the voyage.

" It appears that the ^m«/ou« packet, on the 26th of February, 1833, met with much
field-ice on the coast of Nova-Scotia ; and in the latitude of 43'^ N. and Icng. 49° W.,
those on board were much surprised by falling in with a large quantity of strongly
packed ice, which reduced the vessel's way to 6^ and 7 knots, from sailing at the rate
of 9 knots, under close-reefed main-topsail and reefed foresail. On the 4th of March,
she fell in with three bergs, of large dimensions, in a run of 95 miles ; and at nine the
same evening she was obliged to pass between the two easternmost of these before
heaving-to for the night ; after which, by keeping a more northerly course, no more of
these dangerous floating masses were seen.

^ " From all accounts it seems that the greatest danger is to be apprehended in the
vicinity of the Banks of Newfoundland; and this, as ever}' ilavigator knows, is increased
by a dense fog which generally prevades the atmosphere in that quarter, and, of course,
shortens the distance of vision to a very circumscribed limit."

The Banks are frequently enveloped in dense fogs, which, from the middle of spring
to December, have been known to last 8 and 10 days successively ; at such times they
are often so thick that you will not be able to see any object at 10 fathoms distance ; a
continual drizzling rain is dropping from the sails and rigging, a general calm prevails,
and sometimes attended with a considerable swell of the sea, so that you are constantly
in fear of running foul of some vessels, or being drifted by the currents upon some
danger, which, from a total inability of discovering, you will have great diflicuity to
avoid. The currents which surround the Island of Newfoundland are frequently so
violent and so irregular, sometimes driving towards the shore and sometimes towards
the sea, that the greatest caution will always be found necessary, while the current coming
froni the northern regions sweeps along the shores of Labrador, nnd, in the spring,
detatches immense icebergs, which float to the southward, and become exceedingly
dan^rous, especially in foggy weather ; some of these masses will frequently be ground-
ed in 40 and 60 fathoms water, and others will be met with farther out to* seaward, at
the distance of 125 or 130 leagues from the land. Fortunately these formidable objects
may g^erally be discovered, even in dark weather, by a white and bright appearance
of the sky above them, and also by the roar of the waters breaking against them ; they
also may' be apprehended by the intense coldness they difl'use to a great distance
around them; they continue and are usually met with as late as June, July, and
August. Your approach towards ,the banks may be known by the numerous sea fowls
which will attend you, as roches, malimauks, and divers; these latter are seldom found
more than 30 leagues off the banks, but malimauks and others are occasionally
seen all across the Atlantic, but in the vicinity of the banks they become
numerous. The great fishery commences in May and continues till the latter end of
September.

Currents. It has been observed that vessels bound to the Gulf of St. Lawrence
should take the greatest care to notice the currents, which set from the eastward, all
along the southern coast of Newfoundland, wth frequently fatal velocity, causing an
impetuous indraught into the various bays, and occasioning the loss ol many lives,
and the wreck of numerous vessels. These local currents chiefly prevail on that part
between Cape Race and Cape Ray. The British frigate Ttccedi the sloop Cotnus, the
transport Harpooner, were all, of late years, lost on this coast ; the two latter nearly on
the same spot, and within three weeks of each other. H.M. ship iJrahe, in June 1822,
was wrecked about the eastern head of St. Shot's Bay ; and in the July following the
brig Spe^ce was totally lost on the same dangers : so that it should seem more vessels
have been cast away on the small point of land which divides tlie two bays of Trepassey
and St. Mary, than on any other part of the island; that these accidents were occasioned
by the currents, there can be little doubt.

It frequently happens, that a vessel bound from England to Quebec will strike sound-
ings on the Great Bank of Newfoundland, and thence shape her course for the Gult of
St. Lawrence, without ever seeing the land, which, probably, is enveloped in fog.
When unable or neglecting to make a proper allowance for the above current, which
runs sometimes at the rate of 4 mile& an hour, he is swept away to the westward :and

hf;

1^1

CURRENTS. ICE.

vhile he Considers himself to be steeruH^fairly for the entrance of the gulf, he Is driven
on shore, and bis vessel becomes a wi^c.

An able navigator, who has been 20 years employed in the fisheries, and who is a
native of Newfoundland, observes, — " It is well understood by all the boat-mastera,
that there is, in general, a strong current settiq^ in from the eastward, along the
western coast of Newfoundland, which, after passmg Cape Pine, runs more towards
St. Mary's and Placentia Bays. This current will be felt at least 20 leagues to the
S.W. of Cape Fine, and becomes more rapid as you approach the land, its velocity in-
creasing as the winds favour its direction ; but at all times of sufficient magnitude to
endanger the safety of any vessel approaching from the south or west, in foggy weather,
and being ignorant of its existence.'*

In order to avoid the danger arising from this current, the fishermen, in foggy
weather, when returning from the western coast to their homes on the eastern shore,
invariably use the lead, depending more upon the depth of water than their compass,
and always keeping a sufficient ustance from the land, to ensure the safety of the
vessel. On passing to the eastward of Cape Race, thev never approach nearer to the
land than 35 fathoms water ; the ground being more of an inclined plane on the west
than on the east coast. You will find that depth of water at a considerable distance ;
the ground becomes more broken, and the depth of water increases so-fast, that in
your course from Cape St. Mary's to avoid Cape Race, you will, when to the eastward
of It, find yourself in 50 fathoms, and when advanced a very short distance farther, you
win sound in 60 and 70 fathoms ; consequently, the land will then be cleared, and you may
safely pursue what course you think proper ; but, in all this navigation, the mariner^
safety will, in a great measure, depena upon a due attention to the lead.

The winds being variable, there Is little doubt but that they produce many changes
in the currents ; shifts of wind to the southward of the island being so common that it
often happens that, after blowing a gale from one point it suddenly shifts to the opposite,
continuing to blow with the same violence. One vessel may thus be lying-to with a
heavy gale, while another 30 leagues disfant might be in a similar situation with the
wind in quite an opposite direction, a circumstance that has been known to happen.

We will close these remarks upon the currents by adding the following from the
French chart of the banks, by M. Lavaud of the French Navy.

"The direction of the currents at the north and south, and on the eastern approach to
the Great Bank, varies little from E.S.E. to S.S.E. (true), and is generally between
these points; its velocity Is seldom less than 8 to 10 miles in the 24 hours, and some-
times increases to 24 and 30 miles. Mariners should observe, that outside all the
banks, and especially off the south part of the Great Bank, the currents boil and
form such strong eddies, that a vessel becalmed, or with light winds, cannot estimate
her position with exactness ; this is probably occasioned by the edge of the Gulf
Stream.

"The currents on the Great Bank have a variable direction, of which the wind is not
the only cause, as it is, at times, in a different direction. The fishermen state, that the
current every day makes the round of the compass ; and it Is found, by close observa-
tion, that beyond the meridian of Cape Race it is mostly to the westward."

Ice. — The following remarks upon ice In the North Atlantic by Mr. W. C. Redfield,
although perhaps not immediately connected with our subject, are added as they can-
not but prove interesting to the reader.

" Of the various dangers which beset the path of the mariner, perhaps there are
none which excite to more vigilance than the known or expected proximity of ice. In
some frequented portions of the Atlantic Ocean the ice appears almost every year, in
the various forms of field ice, floes, and massive ice-islands, drifted from the arctic
regions by the constant action of the polar currents. These ice-bearing currents, in
flowing towards the South, must necessarily incline towards the western limits of the
ocean, owing to the increased velocitv of the diurnal rotation of the earth's surface as
we depart i'rom the poles ; a law well understood as regards the currents of air which
form the trade winds. Hence it is that on and near the Banks of Newfoundland these
ice-currents are found to cross the usual tract of vessels bound from the ports of Europe
to North America.

" The quantity of ice which appears on this route of navigation in diflerent years,
is exceedingly various. It is sometimes seen as early in the year as January, and
seldom later than the month of August. From March to July is its most common
season. It is found most frequently to the west of long. 44°, and to the eastward

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND. 7

of long. 02*: but ioebei^ are sometimes met with as far eastward as long. 40", and
in some rare cases even still further towards Europe.

" Experience has shown that the proximity of ice is far less hazardous than rocks or
shoals; and ihis floating danger would be still less formidable were it not for the fogs
and miste which it often causes. The thermometer has been often held up as affording
sure indications of an approach to ice, by the reduction of temperature ftnown both in
the airaud vi&ter,jmd these indications are importantand should by no means be neglect-
ed. But there nfjiffoe many cases of approach to ice where a reliance upon the thermo-
meter alone could not afford security.

" Although little or no ice be seen in one passage, or even in many times crossing
the Atlantic, yet it has been frequently met in such quantities as seemed to indiflpte a
vast, or indefinite extension of the ice-fields, towards tne polar seas,"

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

CAPE RACE TO CAPE ST. FRANCIS.

>f';-^ aite^

jire
fin

in
ttio

in
the
las
Uh
pse
fpe

id
Ion
Ird

OAm BAOB is the south-east point of Newfoundland, lying in latitude 46'' 39' 44"
N. and longitude 53° 4' W., and is table land of moderate height; A black rock lies
near to it, and several smaller ones around it.

From Cape Race to Cape Ballard, the course is N.E. by E. 8 miles : nearly one mile
to the southward of Cape Ballard, is a high black head, called Chain Cove Head ;
between the points is a cove. To the westward of Chain Cove Head, lies Chain Cove,
before whieh lies a black rock above water.

About 8 miles E.S.E. from Cape Race, and to the southward of Cape Ballard, is a
fishing bank, called New Bank, about 6 miles long, and nearly 2 miles broad ; on it
there are from 17 to 25 fathoms water.

RENOWES.— At the distance of 6| miles N.E. | E. from Cape Ballard lie some
small rocks, bold-to, named the Renowes, which are of moderate height, and lie one
mile from the main land. About 2 miles to the northward of these rocks, and about a
mile to the southward of the entrance t^ Renowes Ijirirbour, lies Renowes Island, which
is situated close to the main land. The Harbour ex Renowes is but a small indifferent
place, and has not above 15 or 16 feet at low water. There are several rocks in the
entrance, and the south-east winds heave in a very great sea. To sail in you must
keep the north shore on board.

FERMOUSE HARBOUR lies about 2| miles from Renowes, having between them a
small place named Bear's Cove, off which there is a sunken rock, about a cable's length
from the shore. Fermouse is an excellent harbour, there being no danger in saihng
into it, though the entrance is not more than a cable's length wide. Just within the
entrance, on the north shore, is a small cove, in which a fishery is earned on, but there
is no safe place for anchoring. About one quarter of a mile farther in, on the same
side, is another cove, named Admiral's Cove, in which merchant-vessels generally ride
in 7 or 8 fathoms water, land-locked. About a mile farther up the harbour is a place
named Vice Admiral's Cove, on the south of which is the best anchorage for large ships, .
in 12 or 15 fathoms water, muddy ground, as there you will be conveniently situated
for obtaining wood and water. Farther up, on the same side, is Sheep's Head Cove,
directly off which, near the middle of the cnannel, there is a shoal, on which are only 9
feet water ; this is the only known danger in the harbour.

About N.E. by E. one mile from Fermouse Harbour is Bald Head, and one mile N.
by £. farther is Black Head.

AQUAFORT HARBOUR is aboutone mileN. by W. from Black Head, and has in its
entrance a high rock above water, to the northward of which is the passage in with about
15 tathoms water. The harbour runs in to the westward about 3 miles, narrowing as
you advance, until about half a mile from the head of the bay, where it becomes mush

hii:

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

contracted, a£fording however about 4 fathoms water. Just within the narrows is a
small cove of about 7 fathoms water, which is considered to be a good place for vessels
to heave down, the shore being steep. To sail through the narrows, give a berth
to the stony beach on the north shore, without the narrows, it being shoal, excepting
at the point of the narrows where it is bold-to.

FERRYLAND HARBOUR.— Ferryland Head lies E. | S. distant 2 miles from
Aquafort, and N.E. i E., 3| miles from Fermouse. It is moderately high, having,
close off it, two high rocks above water, named the Hare's Ears. This head is not
easily distinguished, on account of the main land within it being i4|ttb higher. The
entrance into Ferryland Harbour lies to the northward of the heal^oetween it and
Isle Bois, and is little more than half a cable's length wide ; but after you are within
Isle Bois it is much wider and affords tolerable good anchorage in 8 or 10 fathoms
water ; but the north-east winds heave in a very great sea over the low rocks that
extend from the Isle Bois to the main.

From Isle Bois to Goose Island, the course is N.E. by N. j N., distant half a mile ;
and from Goose Island to Stone Island, the course is N. 5° W., distance half a mile.

CAPLIN BAY runs inN.W by N. 2| miles from Goose Island, and is considered to
be a tolerably good harbour, having a safe passage into it on either side of Goose Island.
To the northward of Goose Island, between it and Stone Island, there is not the
least danger, the islands being bold-to. If you pass to the southward of Goose Island,
between it and Isle Bois, be sure to keep the point of Ferryland Head open to the
eastward of Isle Bois, in order to avoid a sunken rock, on which there are only 2
fathoms water, lying nearly midway between Goose Island and Cold East Point ; after
you are within this rock, there is no danger in sailing up the bay. The best anchorage
IS abreast of a cove on the port hand, about half a mile within Scogin's Head, in 16 or
17 fathoms water.

From Ferryland Head to Cape Broyle, the course is N.N.E. 2f miles. This cape is
high table land, and makes in the form of a saddle, either from the northward or
southward. From the north part of the cape, southward three-quarters of a mile, lies
a small rock, called Old Harry, on which are only 3 fathoms water ; but between it and
the main are upwards of 20 fathoms water. About three-quarters of a mile to the
E.N.E. of Cape Broyle there is a ledge of rocks, called the Horse Rocks, on which are
from 7 to 14 fathoms water : in bad weather the sea breaks very high on these rocks.
The mark for these rocks is, or was, a white house on Ferryland Downs open with
Stone Islands, and the head of Cape Broyle Harbour open will carry you directly upon
them.

CAPE BROYLE HARBOUR.-- -From the north part of Cape Broyle to the south
part of Brigus Head, the distance is 1| mile. These points form the entrance into
Cape Broyle Harbour, which runs 4 miles up. About 1^ mile within the entrance on
the north shore is a cove, called Admiral's Cove, in which is anchorage in about 12 fathoms
water, good ground, but exposed to the south-east. The best anchorage is above the
Narrows, in about 7 fathoms water. The only danger in sailing up the harbour is a
ledge, called Saturday's Ledge, which lies about a cable and a half s length without th^
Narrows on the north shore. If you are coming in from the northward, keep the Sad-
dle on Brigus Head open witti tlie point of Admiral's Cove, as it will carry you clear
of this ledge. After you are above the Narrows, you may anchor in about 7 fathoms
water, good ground, where you will be conveniently situated for obtaining wood
and water.

Close to the northward of Brigus Head is the small cove of that name, fit only for
boats.

Cape Neddick lies 4| miles from Cape Broyle, and 7^ miles from the Hare's Ears off
Ferryland : it is a table land, of moderate height, and steep towards the sea. From
C^e Neddick to Baleine Head, the distance is 1| mile. Baleine Cove is about one-
quarter of a mile to the northward of Baleine Head, and is but a small place, fit only
forboats. From Cape Neddick to the outer point of Great Island, the course is N.E.
by £. I E., distance 2 ^ miles. This island is about half a mile in length, and of
moderate height.

From Baleme Head to Spear Isle, the course is N.N.E. h E., distance 1 mile. "Within
this island a fishery is carried on, but there is no safe anchorage, the bottom being
rooky. Toad's Cove is about a mile to the northward of Spear Isle, and is only fit for
boats. About 1 ) mile from Spear Isle, lies the south point of Momables Buy, called
Tinker's Point ; from which to the north point of the said bay, being the south point of

y-s^H

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

/»

/^^'^

%->i^

V 1

\ •

Witless Bay, the distance is about If mile. Momables Bay is an open bay, about one
mile deep.

Green Island is a small round island, about three-quttrters of a mile from the south
point of Witless Bay. From this pomt a ledge of rocks extends about one-third of the
distance over to Green Island.

The south point of Gull Island lies about three-quarters of a mile to the northward
of Green Island. The island is about one mile long, and a quarter of a mile broad,
and is pretty high land.

WITLESS BAY extends inwards about 2 miles from Gull Island, and affords a
moderate depth of water, and good ground, but open to the sea. About half-way up,
on the north shore, there is a ledge of rocks, partly above water at about half-tide.

BAY OF BULLS. — One mile and a quarter to the northward of Gull Island, is the
south point of the entrance into the Bay of Bulls ; from this point to the north point of
the said bay, called Bull Head, the course is N.E. by E., distance l;; mile. The best
anchorage in ibis bay for large vesisels, is about half a mile from the head, in about 14
fathoms water, but small vessels may anchor higher up, and moor to the north shore,
where they will lie land-locked. The only dangers in this harbour are a small rock off
Bread and Cheese Point, but not above 20 yards off, and a rock, on which are 9 feet
water, lying off Margoty Cove, aboi;t half a cable's length from the shore.

From Bull's Head to the south point of Petty (Petit) Harbour, from which a reef
extends about a quarter of a mile, the course is N.E. about 8;^ miles. The south point
of Petty Harbour is distant from the north point 2^ miles; between which is the bay
running in 2 miles, and having at the bottom of it a cove and fishery. About midtway
between the Bay of Bulls and lAttle Bay is a cavern, having an opening at the summit,
through which the water spouts whenever the sea runs high, thus presenting a remark-
able object, visible a considerable distance off; it is hence called the Spout.

CAPE SPEAR. — From the north point of Petty Harbour to Cape Spear, the course
is N.E., distance 2j miles. This point is rather low and ragged, and may be known by
the land to the northward trending away to the N.W. Cape Spear is the easternmost
point of Newfoundland, in lat. 47° 30' 20" N., and long. 62° 37' 20" W., and is the point to
which vessels, bound from the eastward for St. John's, generally steer, upon getting into
soundings.

The lighthouse on Cape Spear exhibits a powerful revolving light, at 275 feet above
the level of the sea, which in clear weather may be seen at 8 leagues off. The light
shows a brilliant flash at intervals uf one minute.

There are three bays between Cape Spear and the entrance to St. John's: 1, Cape
Bay lying between Cape Spear and Black Head; 2, Deadman's Bay between Black
Head and Sniall Point; and, 3, Freshwater Bay between Small Point and Fort Amherst.

From Fort Amherst, on the south head at the entrance of St. John's Harbour, there
is shown a brilliant fixed light, which, from its elevation, may be seen at a considerable
distance.

ST. JOBU's BABBOUB. - The city of St. John's is the capital of the island, being the seat
of Government ; and although its approach is narrow, its harbour is excellent, and its
situation readily known, botn by the block-house on Signal Hill, at the north side, and
Fort Amherst, on its south side, or point of entrance. The channel, from point to point, is
only about one-sixth of a mile wide ; but it gets wider just within the points than between
them, decreasing again as you approach the Chain Kock ; for, from the latter to the
Pancake Bock, the distance is only 05 fathoms ; these rocks both being above water
and steep-to : Chain is the northern rock, and Pancake Rock lies on the south side of
the channel. Three small knolls lie between the two latter rocks in the narrows, with
18 to 24 feet on them.

In approaching the harbour of St. John's with a large ship, care must be taken to
avoid the Vestal Rock, which lies about 50 fathoms off the southern, or Fort Amherst
Point ; over this rock are 18 feet water : the marks for it are Fort William, or the old
garrison, just open of the south head ; and the outer Wash-ball Rock, open to the
eastward of the Cuckold's Head : these latter rocks lie close to the northern point of
the harbour, and are always above water, being steep-to, and therefore not dangerous.
The course in is N.W. by W., the shore continuing bold until you get near to the
Pancake, then give the south side a small berth ; continue the same course, or rather
more inclined to the westward, keeping Fort Amherst flag-staff open to the northward
of Frederick's Battery flag-staff; you will, by these means, avoid the Prosser, a rock
on the port side, running ofl' the end of another rock, formed like a saddle, with 19 foet

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

water in the hollow, and only 6 feet on its outside ; yet it is steep-to, having not less
thanO fathoms close to it; so soon as vou are within, and have passed the Prosser
Rocks, you may steer up as you please, both shores beine clear of dangers, and anchor
in from 4 to 10 fathoms water, on a bottom of mud, and lying quite laud-locked.

The winds from the S.W. to the southward, as far as N.E. by E. blow in, all other
directions of the wind either baffle or blow out of the Narrows; with the latter winds
you must warp in, for the convenience of doing which rings are fixed in the rocks on
each side. The anchorage within the Narrowu has from 10 to 16 fathomH, and a little
before you enter the NaiTows there are 20 fathoms.

The tides rise 5, neaps 3i feet, but very irregular, being much influenced by the
winds ; and the variation is about two points westerly. It is high water, F. & C, at
about 7h. dOm.

The town of St. John is composed of one long street, running nearly parallel to the
shore, and of several shorter streets or lanes which branch from the street at right
angles. Most of the houses are of wood, some are of brick, and others of stone. The
shore is entirely lined by wharves, which are mostly occupied by stages for curing fish.
The government has a fine wide wharf, which is open to th^ public. The population
of the town fluctuates extremely with the season. At the height of the tishing the
place is crowded, but many of its then inhabitants return to Europe in the trading
vessels. St. John's is built on a penisula, which Lord Baltimore named the province of
Avalon. The entrance to the harbour is guarded by various batteries, and formerly a
chain was extended from the Chain Rock (hence its name), to prevent the entrance uf
a hostile force.

A stranger tu the coast should be careful not to mistake Kitty Vitty, a small place,
fit only for boats, lying about a mile to the northward of St. John's, for St. John's itself,
as at a distance it has the appearance of a good harbour. He will therefore observe,
that at Kitty Vitty's south side is a round hill, shaped like a haycock, standing upon
Cuckold's Head ; while St. John's Harbour may be distinguished by Fort Amhersi,
which appears white, and by the flag-staves on the hill, over the north point of en-
trance, which sufficiently denote the right entrance.

About a mile from Cuckold's Point, is a small point or projection of the land ; and 2
miles farther is Sugar-Loaf Point, tapering upward, and much resembling a sugar-loaf.
One league farther is Red Head, having a small place called Logy Bay between.

TORBAY. — One mile and a half from Red Head, is the south point of Torbay,
which is somewhat lower than the others. From this point to Green Cove, the cus-
tomary place where vessels anchor, the course is about W.N.W. 2 miles, where you
may ride in 14 and 12 fathoms, but much exposed to seaward. This bay is large, being
fully a league in extent. From off its northern point is aflat rock, where the sea breaks.
A heavy swell sets from the eastward into the bay, so that it h not a good place to
lie in.

From Flat Rock Point, which is low, dark land, the coast runs northerly to Red
Head, a distance of 2 miles ; and from thence to Black Head, in the same direction, 2
miles more.

CAPE ST. FRANCIS.— From Black Head to Cape St. Francis, the coui-se is N.N.W.,
distance one league. Cape St. Francis has a white appearance, and is itself low, but
above it the land rises high. A little south of the cape is Shoe Cove, a place used in
bad weather for' splitting and salting fish. Off the cove there is good fishing, and with
northerly, westerly, and southerly winds, you will lie safe within the cove.

About 1^ mile to the eastward of Cape St. Francis, in a triangular position, lie some
sunken rocks, called the Brandy Rocks, on which the sea generally breaks. There is a
channel between them and the cape, but too dangerous to be made use of, while the
rocks add to the satety of Shoe Cove. Another small cove, to the northward of the
cape, may be used with the wind off-shore.

FROM CAPE ST. FRANCIS TO BOCALIEU ISLAND.

-f^ A

A I

.—•From Cape St. Francis, the southern point of Conception

• It is fact worthy of notice, that the whole of the land in and about the neighbourhood of
Coneeption Bay, very probably the whole island, is rising out of the oceau at a rate which pro-
mises, at no very distant day, materially to affect, if not to render useless, many of the best
harktours ws have now on the coast. At Fortgrave a series of observations have been made,

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

K^-^'%

Bay, to Bocalieu Island, the northern boundary of the entrance, the course and distance
is N.N.E. 4 E. about 18 miles. This bay is very extensive, running to the south-west-
ward, and contains many smaller bays and inlets, of which we proceed to give a more
minute description.

BELLE ISLE.— Four leagues S.W by W. from Cape St. Francis is a lofty island
named Belle Isle, which is 6^ miles in length, and about 2 miles wide. Its eastern side
is nearly 3 miles off the main, and there is on this side a beach, to the southward of
which is good anchorage in 30 fathoms, sandy ground: a league farther, near the south
part of the island, is also tolerable anchorage in from 15 to 30 fathoms. At tha south
end of the island is a small cove, named Lance Cove, where fishing vessels occasionally
resort, and find good shelter for 5 or 6 vessels. One mile from the south part of the
island lies a rock, over which are 3 fathoms water. Two miles to the southward of
Lance Cove, is a small low island, named Little Belle Isle, having to the W.S.W. of it,
distant 1| mile, Kellv's Island, of middlir:g height, and about three-quarters of a mile in
length. On the mam, within Belle Isle, is Portugal Cove, in which there is no safe an-
chorage. Broad Cove lies to the southward of Portugal Cove, and at the bottom of
the bay is Holyrood Harbour, which runs in about 3| miles, and where, in a cove on the
west side near the head, is very good anchorage in 10 or 12 fathoms water, and suflScient
room to moor.

At 1| mile distant from Holyrood Harbour is Harbour Main, al|»ut half a mile wide
and 1^ mile deep, having anchorage ne&' the head in 7 to 10 fathoms water, but it is
entirely open.

SALMON COVE. — Salmon Cove lies about a mile to the westward of Harbour
Main. The entrance to it is about a mile wide, and runs to the W.S.W. about 2^ miles,
then dividing into two arms, one running to the westward one mile nearly, and the
other to the southward 1| mile. In either of these arms there ib very eood anchorage,
but the best is in the southern arm in from 5 to 10 fathoms water, there oeine no danger
in going into it. To sail into the western arm, keep a rock above water off the point on
the port hand, going in, well on board, in order to avoid a sunken rock that lies nearly
opposite, a smaU distance from the starboard shore ; there is a passage on either side
of this rdlbk, but the southern is by far the widest

About a league to the westward of Salmon Cove lies Collier's Bay, which runs in
nearly 2 leagues. About 1^ mile from the entrance there is a sunken rock near mid-
channel, on either side of which is a safe passage up the bay : this rock shows at three-
quarters ebb. At 2| miles from the entrance, on the east side, is anchorage in about
10 fathoms water before a cove: small vessels may haul into the cove, and lie in 3 or
4 fathoms water, aud moor to the shores. About 1^ mile higher up, on the same side,
is another cove, but there is no anchorage in it, being shoal and fiill of sunken rocks.
Near the head of the bay is very good anchorage in 9 or 10 fathoms water.

About 2 miles to the northward of Collier's Bay is situated Brigus '^ay, which runs in
from Brigus Head 1| mile; in it is anchorage in 10 or 15 fathoms .vater,but it is en-
tirely open. At the head of the bay, on the south side, is an island, within which ves-
sels may anchor in 3 or 4 fathoms water, but must moor to the shores, where they will
be secure from all winds.

PORTGRAVE BAY lies to the northward of Brigus, and has within it Sheep's or
Ship Cove, and Cupid Cove; the latter lies on the south side of Portgrave Bay, and has
in it good anchorage in 5 or 6 fathoms water, with room for 2 or 3 ships to he at their
anchors, almost land locked. Its north side is so bold that ships lie alongside the rocks,
and take in their cargoes. The land on the northern side of the entrance is remarkably
high, and thence called Spectacle Head.

Sheep's or Ship Cove has within it 4 and 5 fathoms water, and will accommodate
small vessels mooring head and stem, having their S.W. anchor in 22 fathoms, about
1; cable's leneth from the ship.

Portgrave is about three-quarters of a mile to the westward of Sheep's Cove.
Within the islands the water is shallow and fit only for boats ; but about one-third o f

wliioh uadeniably prove the rapid displacement of the sealevel in that vicinity. Sereni large
flat rocks, over which schuouers might puss some thirty or forty years ago, with the greatest
faoiliiy, are now approaching the surface, the wat e^J^ inp scarcely navigable for a skiff. At a
place called Go8b, at the head of Bay Roberts, i»p<dB of a mile from the sea shore, and at
several feet above its level, covered «'I;b five or six (m of vegetable mould, there is a perfect
beach, the stones being rouuded, of a modf rate size, and in all respects similar to those ouir
found in the adjacent landwashes. — Ncwjoundfand Timen,

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

a mile without them is anchorage in ?0 to 25 fathoms water, but quite exposed to south-
easterly winds.

From Burnt Head, the south point of Fortgraye Bay, to Bay Robert's Point, the south-
em point of the entrance to Robert's Bay, the bearing and distance are N.E. \ N. 2|
miles. About one mile to the southward of Bay Robert's Point is Blow-me-down Head,
remarkable by being higher than the land near it : between Bay Robert's Point and
Blow-me-down Head is a small cove called Hibb Hole.

In Bay Robert there is no invisible danger at its entrance. In sailing in you may
borrow on either side, or go close to an island, of a moderate height, which lies about
a mile from the entrance on the starboard side ; and having passed the island von may
run on about a mile, and lie land-locked in 9 or 10 fathoms. Between the island and
the main vessels may anchor, but the ground is bad, and there are two sunken rocks
within it, one lying near the inner side of the island, and the other above the island
near the main. Two miles above the island on the same side is the north-west arm, in
m which is excellent anchorage in 5 or 6 fathoms water, on a muddy bottom, but it is

"'■ necessary in sailing in to give the south point a good berth, in order to avoid some

sunken rocks lying off it. On the starboard shore it is shoal also, near half a cable's
length off.

Spaniard's Bay is separated from Bay Robert by a narrow neck of land. It is about
one mile wide and foux miles deep, having anchorage near its head in 7 or 6 fathoms
water, but open to S.E. winds.

From Spaniard's Bay to Harbour Grace Islands, the bearing and distance are N.E.
about 2 leagues. These islands lie off the south point of the entrance of Harbour Grace.
No vessel should attempt a passage between them and the main, as the ground is foul
and shoal, and there are rocks about the islets. On one of these islands there is a
lighthouse, which shows a fixed light from the top of a square wooden building. Bry-
ant's Cove, to the southward of Harbour Grace, is not a place for ships, although a good
place for fish. A rock lies in the middle of the entrance, having on each side of it 4
and 5 fathoms water. The ground within the rock is clean.

HARBOUR GRACE. — The entrance of this harbour lies to the northward ofHar-
bour Grace Islands. A rock, called the Salvage, stands nearly in the middle m the
channel; and there is another called Long Harry, near the nortn shore, having only a
boat passage between it and the main : both are of considerable height above the water.
IVithm the bay, a bar or ledge extends from the south side, more than half-way over.
You may turn into Harbour Grace, all the bay over from side to side. The Salvage
may L 3 passed on either side, as most convenient ; and having passed within this rock,
you may go from side to side, by the lead, till you draw towards the edge of the bank,
then proceed by the North Shore.

You may know when you are near the bar, or ledge, by two white rocks on the land,
by the water side, in a bank on the north side, which show whiter than any other part;
these are about a mile below, or to the eastward of the beach, which is proper to be
known : by keeping near the north shore, you will find 3f fathoms on the bar, and pre-
sently after 4, 5, 6, and 7 fathoms ; but if you stand over to the southward, till you have
advanced within the bar, or ledge, you will not have above 7, 8, or 9 feet of water. This
sand trends S.E. from athwart the two white rocks above mentioned, and extends up to
the south shore. Having passed its outer extremity, you may turn from side to side
till within the beach, on the north side, and ride land-locked in 4, 5, or 6 fathoms, or
hijodier up in 7, 8, 9, or 10 fathoms, as you please.

To the northward of Harbour Grace lie Carboniere Island and Harbour, a short dis-
tance to the southward of which is situated Mosquito Cove, in which is good anchorage
on clean ground, although it is little frequented.

CARBONIERE ISLAND AND HARBOUR.— Carboniere Island lies one mile
from shore : its south end is low, and has, or had, a fort on it. The island is bold-to,
as are also the shores of the harbour ; but off the S.W. end of the island are several
rocks under water, which render the passage between the island and the main very dan-
gerous. On the north side, opposite Carboniere Island are two coves, namely, Clown's Cove,
and Crocker's Cove, off which are several rocks both above and under water; therefore,
in sailing or working in or out of Carboniere, give the rocks a small berth, and after you
reach Otterbury Point, you may stand cl<;|M^yer on either shore till you come near the
head of the harbour. You may ancho^m what depth you please in from 6 to 10
fathoms, but the ground is indifferent, being in some parts rocky.
From Carboniere Island to Salmon Cove Head, the bearing and distance are N.E. by

/ >

f*A-

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

l.r> .--•* '— ■^

N. about 2 miles. Salmon Cove Head is a remarkable higb steep head, having to the
northward of it a cove which affords shelter for boats.

From Salmon Cove Head to Broad Cove Head, to the northward, the distance is 4
miles; and from the latter head to Green or Western Bav Point, the distance is about
3| miles. Off Broad Cove and along shore about one mile to the northward, is anchor-
age in 10 to 15 fathoms water.

GREEN OR WESTERN BAY.— In the entrance of this bay is very good anchor-
aae in 15 or 16 fathoms water, taking care not to go too far into the bay, leit the wind
should come to the eastward, as it lies entirely open to the sea.

Devil's Point Cove lies 4| miles to the north-eastward of Green Bay, but is a place of
little conse<iuence. To the northward of it is Island Cove, and still farther to the
northward is Flamboroueh Head, which is black and steep-to, but there is no place of
shelter near it except with off-shore winds.

BAY VERDE, where the ships lie, is about half a mile to the westward of the head.
The entrance is not above a cable'-i length across, and the ships lie in 5 fathoms water,
about half a cable's length from the head of the bay, vrith one anchor out astern, and
the other cable fast on shore ahead. There is room only for 7 or 8 ships to lie, even in
this manner ; and it is a dangerous place with south-westerly winds, which flow right
into it. Bay Verde is a place easily known by Bocalieu and the projecting land oalled
Split Point. Bay Verde Head itself will serve to point out its position, for these three
heads (Bay Verd Hej^ Split Point, and Bocalieu Island,) appear prominent bluff land
and are very similarWone another when seen from the southward; and there is no
hidden danger in entering the bay,

Bocalieu Island is high land, and is nearly 4 miles In length and li broad, and lies
about the latter distance from the main. Nearly mid-way between its south puint and
Split Point there is a small rock, on which are 6 fathoms water, and on which the sea
breaks very high in blowing weather, but the water is deep round it.

About 4| miles to the northward of Split Point b Point Orates, having rounded
which, you will open Trinity Bay.

FROM BOCALIEU ISLAND TO CAPE BONA VISTA.

TBlcnrr bat.— This extensive bay, between Bocalieu or Bacalhao Island on the
S.E. and Trinity Harbour on the N.W., is 7 leagues in breadth, and about 20 leagues
in depth. The south-eastern point of the bay is named Point Orates ; the next point is
Break-heart Point, between which there is a small bay where boats may lie with off-
shore winds, but within the bay there is a ledge of rocks, which, however, show above
water. The course from Break-heart Point to Sherwick Point is S.W. by W. 3 miles.
Scurvy Island lies some distance from shore, to the southward of Break-heart Point ;
between it and Sherwick, the coast falls in a pretty deep bay, winding S.S.E. three-
quarters of a mile.

OLD PERLIUAN. — Sherwick Point, off which is a rock above water, forms the
northern point of Old Perlican ; vessels cannot go between the island and point, al-
though the passage appears good and open, because the ground is alto^:etber foul and
rocky ; always, therefore, run in to the southward of the island, and when you have
passed it, anchor in 4 or 5 fathoms. This cannot be considered a good harbour as the
ground is bad for holding, and with the wind at N.W. you will be obliged to buoy
your cables.

The course from Old Perlican to Salvage Point is W. f N. distant 5 miles. Salvage
Point is low, and requires a good berth, having a reef of rocks running out from it
nearly a mile.

The course from Salvage Point to Hunt's Head is W by S. a distance of about 6|
miles ; and to the eastward of the head, at a mile distance, is Hunt's Harbour, which is
fit for small craft only. Hunt's Harbour Rock, over which the sea generally breaks,
lies 2 miles off Hunt's Harbour, 'and you may clear it to the northward by bringing
King's Head open of the Sugar Loaf. At two miles farther is King's Head, and from
King's Head to the Sugar Loafj^e course and distance is S.V. | W. about 3 miles.

Sillee Cove lies eastward of tne Sugar Loaf, and is fit only for boats.

NEW PERLICAN.— The course and distance from the Sugar Loaf to the north
point of the entrance of New Perlicw, are S.W. j W. 2 miles; and a mile farther is
the harbour which is small, but tolenBly good, and where you may lie land-locked in
5, 6. 7, 8, 9, or 10 fathoms. The shores are bold-to, and free from danger; the entrance

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

in nearly 2 milea wide, being bounded by Smutty Noae Point on the east, and Oorlob
Point on the west, but aa you advance the harbour becomea narrowar, ao that at the
allchora^e it will scarcely be half a mile broad.

Three miles from New Perlican is Heart's Content, a good harbour, fit for any ship,
with excellent anchorage towards the north shore, in from 8 to 12 fathoms water. One
league farther is Heart's Desire, fit for boats only ; and 3^ miles beyond that is Heart's
Delight, another cove, adapted for small craft only.

From Heart's Delight, about 3 miles, is Long Point, projecting considerably into the
bay, and a league farther is Witless Bay, by no means a place ofsafety, being too much
exposed, and tne bottom rocky ; between Long Point and Witless Bay are two small
islands, which you leave on your port side. One mile from Witless Bay is Qreen Har-
bour, where vessels may anchor in from 7 to 10 fathoms, and three miles farther is Hope-
alUa-head ; two miles beyond which is New Harbour, a place of shoal water, and only
fit for boats.

DILDO HARBOUR.— Two and a half miles from New Harbour is Dildo Harbour,
within which is very good anchorage, in a cove, at the northern side of the entrance, in
from 8 to 20 fathoms water, good clean ground. Three miles from thence is Chappie
Bay, the entrance of which is a mile broad, and the bay about 3 miles deep: here, behind a
small island about 2 miles in, is good and lorage, in from 8 to 12 fathoms. Long Cove
is situated about 3 miles to the northward, running nearly in the same direction to
Chappie Bay ; 7 miles farther is the Point of Tickle Harbour Wtk, which runs inward,
in a south-westerly direction, full 8 miles; there is no danger m the way, and, though
little frequented, the anchorage is safe.

THE BAY OF BULLS runs in a N.N.- Westerly direction to within 2 miles of
Chance River, in Placentia Bay. There is very good anchorage in various parts of this
bav, in 12 and 10 fathoms water, particularly on the western side, in a cove, about 1^
mile from the entrance, with from 10 to 15 fathoms, sandy ground. To the N.E. is
Bull Island, and 5 miles further Copper Island : both these he very near the shore. To
the northward of the Bay of Bulls la situated Deer Harbour.

Deer Harbour is an extensive place, with good anchorage, but barred with many
shoals, the first of which lies mid-way between Tickle Point and Deer Island, having 6
fathoms on its shallowest part, and therefore is not dangerous ; but one-third of a mde
farther in is a bank, with only 2 and 2^ fathoms water; bring the point of the N.E.
cove open of Shallop Cove Point, and you will go clear to the westward in 7 fathoms
water. There is also another shoal lying off the point on the outside of Shallop Cove,
on which are 2^ fathoms, which will be avoided by just opening the point of Deer
Island with the fhrst point on the main, within Deer Island ; and after you have passed
Harbour Island, you may anchor on good ground, in from 10 to 26 fathoms. The en-
trance of Deer Harbour bears from the north point of Bocalieu Island, W. ^ S., distance
about 13 leagues.

About 2'^ miles N.E. from the entrance to Deer Harbour is Jones' Harbour, the en-
trance of which is not above a quarter of a mile vide, and the channel in is, in several
parts, still less : it runs in 2^ or 3 miles, and has good anchorage in from 5 to 24faihoms
water. To the southward is a high and steep inland, called Jones' Island; about4 miles
from which is Bald Head; and 2 miles farther Oanny Cove, having its entrance confined,
being not more than a quarter of a mile wide, but there is, nevertheless, good riding
withm it in 10, 12 and 15 fathoms. About a cable's length off the north shore, just at
the entrance, lies a sunken rock, and about a mile S.S.E. from the south point of Long
Island, is another rock, by some called White Island, just appearing above water ; this
rock bears S.W. from Random South Head.

Random North Head lies W. by N., distant 9^ leagues, from the north end of Bocalieu
Island, and about 4J leagues N. by W. from New Perlican.

RANDOM SOUND lies to the westward, and comprehends several arms and har-
bours ; thus Random and Smith's Sounds unite and f( rm Random Island, the channels
being narrow, long, and circuitous. At the junction of the two sounds is a small
island, with a bar of only 2 fathoms water, the passage being not a mile broad.

About 3 leagues from Random North Head lies Ij^/ckman's Harbour, where you
will find good anchorage in 15 fathoms. Random North Head bears from Random
South Head N.E. ^ E., distance 3 miles. When you are within the entrance of Random
Sound there is a branch which runs towards the smith-west, about a mile within which
is Fox Cove, fit for boat^i, and 2 miles farther %ttle Heart's Ease, a similar cove
running in a quarter of a mile, then dividing into two branches ; .he western one has

EAST COAST OP NEWFOUNDLAND.

\ ,■■;:»
/

4 and 5 finthoms within it, but the eMtem branch is shallow and only adaptad for
boata. There ia also anchorage 2 miles farther, on the same side, in a cove with an
island before it, with 8 fathoms, and not far from this another cove on the northern
side, where a veKsel may ride in 7 fathoms.

SMITH'S SOUND has generally deep water, and is in most places one mile wide,
until yuu get near the head. Shut-in Harbour is on the starboard side, nearly at the
entrance, and has no safe anchorage, theprround being rooky; 3 miles farther up is Pope's
Harbour, which aUo is encumbered with rocks, a shoal lyinv near the middle of it.
The direction of the channel is westward about 7^ leagues, lo the eastward of Ran-
dom Island are Duck and Oreen Islands, both lying a considerable distance from the
main ; the latter is high and may be seen so far as Trinity Harbour, and bears from
Uonaventure Head about S.W. \ S., distant nearly 6 miles ; and Bonaventure Head
bears from the entrance of Smith's Sound £. by N., distant 5 miles. To the north-
westward of Oreen Island is Anthony Island and Ireland's Eye { the latter is 8} miles
in length, and lies in a S.W. and N.E. direction, making the port side of the entranon
to Smith's Sound. The northern point of Ireland's Eye bears from Bonaventure Head
nearly S.W., distant 5| miles.

Ryder's Harbour is a small place of anchorage formed by a little island near the
main, and bearing from Green Island W. \ N., distant 4 miles. The passage to it is
round the west end of the point, off which, are some scattered rooks, both above and
under water. Within this harbour are 3 fathoms water, and about a Quarter of a mile
from Ryder's Island the N. W. arm branches off, running westward one mile, and
being about a quarter of a mile wide; here are are 7 fathomsand good anchorage. From
Bonaventure Head to Port Bonavenlure are 2 miles, but when you are a mile off, and to
the southward of the head, the harbour to the Admiral's Stage will lie abou^ N. by W.

PORT BONAVENTURE.— The best entrance to Port Bonaventure is between
two sntall islands, but you mav go on either side of them in 3 and 4 fathoms water ;
with a leading wind there will be little danger, and when you are within, and have

1>a8sed these islands, anchor in 4 and 5 fathoms. Southerly winds here send in a very
tea vy sea; there is, however, a secure place for boats within a point behind the Admiral's
iStage, appearing like a great pond, where 100 boats may lie, even with bad weather,
in safety.

From Bocalieu North Point to Bonaventure Head, the course and distance are N.W.
I W. 22i miles. Bonaventure Head is remarkably high and steep.

TRINITY HARBOUR.— From Bonaventure Head to the entrance of Trinity
Harbour, the course and distance are N.E. ^ N. 4| miles, and from Bonaventure Head
to the Horse-Chops, E. | N., 8 miles.

Trinity Harbour is considered one of the best and largest harbours in all Newfound-
land, having several arms and covts, where some hundred shioaBay ride land-locked.
It is a place where you may safelv turn in or out, being boURo on each side, and
having no danger but what is visible; except when going into the S.W. arm, where
the Admiral's Stage usually is, there is a shoal, called the Muscle Bank, which shoots
oH' from the point within the small island on the port side ^oing in, and extends over
N.N.W. about a third of the breadth of that arm. Being within tiiatbank, which will
discover itself by the colour of the water, you may edge over close to the south shore,
or keep your lead going to avoid the Muscle Bank, giving it a little distance. In order
to avoid it, the mark is, or was, the house, standing over the steep perpendicular rock,
situated between Tavernor's Point and Ship Cove, open of the Neddick ; keep this
mark on, until you are half-way over to the Neddick, then haul towards the S.W.
branch, taking care to avoid the south shore, till you shut in Tavernor's Point with the
Neddick; you will then go within the Muscle Bank.

You may anchor in from 14 to 10 fathoms and approach near to the stage on shore,
so as to make a stage \tith top-masts to your stage on shore, to load or unload your
ship. This will be found a most excellent harbour ; for, after you are in the S.W. arm,
you will perceive another branch running up to the N.W., which is continued by an-
other to the S.W.; but there is a bar or ledge, at the entrance of the S.W. arm.

The N.W. arm is also a large place, having good anciiorage for 500sail of ships. Be-
sides the before-mentioned arms, the main harbour turns up to the north.

Ships, being within the harbour's mouth, may safely ride in a large cove on the star-
boai'd or east side, land-locked, on good ground: here the planters live. Over against
that cove, on the west side, are two other coves, the southernmost of which is named
thu Viee-Admiral's Cove, and is very convenient for curing fish ; and above, or to the

xV'

E AST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

northward of that, U a lar^e covo, or arm, called Gota' Covo, where there is room enough
for 300 or 40) sail of M\n lo ride, all on clear ground { there, neither winds, sea, nor
tide can hurt yuu, and in this place ships may lie unexposed until the weather becomes
clear and opun.

There are several other anchoring places in this harbour with good clean ground.
The bottom everywhere is tough clay, with 4 and 5 fathoms water, within two boats'
length of the shore; and 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, and 14 fathoms, and in some places more,
in tne middle of the arms and channels. You may turn in or out readily, observing
your tide, wi>ich riuos about 4 foel, and sometimes more.

Robinhood's Buy is formed on the south-west side by Sherwick Head. The entrance
is a mile wide, and the bay extends northward nearly 2 miU's ; here vessels frequently
ride and fish in from 7 to 17 fathoihs water. At the further or upper end of this bay
f| , there are some 8])ot8 of shallow water, but at its entrance, and between Sherwick and

Fox Island Points, there is no danger whatever.

Salmon Cove and English Harbour lie to the eastward of Robinhood's Bay, being
only divided from it by a narrow neck of 'land, called Fox's Island. The former or
these runs in northerly, and is considered a good fishing place as it is clear of dangers,
and has a good depth of water, trom 17 to 10 and 8 fathoms ; the eastern shore is bold-
to, and at the further end of the cove there is a small run of water, which extends about
2 miles to the northward.

English Harbour is situated at the south-eastern entrance of Salmon Cove. It is a
clean oay, where you may ride in 4 and 5 fathoms water. From hence the coast rounds
to the eastward to the Vlorse-Chops, a distance of more than 3 miles, and is all high
land, steep-to, and without danger. To the north-eastward of the Horse-Chops is
Green Bay, open and entirely exposed to the southward, and having at the eastern part
. , of it a small sandy beach with a rivulet of water: this place is little frequented, and is

•ij 1 neither convenient for ships to fish or ride lu. When you have passed this bay,

H t there is no sheltering cove or place until you reach Ragged and Catalina Harbours.

[I i Ragged Harbour is so named from the rough and craggy appearance of the surround-

i j ing rock«, which render it unsafe for either boats or ships to enter ; but for those who

•', } intead going there, we will observe, that they must go to the northward of the reef of

rocks at its entrance, running on North, until the harbour comes quite open, then you
steer in between the Round Island near the main, and a large black rook, being the
outermost of the ragged ones before mentioned ; sail on untilyou are to the westward
of them all, or until you get the south head of Catalina to appear between the western-
most rock and the main, when you may anchor. A river ot good water is at the head
of the harbour.

CATALINA HARBOUR is nearly 2 miles to the northward of Ragged Harbour.
It is a good harbour Iot small vessels, and may be known by a singular green island at
the south point of its entrance, nearly half a mile to the north of which are the Brandy
Rocks, a ledge over which the sea frequently breaks; you may go on either side of these
rocks, giving the little island a berth, or with a leading wind between the island and
the main, though this passage is exceeding narrow, in 4 and 5 fathoms. Just
within the entrance of the harbour is Charlton Rock or Shoal, lying nearly mid-
channel, over which are only 8 feet water ; you must avoid bringing the north point of
Green Island on with Burnt Head, the south point of the harbour, for that will carry
you right upon the rock. There is a passage between the island and the rock, and also
between the rock and the north shore, only steering nearer the main about two-thirds
over.

LITTLE CATALINA BAY lies inwards on the soul!.:^- side. From Catalina
Harbour to Little Catalina the course is about N.E. 1| mile; and thence to the north
head of the bay, E.N.E. a little easterly, 3^ miles. When within the harbour you may
anchor close to the shore in 4 and 5 fathoms, land-locked ; or to the southward of the
little green island in 3^ fathoms, or by running up 2 miles farther obtain fresh water.
In the S.W. arm or branch of the river, where there is anchorage in 6 fathoms, the har-
bour runs westerly. Sometimes the water in this harbour will suddenly rise 3 or 4 feet,
then fall again, and in certain seasons it will often do so two or three times in 3 or 4
hours. It abounds with salmon, and the herb Alexander grows luxuriantly on the
little island. Near a small cove at the N.W., is a sort of mineral, of a glittering nature,
generally called Fire-stone. Excellent wil licks m^ be found on the rocks.

The course from the south to the north head of Catalina is N.E. f E., 6i miles, and
between them from 13 to 5 fathoms water may be found. The whole way is a kind

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

of broken ground, over which, in blow nf; weather, the ma breaks very high.

From the north head of Cataltna to Flower's Point, the coune it N.N.E. 4 E., diatant
2\ milen ; and one mile to the eantward of the poin t He some sunken rooks. You mav go
between Flower's Point and these rooks, in six fathoms watrr, but it is more advisable to
pass on the outside of them ; this you will readily do by bringing OuU Island open
of Spiller's Point, or by keeping the K(i<tth head of Oatalina open of the north head.

BIRD ISLAND.— From Flower's Pou ' to Bird Island are 2 miles. Within Bird
Island is a small bay where ships can occasionally ride, in one branch which runs up
towards the west, and in the other, amidst some rucks which are aboYi water. Bird
Island Bay extends as far as Cape L'Argent.

From Flower's Point to Capo L'Argent are 3| miles ; it is rather a low rocky point,
having also a large rock above water lying off it.

From Cape 1/ Argent to Spiller's Point, is 1 ^ mile ; between these two points the
lead falls into very deep water. Spiller's Point is steep and bold-to, but not very high,
with a rock above water near it ; over the point you may discern the high land of Port
Bonavista a great way off at sea.

From Spiller's Point to Cape Bonavista the course is N. 2| miles : there is a deep
bajr between, which might be mistaken for the harbour of Bonavista, from the head of
which it is only divided by a neck of land, 2 miles over, and from Red Head Bay, it is
not above a musket-shot.

FROM CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE FREEL8.

.^^

OAVa BOIVAVISTA is situated in lat. 48° 42' N., and long. 5S° 5' 30" W., and
appears at a distance of a blueish or sky colour ; it is a steep rocky point, having 4 fa<
thorns close to its base.

A revolving light, showing a red-and-white light alternately, at intervals of 2 min-
utes, is situated on Cape Bonavista. It is elevated 160 feet above the level of the sen,
and, kept open of Spiller's Point, will keep vessels dear of the Flower's Rooks.

About half a mile N.N.E. from the extremity of the cape lies Gull Island, which,
though small, may easily be recognised, as it is of moderate height and elevated in the
middle, and makes something like a round hat with broad sreen brims ; it is visible 4
or 5 leagues off, when the weather is clear. N.N.E. ^ E., distant 3| miles from Gull
Island, is the Old Harry Rook, of only 13 feet water, from which a reef or bank extends
to the N.E. nearlv 3 miles, having several dangerous spots upon it, of only 18 feet and
3 or 4 fathoms ; the outer edge of this danger is named the Young Harry ; at its north-
em extremity are 10 fathoms water, and a little farther off 45 fathoms. Between the
Young Harry wd the middle ground of 18 feet, are 12, 20, and 50 fathoms ; to the
northward of tne middle ground are 60 and 40 fathoms; to the eastward 19
and 20 fathoms; to the southward, and between it and the Old Harry, 26 and
31 fathoms. At the north part of the Old Harry are 11 fathoms ; to the westward
30 fathoms ; to the S.W. 9 fathoms ; and a little farther S. W. 57 fathoms. Abundance
of fish are caught by the boats which freouent this bank, but it is very dangerous for ship-
ing. "The sea commonly breaks over Old Harry, unless in fine weather and the water
e very smooth, but the other part of the shoale show themselves only in, or immedi-
ately after, heavy gales on the shore.

In order to avoid the Old Harry, Gull Island should be brought on with the Green
Ridge, which lies considerably inland ; but you must be cautious, for this mark will
carry you too close to the Young Harry. Captain Bullock says : — " Vessels running
along shore, to avoid these rocks, must be careful in keeping Cape Bonavista open
with the westernmost extremity of a high range of land to the southward, called the Inner
Ridge; these dangers, together with the long ledge, named the Flower's Rocks, already
noticed, render it very imprudent for a manner to attempt making land hereabout in
thick or boisterous weather; indeed, at any time, the Island of Bocalieu is the best and
safest land-fall for the stranger that is bound to any part of Bonavista Bay."

BOJTAVISTA BAT. — This extensive bay is limited by Cape Bonavista on the
south, and Cape Freels on the north. The bearing and distance from one to the other
are N. f E. and S. f W., 37 miles. The whole coast between is tortuous or much in-
dented, rocky, difficult, and dangerous. On the south, the land is high and moun-
tainous, and the coast steep and iron-bound ; on the north side it is low and marshy,
and from the shore the water is shoal to a considerable distance. The bay abounds
with tmall islands, and is encompaased with dangera on erery aidb. The lUM^un,

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

'il

sounds and inlets, are deep, extensive, numerous, well sheltered, and safe ; but they
are generally so deeply embayed, the passages into them so intricate, and the sur-
rounding land so similar in appearance, that their navigation is seldom attempted,
nnless by those who, from long experience, have a perfect knowledge of the coast ; yet,
should it become necessary, from stress of weather or other circumstances, for a stranger
to seek shelter, the places recommended for this purpose are, Barrow and Great Chance
Harbours, in the S. W. part of the bay, or New Harbour and Cat Cove on the N.W. ;
but the extreme narrowness of the entrance to New Harbour is a great impediment,
and renders Cat Cove the most preferable.

PORT BONA VISTA.— From Cape Bonavista to Port Bonavista the courses are
south-eastward about 4 miles. Vessels steering for this port may pass between Gull
Island and the cape, or between Gull Island and the Old Harry Rock, or to the north-
ward of the Young Harry altogether. The passage between Gull Island and Bonavista
is about three-quarters of a mile wide, and both the cape, and island are steep-to,
having 4 fathoms close to each side, and 16 or 18 fathoms mid-channel ; but it will be
advisable not to go too near Gull Island, on account of a rock under water, which lies
about 300 yards off the south-eastern part of the island. When you have passed
through this channel, and find yourself to the westward of the cape, you will see Green
Island, distant about half a mile from the cape. Large vessels commonly leave Green
Island on their port side in their course to Port Bonavista, going between Green and
Stone Islands, where the channel is full 1^ mile wide, and with 12, 16, and 18 fathoms
water in it, and no danger except a sunken rock of 3 fathoms water, which lies about
200 yards to the north-eastward of Green Island ; or they may go to the westward of
Stone Island, and run to the southward till they open the Harbour of Bonavista, and
are past Moses Point, and so to the southward of the rocks called the Swerrys, which
are high rocks, having no passage to the northward of them. Here you may anchor in
from 10 to 8 fathoms, as you please, but you must always have a good anchor in the
S.W., and another fast in the Swerrys, or in the N.W., for westerly winds blow directly
into the road.

Small vessels may go between Green Island and the main, and so tr Red Head; but
the bay between the points (over against Green Island) and Red Head, is all fonl
ground. About a mile to the south-eastward of Green Island is a reef named the Red
Rocks, lying off Red Cove. You may go between these and the land into Red Cove,
as there are 6 fathoms water, and in the cove 4h, 4, and 3 fathoms, but the ground is all
fonl. There is a passage also to the southward of these rocks, and between them and
the Western Head, in which are 6 fathoms. There is a small rock under water, a little
to the eastward of Western Head, which lies about a cable's length from the shore,
and the sea commonly breaks over it, but boats can go between it and the shore. To
the southward is Red Head, or Point, and farther on is Moses Pomt ; between is a
large bay or cove, named Bayley's Cove, where you may anchor on occasion, not ad-
vancing too far in, as all its shore is rocky and shoal.

Bonavista Harbour is an anchorage of little consideration, farther than being an
eligible situation for carrying on the fishery, being so very badly sheltered that, in N.W.
gales, immediately following a continuance of heavy winds from seaward, the water
breaks right athwart the harbour, and sometimes the whole of the fishing-boats foun-
der at their anchors, and not un!'re(iuently many of their stages are destroyed: how-
ever, vessels, during the summer months, moor under Swerry Head, in 8 or 10 fathoms;
but even there, as in every other part of the harbour, the ground is so rocky and un-
even, that they are obliged to buov up their cables.

BLACK HEAD BAY is situated 5 miles W.S.W. i S. from Cape Bonavista, and
Southern Head is 11 miles W. | N. from Cape Bonavista. Southern Head and Black
Head form the two extremities of Black Head Bay, and bear from each other E.S.E.
I S., and W.N.W. f N., at a distance of about 7 miles. On the S.W. side of this bay,
at about 3^ miles to the southward of Southern Head, is the fishing-establishment at
King's Cove ; but this is even a less desirable place of shelter than Bonavista, as it lies
directly open to seaward, and has a foul bottom.

From Southern Head to Western Head the distance is 3^ miles, the coast between
forming five coves, at the second of which, Keels, is a fishing- village j but neither this
nor any of the other coves are fit places for vessels of burthen.

From Western Head the land bends W.S.W. ^ S., and leads to numerous coves,
bays, and arms of the sea, most of which have deep water and places of anchorage.
We Bhall here enumerate the principal of these, with their respective situations ; btit,

V '

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

as many of them are too deeply embayed for general navigation, we shall not extend
our directions to a minute or particular description of them all, but confine ourselves
to such only as are situated in prominent parts of the bay, and are mostly fitted for
general use, and commonly frequented.

Plate Cove is situated on the coast about 7| miles distant from Western Head; its
entrance, between Arrow Point and Plate Cove Head is three-quarters of a mile wide,
from whence it bends in more than a mile to the southward. At its eastern extremity
is a run of fresh water, but the bottom is foul and rocky ; it is therefore not much fre-
quented.

Indian Arm lies about S.W. by W. from Plate Cove Head, distant 3 miles ; it is a
narrow inlet running in nearly S.W. about 2 miles, and terminates in a rivulet of fresh
water.

Southward Bay is separated from Indian Arm only by a narrow neck of land, and is
-to, an extensive branch of the sea. Its entrance, between Red Head and Kate's Harbour

Head, is fully a mile wide, with 30, 50, 80, and 90 fathoms water in mid-channel : from
hence it bends to the south-westward 7| miles, becoming narrower as you advance, but
with deep water and no danger. On the western sidll^ere is an opening named Playes
Cove, which lies about 2 miles from Kate Harbour Head.

Vessels intending to seek either of these places, must beware of the Bacon-bone
Rock, a danger of only 18 feet water, which lies W. | N., distant a inile from Western
Head, and directly in the fair way of the navigation. To avoid this danger, do not
■ shut in Southern Head until Little Denier comes on with the outer Shag Island.

Kate Harbour lies to the westward of Plate Cove ; its entrance is three-quarters of a
mile wide, and the harbour runs in about 1 j mile, with a depth of water of 36, 29, and
27 fathoms in mid-channel, decreasing as you advance to the farther end. There is a
rock under water off its entrance with 7, 8, and 9 fathoms round it, which lies nearer to
Kate's Head, but there is a passage between them, and also a still wider channel on
the western side of the rock.
,^ J ^^. Sweet Bay is another extensive inlet, lying to the westward of Kate Harbour, the

^ entrance to which is between Cutler's Head and Chance Point, which entrance also

leads to Maidenhair Cove, and Little and Great Chance Harbours. Sweet Bay is the
easternmost inlet. Having entered it, and passed Cutler's Head, which is rocky and
steep-to, you will see Turfpook Island, which is small and narrow, and has «t about
half a mile to the south-west of it an island named Woody Island, and between them a
rock under water ; there is a passage on either side of these, and when you ^et beyond
Woody Island, the bay becomes about three-quarters of a mile wide, with 60 fathoms
water midway; advancing still farther you will observe several islands in your pas-
sage ; there is also a rock under water on yo«r starboard side, three-quarters of a mile
beyond Woody Island ; it lies abreast of a little island which is mid-channel ; farther
on is Wolf Island, between which and the main there is no passage ; oflf this lies Goose-
berry Island, between which and Wolf Island there are 30 fathoms water, but^ the
channel is narrow, and that on the eastern side of Gooseberry Island is much wider.
Sweet Bay here divides into two branches j that to the eastward is named the S.W.
arm, and has directly before its entrance Hunt's Island, the channel to the eastward of
which has 10, 12, and 14 fathoms water, and that to the westward 7 and 9 fathoms ;
you will then see on your starboard side a small island, and can pass it on either side,
and, having done so, will drop into 24, 22, and 20 fathoms water ; the head of the arm
is foul and rocky. The N.W. arm is divided from the S.W. arm a little below Hunt's
Island, and at the farther end of Wolf's Island is neai-ly a mile wide, from whence it
runs south-westerly 3J; miles, with a good depth of water, and clear of dangers; at the
bottom is a sandy beach and a small rivulet.

The entrance of Great Chance Harbour, which is an excellent anchorage, lies 9J
miles W. | S. from Western Head. The passage to it is clear witff the exception of
the Bacon-bone Rock, already mentioned. In sailing for this place the safest way is,
not to shut in Southern Head until the isle named Little Denier comes on with the
outer Shag Island. Thus the Bacon-bone Rook will be avoided, and you may steer
for the harbour W. by S., until you get abreast of Chance Point. You must now
guard against a sunken rock, at the southern part of the entrance, with only 6 feet of
water over it Within this rock, and in a line with it, are two islets named the
Mustftrd-bowls; in order to avoid the rock, be careful not to shut in the western
Mustard-bowl with the eastern, but, having passed the latter, you may stand boldly
in, approaching the shore on either side as you please, and you may anchor anywhere

c 2

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

lii!

K'i

aboye the narrows In from 11 to A fathoms, perfectly land-looked and good holding*
ground. Wood and water may easily be procured here.

Off Chance Point (the outer point of Chance Harbour), and directly in a line be-
tween the southern part of Long Islands, there is a spot of ground with 7 fathoms,
over w'hich the sea breaks in very heavy gales from seaward, but it is not dangerous
in fine weather.

At the distance of almost a mile, N.E. a little northerly, is the Chance Oull Rock,
steep-to, and almost visible. To the westward is Deer Island, 1^ mile long, but nar-*
row, between which and the main there is^a good channel to Chandler's Reach.

Chandler's Reach is the channel leading to Goose Bay and Clode Sound ; the course
~ through it is W. ^ S., which, from the N.W. point of Deer Island, will take you to
Connecting Point, the point of the peninsula that divides the former from the latter.

Goose Bay runs in south-westerly, about 7| miles, and by keeping in mid-channel
you will meet with no danger, but have 47, 40, and 36 fathoms water, until, having
passed Lubber's Hole, the depth decreases to 12, 13, 10, and 8 fathoms, when you wiU
see a small island, situated to tfe^^ westward of Goose Head ; behind, and to the west-
ward of this, you may anchor Spfrom 4 to 7 fathoms, or, farther to the southward in
5| fathoms. In most of these inlets you will lie prfectly safe, and entirely land-
locked. Fresh water and wood are plentiful, and easily obtained.

Clode Sound is a fine branch of the sea, running in from Chandler's Reach full 20
miles ; it has many places of very good anchorage, and is without danger. Vessels
may find perfect safety on the northern shore, at Brown's Cove, or farther in at Long
Cove, or Platter Cove ; or on the southern shore, at Bunyan's and Love Coves ; or,
passing the Platter Rocks, and steering westward, at Freshwater Cove. The mid-
channel has all the way deep water, and there are no rocks except near the shores.
. Lion's Den is an opening lying at the N.W. end of Chandler's Reach. To enter
it you must sail to the northward of the Deer and Cluster Islands, and pass the nar-
rows, which is about one-third of a mile wide, and has 24 fathoms water in it ; having
passed the entrance about a mile, there is a sunken rock, round which are 4, 5, and 6
fathoms ; you may then perceive the inlet to branch off into two divisions, that to the
N.W. is very narrow, and has a rocky islet at its entrance ; but that which runs tn the
S.W. is broader, and has 11, 14, and 10 fathoms water in it; it runs in from the sunken
rock alxfut If mile, and at its farther end becomes shoal, narrow, and rocky.

The Long Islands are four in number, having narrow channels between them, some
of which are encumbered with rocks and dangerous. The eastern island is the largest
and broadest, the next to it is the longest, the two western ones are smaller and nar-
rower; they form the northern boundary of the passage from Western Head to
Chandler's Reach, and also the southern boundary to Swale Tickle and Newmah's
Sound. Off the north-eastern point of the largest Long Island, lies a sunken rock,
dose to the land, and therefore easily avoided ; this point bears from Western Head
nearly W. by N. distant 6 miles.

NEWMAN'S SOUND is a large arm of the sea, running in W. by N., having at its
entrance Swale Island, which is nearly 4^ miles long, and not one broad in the widest
part ; this divides the entrance into two channels ; the southern passage is called the
Swale Tickle, and the noi-thern one goes by the general name of Newman's Sound.
To sail from abreast of the Western Head into the Swale Tickle, you should steer
W.N.W. i W. To sail from abreast of the Bonavista Gull Island, steer W.N.W. #
W. 24 miles, and it will carry you a little to the southward of Little Swale Island, and
in the fair way of the passage ; but in advancing through this channel there are several
obstructions, and the passages from thence into Newman's Sound are so narrow, that
it will always be advisable to go to the northward of the Great Swale Island. To do
this, having rouoded the Gull Island, steer W.N.W. ^ W. 23 or 24 miles, when you
will have the sound open, and can proceed accordingly; it is full 1| mile wide, and ex-
tends nearly in a W. by N. direction from the N.E. point of Swale Island 11 miles,
having several places of good anchorage. Those on the southern shore are South
Broad Cove, Mmchin's Cove, and Standford Cove.

South Broad Cove is situated 2| miles beyonM the western point of Swale Island,
and is a place of great safety. The passage in is to the south-westward, and you will
ride well sheltered, in 10 faUioms, free from any danger. There is a small island at th«
«ntranoe, which you will leave on your port side. '*

There is a long narrow point of land running out to the northward, which you will
rouad, and turning southerly, Minchin'i Coy« will appear open ; beie you will lie in 6

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

v---r*5f- N. I

,t,.J

fathomi, opposite a sandy beach. To the westward is Moiint Standford, off the point
of which lies a small island, reaching half-way over the passage, making the channel
in this part verv narrow. The best course through, is to the eastward of this island,
in 9 fathoms ; here an opening appears to the eastward, called Buckley's Cove, fit for
tmall vessels : the coast now winding to the westward, forms a broad bay, with 20« i6,
and 27 fathoms water in it, free from any danger, and shallowing on each side towards
the shores. At the south-western part of this is Standford Cove, having a sandy beach,
the approach towards which shallows gradually.

Sorrow Harbour. — Little Denier Island lies off the entrance of Barrow Harbour,
which lies south-westward of it, and is safe and convenient. It is formed by three
islands, Richard's, Goodwin's, and Keat's; and the entrance is that part between
Goodwin's and the main, and is about 600 yards wide, and not very difficult of access.
The harbour is a Mile long : the lower part is rocky, and not well-sheltered, but the
upper part is completely land-locked, and has good holding ground. The course to this

Slace from Gull Island, Bona vista, is N.W. by W. | W. about 22 miles. In coming
'om the northward, the course from the Eastern Gooseberry Bock towards Barrow
Harbour, will be S.W. ^ W., 18 miles. Gooseberry Rock appears just above water,
and lies in lat. 48° 57' north. In this course you will have to avoid the Malone Rock
and Ledge, the latter being a shoal, lying S. % W., distant a mile from the rock,
which is always above water. This shoal has never less than 4 fathoms over it, so
that, in fine weather, no damage whatever is to be apprehended.

On approaching Little Denier, you must be careful to avoid the Outer Rook, lying
three-quarters of a mile E. f N. from that island. It has only 4 and 6 feet of water on
it ; but as the sea constantly breaks, it is easily guarded against. Between Little
Denier and Richard's Island, there is also a range of rocks, called the Brandishes, at
distances from each other, and extending nearly half way over towards Little Denier,
with from 14 to 17 feet upon them ; between are channels of 7 and 8 fathoms. These
make the northern channel preferable for strangers without a pilot. To run clear of
the Brandishes, you must keep Wedge Point, (the projection within the harbour,) a
little open to the southward of Smoky Ridge, (a range of high land at the top of the
harbour,) until yon bring Broom Heaaon with the middle Shag Island; the passage
is then without obstruction till you near Wedge Point, off which, at 70 yards, lies a
sunken rock, with 8 feet of water ; you may then sail up abreast Pudner's Cove, until
you are entirely shut in from the sea, and anchor in from 10 to 18 fathoms. Some
vessels prefer anchoring in Garland's Creek; but without running well up, the ground
is foul. There is a small fishing-establishment here ; good water nay be procured in
Pudner's Cove, and abundance of fire-wood. The land about Barrow Harbour ia
higher than the neighbouring coast, and may hence be easily recognised.

Sandy Cove, on the north side of Newman's Sound, about 4 miles beyond Barrow
Harbour, has good anchorage. It will be readily known, having the only sandy beach
on this side of the sound ; there is no danger in entering it, and it is perfectly safe,
the depth of water being from 10 to 20 fathoms. Between this place and Barrow
Harbour lies the Half-way Rock above water, but if you keep outside, and pass to the
southward of it, there is no danger, it being steep-to in 4 fatnoms.

At at a mile westward from Sandy Cove, are Great and Little Adventure Coves, two
snug little places on the same side of the bay, but which, from the narrowness of their
entrances, are adapted only for the resort of small vessels. Between these places lies
a sunken rock about 80 yards from the shore, with only 4 feet of water on it. Sydney
Island lies off the entrance to Great Adventure Cove ;. the passage in is to the north-
ward of this island, for between the island and Harbour Head there is no passage.

North Broad Cove lies also on the northern side of Newman's Sound, and is a con-
venient well-sheltered anchorage ; its entrance may be known by a high round island
lying on the west side of it, named Black Duck Island. On sailing in you must keep
the island on board, until you make a tickle or inlet, between it and the western shore,
in order to avoid a sunken rock at the eastern side : after which keep as close as pos-
sible to the eastern shore, as a dangerous rock lies nearly in mid-channel ; being inside
of which you may anchor in from 10 to )25 fathoms, muddy bottom. Wood and water
may be procured here.

There are some dangerous rocks lying off the northern shore, in advancing farther up
Newman's Sound, one of which is called the Shag Rock, and lies three-quarters of ^ft
mile bevond Black Duck Island ; and a mile farther on is the Hall's Rock. These voeka
are under water, and distant about a cable's length from the land ; close to them u« 4

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

and 6 fathoms, and between them and the shore there is a passage of 6 and 7 fathoms ;
the northern shore, therefore, should always have a good berth in sailing up Newman's
Sound, and by keeping nearly half a mile off, you will avoid them all.

SALVAGE BAY hes on the northern side of the promontory which divides it from
Newman's Sound. Within it are several runj of fresh water, but no place of good
shelter.

The little island named Ship Island lies in latitude 48° 45*', longitude 53° 37' 30",
and at 8 leagues N. W. | W. from Cape Bonavista ; and Damnable Harbour lies
W. I S. 5^ miles from Ship Island. The island may be known by a remarkable bald
point like a sugar-loaf. The harbour is well adapted for small vessels, but its very
narrow entrance disqualifies it for ships of burthen : there is a rock off the southern
part of the entrance, and another off the northern side of the island, which lies in the
middle of the harbour. There is good anchorage all round the ^Island, in 4 to 5
fathoms, sandy bottom. Water may be easily procured, but very little wood.

Between Damnable Harbour and Salvage Bay are several small islands and rocks
the largest of these is named the Baker's Loaf, and is a narrow island, about three-
quarters of a mile long.

In sailing from Gull Island, Bonavista, to Damnable Harbour, steer W.N. W. f N.,
about 7 leagues, and round Shag Islands ; proceed thence to the northward of the Baker's
Loaf, or steer N.W. by W. from the Guh towards Ship Island, and then W. | S. from
Ship Island to the entrance of Damnable Harbour.

Morris Cove is a safe anchorage, situated on the north side of the island bearing
that name, and lies to the northward of Damnable Harbour. In sailing for it keep
Ship Island well on board, on account of a dangerous reef which extends from Flat
Island nearly two-thirds of the way towards Ship Island, on some parts of which are
not more than 17 or 18 feet. Proceed, therefore, to the northward of Ship Island,
passing at no#tnore than half a mile distance, and when you are well inside, avoid
shutting in Lackington Rck with Varket Island, (known by its forming two remark-
able hummocks,) as there are several clusters of rocks between Ship and the Horse-
chop Islands, on the south side. Steer for the Varket until you get abreast of Lack-
ington Rock, then keep Lackington Rock on ^e northern extremity of Ship Island,
until the Varket bears north, to clear two sunken rocks off the N.E. end of Morris
Island. You may then sail directly for the cove, which you can enter without fearing
obstruction, and anchor in any part of it, in 25 to 5 fathoms ; but the western side
of the cove is preferable. Wood is plentiful, but water is scarce in the summer season.

Bay of Fair and False may contam several good anchorages, but it is so filled with
small islands and rocks, that any description that could be given would be of no use to
the mariner. A cluster of large islands extends off the frontage of this bay, full 20
miles, or so far as Offer Gooseberry Island, having between them innumerable pas-
sages, with deep water. There is also a wide channel, running from Fair and False
Bay, and Morns Island, to the northward, which leads to Bloody Bay, and then turns
westward, and is divided into various branches, forming the N.W arm, the middle arm,
and the N.E. arm ; this latter being a peculiai and extensive channel, running in one
direction, southward, almost to Newman's Sound, and in another, almost to Damnable
Harbour; all these are navigable, and afford places of good anchorage, and plenty of
both wood and water.

There is also an open strait from Bloody Bay to the eastward, through Bloody and
Cottel's Reaches, and out to the northward of Offer Gooseberry Island. Other chan-
nels branch off to the northward from Bloody and Cottel's Reaches, and between the
Lakeman's Islands, running into Pitt's Sound, Locker's, and Content Reaches, and
thence to Freshwater Bay. Within these, and on the northern shore, are Hare,
Locker's, Trinity, Indian, and many other lesser bays, coves, and inlets, abounding
with good anchorages, and calculated to afford shelter for shipping of all descriptions,
in cases of necessity. These are, at present, but little known, and fl-equented only by
the constant traders ; we shall, therefore, proceed to those which are the usual places
of resort, and are better situated for the purpose of fishing.

GOOSEBERRY ISLES, &c.— The Gooseberry Isles are a cluster of islets, near
the middle of Bonavista Bav. The Offer or Outer Gooseberry is in latitude 48° 56'
30" N., longitude 63° 30' 30*' W. From Cape Bonavista, to sail clear of the Eastern
Rack, which lies at 1^ mile to the E.S.E. of the Offer Gooseberry Isle, the course is
N. by W. 'I W. and from thence to Copper Island, (at the mouth of Greenspond
Tickle) N. f E. ; here it is possible to obtain pilots for this and the adjacent ancho>

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

30",
lies

bald

very
ithern
n the

to 5

rages, which are North- West Arm, New Harbour, and Cat Cove. There is good holding
ground between Greenapond Island and the main, but the water is so deep that a vesnel
M liable to drift on shore in the act of weighing, nor is there suHicient room to veer tu
a lengthened cable in heavy gales from the S.W., to which quartei it is much exposed.
The couise to Barrow Harbour fi:Dm the eastern Gooseberry Kock is S.W. ^ W. 18
miles : you thus avoid Malone's Ledge, a shoal lying S. f W., one mile from the rock,
(above water) which bears the same name : it has never less than 4 fathoms, so that, in
fine weather, no danger need be apprehended.

Ships coming from the eastward, or round Cape Freels, have to avoid the Charge
Rock, which lies S.E. l S. 2^ miles from Cape Freels' Gull Island ; the rock has only 6
feet of water upon it, and is circumscribed by a large snot of rough fishing ground, having
from 8 to 30 fathoms. From Gull Island, oS" Cape Freels, you may run immediately
'«. for the Stinking Islands, taking care not to open Cape Freels to the eastward of the

Gull, as this will carry you inside the danger. Keep a good look for the Mid-rocks,
which are just above water, and lie 2 miles to the N.N.E. \ E. from the Stinking Is-
lands; but a vessel not bound up the bay, is enjoined to keep well outside of them all,
for should the weather become suddenly thick and foggy (which occurs not unfrequently
with an easterly wind,) you will run a great risk of getting bewildered among the innu-
merable rocks for which this part of the coast is remarkable, and from which neither
chart nor compass can direct the stranger. Three-quarters of a mile N.W. from GuU
Island is a rock with 3 fathoms of water upon it.

In the winter months, when the north-easterly gales are very heavy and continuous,
the sea breaks exceedingly high over several spots of the Stinking Banks, which lie
E. by N. 2^ miles from the Stinking Islands. In two places there are as little as
7 fathoni!) on these banks, and, in such weather, although a vessel would not strike, she
would be in very great danger of foundering in the tremendous sea which would be apt
to break over her ; but in fine weather no danger from them is to be apprehended.

Having rounded the Stinking Islands, and wishing to sail into New Harbour or Cat
Cove, steer directly for the Offer Gooseberry Island, S.W. by W. ^ W. until you bring
y -'^•;~r-4 Pouch and Flower Islands to touch each other; you will be then 2 miles outside the

three rocks which lie at 1| mile to the southward of Flower Island. The outer of the
three rocks has on it 3 fathoms of water, the middle 14 feet, and the inner only 11 feet.
Now alter the course to W. 5 S., keeping the white face of Chalky Hills, in Locker's
Reach, a little on the starboard bow, which will carry you clear of Copper Island
dangers, lying without Shoe Cove Point ; and should the roughness of the weather
prevent you getting a pilot on board thereibout, you may continue this course until
you bring Shoe Cove Point (which may be distinguished from its bearing a semblance
to white marble) to bear N.W. ^ W,, when you may shape your course for Indian Bay
W.N.W.

New Harbour is 2 miles to the westward of Shoe Cove Point. With easterly winds
it is quite inaccessible, from its narrow entrance ; in which case you must continue
onward for Cat Cove, lying 4 miles farther up the bay on the same side. ■ Cat Cove
is formed by Cat Island, and may be easily recognised, the island being the only part
in the vicinity that is covered with live woods, the surrounding forests having been
destroyed by conflagration. On steering for this place proceed between Silver Hair
and Brown Fox Islands and maio, and as you approach the latter, the channel nar-
rows, and you k«ep Cat Island open on your starboard bow. Off the upper part of
Cat Island lie two high green locks, which you must round, the passage formed by
* them being too shoal to pass between ; you may then run till you get some distance

inside the upper point of the island, and anchor in from 5 to 13 tathotns, with the
hawse open to N.W. , the winds from that quarter being in general most heavy and
squally. In working in, you may stand close to either shore, except off the pomt of
the island, as there is a sunken rock within a 100 yards of it, with not more than 10
feet of water.

North- West Arm in lat. 49° 7' N., is the best anchorage near Cape Freels, but its
access is not without difficulty, from the multiplicity of islands that lie in the neigh-
bourhood, and which are almost undistinguishuble from their great similarity. The
greatest danger you have to encounter, in making this place from the southward, is
the Northern Rock, which lies N.E. 1 ^ mile from Copper Island, (known by its height
and without wood) ; it has never less than 22 feet of water upon it; so thatj in fine
weather, vessels which generally frequent this coas|^ may pass over it in perfect
salety ; but, in hard gales, the sea breaks oyer it incredibly high. To avoia it, be

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

>:.

hi-

careful not to open Fool's Island, at the entrance of N.W. Arm (which U eomewhai
higher and more prominent than the rest, and is covered with trees, except
the crown), to the westward of the Western Pond Rock, until you bring Butterny
Island to touch the inner point of Flower Island, or until Puffin and Copper Islands
touch each other ; then, leaving the Pond Rocks on the starboard hand, steer in for
Fool's Island ; which it is advisable to kp jp well on board, as there is a sunken rock
lying exactly in mid-channel, between it and Partridge Island Rocks, with 18 feet
upon it ; to clear which, it is impossible to give a descriptive mark. The course then
into the Arm is N.W. 1 W., and as soon as you get inside Odd Island, you may
anchor in muddy ground with from 7 to 9 fathoms. Fool's Island Hill bearing S.E. to
S.E. by S. During the dry summer months, vessels are compelled to send to Loo
Cove for water, nor is wood to be procured on this part of the coast within the distance
of 1 2 miles.

Greenspond Tickle is a small harbour on the south-eastern side of Oreenspond
Island. The island is about a mile in breadth each way, and a reel of rocky islets runs off
the southern part of it, all the way to Puffin Island. The harbour is of very
little importance, not being capable of receiving vessels whose draught of water ex-
ceeds 14 feet ; its dangers are the Northern, the Cook-room, and Harbour Rocks, but
it is impossible to get in with a foul wind, or even with a fair one without a pilot.
Ships sometimes anchor between the island and the main ; but the place is contracted,
and the water is very deep, and it is much exposed to S.W. winds, so that it cannot
be recommended as a place of safety. To sail into it, you T!3!i8t pass to the westward
of Copper Island, in doing which you must cautiously avoid the Midsummer Rock,
which lies one mile off W. by S. I S. from that island, and has only 6 feet water on
it : when you shut in Silver Hair Island with Shoe Cove Point, you are inside the
danger. You should also give Newals and Ship Island a wide berth, as the water
shoals off them to a considerable distance.

CAPE FREELS TO CAPE NORMAN.

OATB TKBBLn is formed of three points, the South Bill, the North Bill, and the
Middle, or Cape Freels, about which there are many shoals and rocky dangers ; Uiere-
fore, a wide berth should be given them at all times. Over those points is some high
land, commonly named the Cape Ridge, which is visible at a considerable distance.

About 6i miles N.N.W. 5 W. from Cape Freels, is the Outer Gat Island, which is
connected to the main by a sandy reef, Impassable for shipping, and forming the
southern point of Deadman's Bay. A little before you come to the Outer Gat, you
will see a remarkable hill named the Windmill Hill, and near it the Little Gat Island.
In sailing to or from Cape Freels, the shore should have a good berth, although there
are soundings all the way, decreasing gradually towards the shore. Deadman's Bay
is formed by the Outer Gat Island to the southward, and Deadman's Point to tho
northward ; the soundings within are regular, and the bay without rocks, unless close
to the shore, but it is totally unsheltered, and open to all easterly winds.

PENGUIN ISLANDS. — Having passed Deadman's Point, you will approach the
Penguin Islands, two in number, bearing from Cape Freels N.N.W. ^ W. distant 14
and 15 miles. Between them the passage is clear, with from 5| ♦ '^ fathoms water,
but vessels should not go within them and the shore, for there are t ' < ^1 rocky reefs
which render it particularly dangerous.

FUNK ISLAND Ues N.E. % E. from Cape Freels, distant 31 miles, and is little
more than a sterile rock, which cannot be seen farther than at the distance of 10 or 12
miles ; but it will always be distinguished by the great number of birds continually
hovering over it. About 200 yards north of Funk Island is a large rock above water,
and N.W. by W. 180 yards from this are still larger rocks ; they are ail barren, and
only the resort of sea birds, that inhabit and breed there. Between these rocks are 18,
37, and 42 fathoms water, with a clear passage ; but between the eastern rock and
Funk Island there is a dangerous sunken rock, of only 10 feet water, over which the
sea generally breaks ; near this sunken rock are 14 and 16 fathoms, and between it and
Funk Island 30, 25, 56, 38, 24, and 17 fathoms. Off the western point of Funk Island
are some rocks, and at its eastern part a sort of creek with 5 fathoms in it A ledge of
rocks is reported to lie S.W. from Funk Island, at the distance of 7 miles.

Between Funk and Wadhan^slands a dangerous rock was discovered on the 28th
September, 1836, during a gale and very heavy sea, by Captain Evan Percy, in the brig

''-^t&^

V. i

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

9ff

■■■^ S^-^

i. i

St. John. Heavy breakers were distinctly seen upon a rock bearing TV. | S. a Uttla
southerly, about 7 miles from the Funk Islands. The bearing was taken in a fine clear
evening, and it was the opinion of all on board that the rock, thouah not appearing
above water, would take up any vessel. The position given to it is aoout latitude 49^
41', longitude 53° 15' W. ; out the channel between Wadham and Funk Islands must be
cautiously used, as the exact position of this rock cannot be depended on.

A rock is is said to lie 7 miles N.N.W. from Funk Island, and a shoal, named the
Cleopatra, is said to lie N.W. by W. | W. 20 miles from Funk Island, and about 11
miles to the eastward of Fogo Island ; but both these latter positions are doubtfuL

Durel's Ledge, or Snap Kock, is a dangerous reef, said to lie about 7 leagues N.W.
by N. from Funk Island, and to cause the sea to break over it continually. Nearly
N.W. by W. distant 3 leagues from Durel's Ledge, is another danger named Crom<
well's Ledge, which is supposed to bear E.S.E. f £., distant 10 or 11 miles, from Little
Fogo Islands.

KAOQED HARBOUR.— This harbour lies to the north-westward of the Penguins,
distant 6 miles. The mainland hereabout is low and sandy, and the passive from the
eastward rocky and dangerous; it should therefore not be attempted by a stran-
ger, or without li- pilot. To the north-westward is Ladle Cove Island, and 7 miles
beyond that is Rocky Bay ; Rocky Bay lies in about latitude 49*^ 25' N. and longitude
54° 10' W. At its entrance, which is wide, lie three islands, Noggin Island,. Green
Island, and farther south, White Island. You may pass between each of these islands
in 7 fathoms ; between Rocky Point and Green Island in 7, 8, 13, or 10 fathoms :
between Green and White Islands in 13 and 14 fathoms ; and between Noggin Island
and the western point of the bay in 3^, 7, 12, 9, and 4 fathoms. Tne bottom
of these bays, for there are three openings, is rocky, and vessels cannot go far into
them.

THE WADHAM ISLANDS.— These consist of a cluster of islands in about 49"*
35' N., lying to the north-westward of Cape Freels, and are separated from each other
by channels more than 1 and 1^ mile wide. The largest is named Peckford's Island,
which is about 1^ mile long, and lies in the direction of north and south, and bears
from Cape Freels nearly N. ^ W. distant 24 miles. From its southern part towards the
land about Ragged Harbour, there are a number of rocky islets and reels, with channels
between them, rendering the navigation of this part extremely hazardous. About 1^
mile N.N.W. i N. from Peckford's Island is White Island, but a passage between them
should not be attempted, for there are several small rocks lying on the north and north-
western part of Peckford's Island, some of which extend over almost as far as White
Island. N.W. by W. from Peckford's Island, about 4^ miles, is Copper Island. Duck
Island lies W.N.W. ; N. 2| miles from Peckford's Island, and about a similar distance
S.S.E. I E. from Copper Island. There are also some small rocks lying off the N.W.
end of Duck Island, which, being visible, can always be avoided with ease.

The S.S.W. rock is above water, bearing i.om Offer Island S.S.W., distant 2| miles,
and has near it 13, 17, and 21 fathoms. About N.N.E. distant 2 miles from the S.S.W.
Rock is a small flat island ; and a little more to the eastward is Offer Island ; this is the
most easterly of all the Wadham Islands. There is yet a rock to descvibe which lies
E.S.E. I E. from Offer Island, distant about 1| mile, named the H.S.K Ground: this
is dangerous, and must have a berth in passing either north or south of it. The Tom
Cod Rock, also dangerous, lies three-quarters of a mile S. by W. from Offer Island.

FOGO ISLANDS lie to the north-westward of the Wadham Islands. Great Fogo
is 4 leagues long and 9 miles broad : off its south-western point lie the Indian Islands,
and N.E. by N. 3| miles from the body of Great Fogo, sire the Little Fogo Islands.
Numerous other rocks and small islands are scattered about them.

Fogo Harbour lies on the north side of the island; it is considered good for the fisheries,
but its entrance is dangerous and difficult; There is a strong current running south-
eastward, especially with a westerly wind, to guard against which as much as possible,
you should hug Fogo close on board, until you open the entrance, which is narrow ;
having found this, run directly in, keeping right in the middle, and you will carry 8,
6, and 4 fathoms throughout ; this is named the West Tickle. When you are through,
if intending to anchor in the western bight, you must steer south-eastward until you
bring the point betwean the height N.W. by W. to avoid the Harbour Rock, which
seldom appears except at low water, spring tides ; then haul up to the westward, and
anchor in from 6 to 5 fathoms, good ^ound and well sheltered.

Vessels from the eaatward, and bound to Fogo Harbour, should avoid the Dean'>

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

■ s

W! •

Rock, a sunken da*>ger lying between Joe Batt'a Point and the harbour. Steer W.N. W,
until Brimstone Hill, a remarkable round mountain, appearn in the centre of the har-
bour ; then steer for the East Tickle, which n:ay be known by the lantern on the top
of Sim's Island, making the west side of the Tickle. Give a good berth to the point
on the starboard side, and run right up the harbour, keeping near the south side, and
you will carry from fi to 3 fathoms through. Immediately you get round the point,
steer S.W. to avoid the Harbour Rock, and follow the directions given above for
anchoring. The Middle Tickle appears the widest, but it is fit only for boats ; either
of the other two must be adopted as best suits the wind.

The Little Fogo Islands are nearly surrounded by rocks, both above and under
wate{, making this part of the coast exceedingly dangerous. To the eastward of
Little Fogo IS a small rock just above water, named the North- Eastern Uook, and
somewhat in this direction, distant 10 or 11 miles, is said to lie Cromwell's Ledge,
whose exact position is not well determined, although it is considered to be extremely
dangerous. Northward of Little Fogo are the Turr Rocks, and from hence, in the
direction of the western side of Great Fogo Island, are the Storehouse Rocks, the Seals'
Nests, Gappy and Stone Islands, the Jigger and Black Rocks, and various other dan-
gers, all having deep water round them, and tending to increase the difliculty of the
navigation.

Ireland Rock lies about 4 miles E.N.E. of Little Fogo Islands. It is the north-east'
ernmost of the Fogo Reefs, and the sea always breaks on it. Tlie reefs extend nearly
13 miles in a westerly direction from Ireland Rock to Fogo Head Rock, which lies
about a mile north-westward of Fogo Harbour. Between the reefs and islets are
several deep-water channels, which might be taken by those well acquainted. At tlie
distance of 4 miles S.E. by S. from the Little Fogo Islands, and 5 miles eastward of the
N.E. part of Fogo Island, lie the Barrack Rocks, which extend N.W. and S.E. fully a
mile, and part of them are above water. At the distance of 2 miles south-eastward of
the Barrack Rocks, and 7^ miles N.E. f E. from Cape Fogo, is situated the Inspector
Rock, on which the sea generally breaks.

CHANGV: ISLANDS TICKLE.— This harbour is very secure, and has good anchor-
age, with 6 or 7 fathoms, muddy bottom. The islands about it are, generally, low and marshy,
but abundance of fire-wood may be procured, though water is scarce. The passage
in is between the Ruth's Rock and the Tobacco Islands, the mark being Brimstone
Head kept between both, which will clear all the dangers on the northern shore, and
also ofl' Skinness Harbour ; or you may bring the tickle to the westward, between the
points, and steer directly through in safety.

ISLAND OF TOULINGUET.— This island lies to the westward of Fogo, and has
several small islands about it. Here is situated what is named Toulinguut Bay ; and to
the south-westward of Toulinguet Island, is the Harbour of Herring Neck, which is
said to be a spacious fine harbour, and fit for any vessels.

From Touhnguet Bay to Cape St. John, the course is N.N.W. 10| leagues.

OAPil 8T. JoHiH is a high rugged point of land, situated in about lat. 49° 58'
N., and long. 55° 30' W., and may be readily known by the small round iuland to the
eastward, distant from the northern pitch of the cape about 5 miles. This is named the
Gull Island, and is the third of that name on this side of Newfoundland. Cape St.
John is the point where, by treaty, the French fisheries begin; th.ir boundary continue*
thence northward and round the western coast, as far as Cape Ray.

At nearly two miles co the southward of Cape St. John, lie the Bishop Rocks, over
which the sea l>reaks in b^d weather. There are several fishing-harbours on the
coast to the southward of the cape, particularly Shoe Cove, Tilt Cove, and Snook Har-
bour ; the latter the best with south-easterly winds.

There are said to be various deep bays and inlets between the Fogo Islands and Cape
St. John, but their particulars are very little known, although there can be little doubt
that the Great Bay and River Exploits, and the Bay of Notre Dame, afibrd many places
of good anchorage, and of easy access, which, when fully explored, may become hereafter
frequented, better understood, and prove highly beneficial.

About 5 miles to the westward oi Cape St. John, is the harbour of La Scie, to sail
into which there is no danger whatever, but it is open to winds from the N.N. W., which
throw in a heavy cea. 'Ihe best holding ground is just within a little cove on
the starboard side, in fifteen fathoms, muddy bottom ; but the ground is not good
farther in.

Gnat Round Harbour is a good and convenient place for vessels engaged in the fish-

y-'S Ss^

har-
e top
point
, and
)oint,

for
ither

EAST COAST OP NEWl-OUNDLAND.

ing trade ; there is no danger in sailing in or out of it, both thores being bold>to. The
anchorage lies within the two inner points, where vessels may ride in 4 or 5 fathoms
water, secure from the weather, anu entirely land-locked. Little Round Harbour,
which lies round a point to the north-eastward, about 1^ mile distant, is mei « cove,
and totally unfit for shipping.

PACQUET HARBOUR lies about 5 miles N.W. by N. from Great Round Harbour;
its entrance bears from the channel between the Horse Islands, nearly S.W. by S. It
may be known by its southern head, which is a hieh and rocky mountain ; the northern
head is somewhat lower, and there are three rocky islets lying directly off its point.
Both points are bold-to, but a little to the southward of the rocky islets, is a small
shoal with 2|, 3, and 4 fathoms upon it ; the channel between it and these three rocks
has 7, 8, and 9 fathoms, and the water across the entrance is from 8 and 9, to 19 and
20 fathoms. A similar depth continues more than a quarter of a mile in, where the
br^rbour divides into two channels, the one running northward, the other West and
South-West.

The northern arm is about one quarter of a mile long, and has 20, 18, and 19 fathoms
at its entrance, becoming shallower as you advance. Vessels running in here should
keep the starboard shore on board; for about two-thirds up the channel, on the port
side, there is a rocky shoal, a small part of which ocpasionally appears above water; on
the other part of this shoal are from '6 feet to 4 fathomp. Having passed this shoal, steer
up mid-channel, and anchor in 5, 7, or 8 fathoms ; the northern part near the land be-
comes shallow, and a rivulet here falls into the bay, which is said to issue from some exten-
sive lakes about two miles inland. The south-western channel is somewhat narrower
than the northern one, but is quite free from danger ; the shores on both sides are
steep- to, and bold, and you will have 12, 10, 9, 8 and 7 fathoms for half a mile in ; it
then shallows to the head of the bay, where there is a sandy beach and a river running
southward. This is a snug and secure place for vessels to run into vbenover occasion
may require. To the northward of the northern point is a mountain, named Signal
Hill, usually having a signal-post upon it, and serving to point out its situation.

The entrance to Pacquet Harbour should not be attempted when the wind is between
N.W. and S.W., as the squalls off the land are then both heavy and changeable ; and to
miss stays, when in the narrows, would be dangerous. If apprehensive of bad weather,
it would be better to make for Round Harbour. Mings Bight and Verte Bay lie to the
westward, but although the anchorage is good, they are but little frequented.

The ST. BARBE, or HORSE ISLANDS, are situated nearly mid-way between
Partridge Point and Cape St. John, bearing from the latter N. by W. and N.N.W.
distant about 5 leagues. They are two islands, forming a circuit of nearly 2 leagues,
and appearing moderately high. There is a rock above water lying to the northward
of the easternmost, distant 1^ mile ; and on the east side of the same island are some
sunken rocks which stretch out in some place near a mile from the shore. At the S.E.
])art of this island there is also a small cove, fit only for boats. There is a safe chan-
nel between these islands, with 40 to 48 fathoms, black mud, but it is seldom attempted.
The eastern island is the largest.

About 3 miles, N. ^ E., from Pacquet Harbour lies Hardy Harbour, having Wood
Island lying before it. Fishing is carried on here, Hut with strong sea winds it is incon-
venient. To the extent of nearly 2 cables off the north side of Wood Island is rocky.
Five miles iiorth-westward of Wood Island lie the Mings Islands, which consist of two
large rocks, lying off the N. W. point of Mings Bight, having a passage between. Two
miles N. by W. of the Mings Islands lies the Sisters' Rock, on which the sea always
breaks. A dangerous rock lies about three-quarters of a mile to the northward, with
only 3 feet water on it. These latter rocks lie near the centre of the entrance to Green
or Verte Bay.

Fleur de Lys Harbour lies to the northward of Mings and Verte Bays, and about 3
miles to the south-eastward of Partridge Point, and derives its name from three re-
markable hillocks just over it. It is small, safe, and secure from all winds; and excellent
anchorage, in 4 fathoms water, may be found in its N.E. arm. A rocky shoal lies 100
yards off the island, to avoid which you must borrow towards the eastern shore until
ydu get Bluff He^d open of the island. There is plenty of wood, hut the water becomes
scarce in a dry season. It is, however, very conveniently situated for the fisheries,
and is commonly frequented by French vessels. ,

WHITE BAY is a large and extensive arm of the sea, being at its entrance, from
Cape Partridge to Cat Head, fully 5 leagues wide, and running in a south-westerly di-

ill

i!"

' Si

p Si

98 EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

reotion, about 15 leases, to its upper end, where it ii contracted to a riyer'i mouth,
1^ mile wide. lit thia bay, or gulf, are aeveral islands, cores, and inlets, affording both
anchorage and shelter.

Lobster Harbour lies about 4 Lagues southward of Partridge Point, and is a small
round harbour, with a shallow narrow entrance, having at low water, in some places,
not above 8 or feet water; but when you are once entered, you will have 12 and l'<i
fathoms all over the harbour. Small vessels, therefore, sail in, commonly, at the flood
tides. It is high water, F. & C, about 6h. 46m. } springs rise 6, neaps 4 feet.

Southern Arm lies about 5 miles from Lobster Harbour, and farther up the bav.
Here a ship may anchor with great safety, in 17 fathoms water, about 3 miles within
the heads; but there is also good anchorage in any part below this, and before you are ad-
vanced so far up, in 20 and 25 fathoms. A fitUe above the inner point, on tho
northern side, is a muscle bank, which stretches quite across the arm, ana nearly dries
at low water ; and when you have passed this you will have 11 and 12 fathoms water,
and the channel continues deep until you approach the river's head. This is the first
great inlet on this side of the gulf, and may, therefore, be readily recognised.

Middle Arm lies about 1| mile W.S.W. from the Southern Arm; at its entrance is
a rocky island, which is joined to the shore by a shoal, over which are 1 and 2 fathoms
water. This inlet runs in to the southward, about 3 or 4 miles. To enter it, you will
do well in keeping the port shore on board : it is fitted only for small vessels. Two
leagues W. by S. from Middle Arm is Hawling Point; and between them lie the Pigeon
Islands, about which the ground is good for fishing.

Western Arm lies £.S.E. | S. of Hawling Point, and runs up nearly 4 miles; here
large vessels may anchor in from 14 to 16 fathoms water. There is a cove on each
side of its entrance; that to the north-eastward is named Bear Cove, where smaller
vessels may moor securely, and ride safe from all winds, in about 12 fathoms water;
the other is named Wild Cove, a very indifferent anchorage, open to the north-westerly
winds and the bottom rocky and foul.

About 5 leaguesdown from the river's head, and nearthe S.E. side of the bay, liesGran-
by's or Mid Bay Island, without either cove or place of shelter. On the south-rastern

ert of this island is a shoal running off the length of 2 cables, with not more i m 9
!t water over it ; and nearly abreast of this island, on the S.E. side of White Buy, is
Furbeck Cove, where shipping may find safe apchorage, and lie with good convenience
for the fisheries.

Having passed to the southward of Granby's Island, the bay narrows and runs up
about 5 leagues towards Gold Cove; where the river branches out into several streams;
and is commonly named the Hiver's Head.

Sop's Arm. — On returning up the western side of White Bay, you will perceive Sop's
Island, about 3 miles in length, and 11 miles in circuit ; near its southern end is Goat's
Island. These form a long passage, or arm, named Sop's Arm ; at the northern part of
which a vessel may safely anchor, just inside the north side of Sop's Island ; this will
be the best side of the channel or passage into the arm; but there is anchorage in deep
water between Sop's Island and the main, before you reach so far up as Goat's Island.
There is also a small cove at the north end of the island, named Sop's Cove; and two other
coves opposite the main, named Hart's Coves, in all which the fisheries are carried on,
although ships generally anchor in the upper part of the arm and withinside of Goat's
Island.

Jackson's Arm lies about 3| miles to the northward of Sop's Island, to enter which
you will pass a ragged point, low and round : the water here is deep, except in a small
cove on the starboard side, where a vessel should moor head and stern. This place
affords the largest timber in White Bay. Frenchman's or French Cove is about a
league to the northward of Jackson's Arm, and offers good and sate anchorage.

Four miles to the north-eastward of Frenchman's Cove is Coney Arm Hetid, the
most remarkable land on the western side of White Bay, and bears W. | N., distant 8|
leagues from. Cape Partridge. The land here projects out 1| mile, forming a deep
bight, named Great Coney Arm. In this place there is no good shelter for shipping; but
in Little Coney Arm, which lies to the westward of the head, is convenient anchorag*
for small vessels, although its entrance is too shallow for large ships ; here fishing-craft
frequently rendezvous.

About 10| miles to the north-eastward of Coney Arm Head, lies the Great Cat Arm,
and 2 miles farther is Little Cat Arm. In Great Cat Arm the depth of water is from
37, 35, 29, 27, 24, 20, to 15 fathoms, at the end of the arm, where it is quite safe, and

•« fs--^

EAST COAST OP NEWFOUNDLAND.

..■T=-r ^

sheltered by the land. At the end of the north point He some roeka, whiol^re sbova
water ) to aroid them, keep quite close to the south shore ; but in going into Little
Cat Arm, it is better to keep on the north side, as there is a rock near the land on the
opposite side. The entrance to this arm is narrow, and there w^jl be found in it a
depth of 22, 9, and 3^ fathoms ; the least depth of water will bo found on the south side
of the harbour, within the points.

Little Harbour Deep is much exposed to south-easterly winds, and by no means a
good harbour ; off its northern point are some rocks, always abovo water, which lie
half a mile from the shore, and afford good fishing about their environs. The water is
not very deep in any part of this inlet, and when you get up half-way from the entrance
to the head, or farther end, it becomes quite shoal.

Grande Vache is an inlet about li mile deep, lying one mile from Little Harbour
Deep. It is also open to the southerly winds, and may be known, when near the shore,
by the northern point appearing like an island, and bearing N.W. | N. from Cape Par-
tridge ; it is but an indifferent place for shipping, and seldom frequented.

Orange Bay, or Great Harbour Deep, may oe known from any other inlet, by the
land at its entrance being much lower tnan any other land on the north side of White's
Bay, and by its bearing N. l W., distant 6} leagues, from Cape Partridge ; it forms a
large harbour, and when you get about 3 miles within its entrance, divides into two
branches. In the i:orthern arm the water is too deep for vessels to anchor, until they
have run up neb.* the head ; but in the western arm there is no anchorage, having 60
fathoms near its head. A little within the entrance of Orange Bay, there is a cove on
each side, frequented by the fishing- vessels; but these are very dangerous for a ship to
lie in, for although they moor head and stern, yet should a gale come on from the east-
ward, there is little safety to be depended upon.

Fourch£e is little frequented, and there is no anchorage until you approach its far-
ther end, where you will find a cove on the northern side. This cove is 2 or 3 miles
above the entrance, and very small vessels may anchor there in 18 fathoms, mooring
hcLid and stern. The land on both sides is extremely high and steep to the shore.
There is also another arm running in about 2 miles farther than the cove, but it is so
narrow, and has such a depth of water, that it is almost useless to shipping.

About 5 miles to the north-eastward of Fourch6e, and about 6 miles to the south-
westward of Canada Head, lies the entrance to Hooping Harbour, or Sans Fond. It
has two arms or bays, the one running up northward, the other westerly. Captain
Bullock recommends, as safe anchorage, near the head of the northern arm in 6 fathoms,
although open to the southward ; yet the western arm is more sheltered, and the water
is much deeper, having 16 to 24 fathoms near its head. The entrance of this harbour
liesN.N.E. \ E., distant 27 miles from Partridge Point.

About 6 miles N.E. by E f E. of Hooping Harbour lies Canada Head. It is elevated
land, and very easily distinguished either from the northward or southward ; but when
directly to the eastward of it, it becomes difficult to recognise it from the high land up
the country at its back.

CANADA BAY is an inlet of considerable size and extent, having at its southern
entrance Canada Head, from whence it runs N.N.-Easterly full 4 leagues ; here vessels
caught in easterly gales may seek shelter, and anchor in safety. In entering, when you
get above the two rocky islets which lie near Bide's Head, and named the Cross Islands,
you will see a low white point, and another black one a little beyond it ; off this latter,
distant 2 cables' length, lies a sunken rock; keep, therefore, towards the middle of the
bay, and you will find no danger, except a rock above water, which lies about a mile
below the point of the narrows ; this you will endeavour to leave on your port hand,
keeping mid-channel, and you will have 10 fathoms through the narrowest part. Soon
after you have passed the narrows, the bay widens, and is above a mile across, and you
may then anchor iiTfrom 18 to 20 fathons, good holding ground, and secure from
all winds ; but this bay is not much frequented, and only occasionally resorted to in case
of necessity.

Engine Harbour is situated on the north side of Canada Bay. To sail into this place
you must pass a low point, appearing white, and forming the northern point of en-
trance to Canada Bay ; then keep near the shore until you get abreast of the next
point, which makes the harbour; haul round to the S.E., taking cai'e not to come too
near the point, for it shoals a full cable's length off. Having so far advanced you can
anchor in from 15 to 7 fathoms, good holding ground; but this is well up the cove,
which is tor small to lie in, unless you moor head and stem.

■

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

ill

.;'.l

In Bide'i Arm, which run* up N.N.E. from EnsIAe, almoat 2 leAfUM, there is n«
^ood auchorage, the water being too deep ; but within the aouth end of Engine Island
IS a good harbour for shallops, although from thence to where the ships lie, there is no
channel, even for boatn, unless at high water, or beyond half-tide.

Ooufre Harhouf lies in the S.W. corner of the bav, about two miles westward of
Canada Head, and 3 miles from the north point of the entrance. In this harbour,
which runs in S.W., near a mile, is good safe anchorage, in 15 fathoms, well sheltered
from wind and sea. Canada Harbour is the first on the port hand within Canada Head;
here is a fisherv-establishment. As it is unsafe with N.E. winds, the ships anchor in
Ooufre, and only use this harbour with boats.

Conch Harbour bears nearly E.N.E. ^ E., distant 11 miles, ft-om the entrance of Ca-
nada Bay ; it lies very open to the winds from the south, but has good anchorage well
up to the head, in 11 fathoms water, good holding ground. 8. by W. from Conch, dis-
tant 2 leagues, is Hilliard's Harbour, (named Botitot by the French,) which ii a bad place
for shippmg, but very convenient for the fishing craft.

Cape kouge Harbour lies E.N.E. from the harbour of Conch, and bears N.W. by W.
from the south end of the island of Oroais, distant 3 leagues: its northern partis named
Cape Rouge. Shelter from the heavy swells of the Atlantic is afibrded by Groais and
Belle Isles. It is shallow and rocky in the southern part of its entrance, and the har-
bour shoal lies in the S.W. arm. The best anchorage is in the northern arm in any
depth of water. Ships may beat in or out, but there is no anchorage in the centre of
the harbour as it is too deep. A small island, named Rouge Island, lies directly op-
posite to its entrance ; its northern end requires a berth in passing.

BELLE AND GKOAIS ISLANDS.— Tbese islands lie off the N.E. coast of New-
foudland, from which they are separated 9 or 10 miles. Belle Isle is the southernmost
and larger island, being 9 miles in length, and 6 bioad ; there is a little harbour at its
south part, where fishmg craft occasionally resort, but not calculated for shipping :
other coves may be found about the shores of the island, where shallops sometimes take
shelter. Off its south-eastern side lies Green Island, a small rocky islet, and to the
southward a bank of soundings extends with 12, 20, 25, and 30 fathoms. There are
some rocks, both above and under water, at the south point of Belle Isle; some of these
lie 2 miles from the land. The south rock, above water, lies 2 miles S.W. from the
south point of the island, and a sunken rock lies one-third of a mile S.W. of it; this is
the southernmost rock.

Groais Island lies to the north-eastward of Belle Isle, and is about 7 miles in length,
and 3^ miles broad; its northern point lying in latitude 50° 59'. 'Off this end, and
also off the N.W. part of the island, are several rocks above water ; otherwise this
island is bold all round, and between it and the main are from 20 to 70 fathoms water.
The channel between it and Belle Isle is 5 miles wide, and in it there are from 40 to
58 fathoms, dark mud and rotten shells. In order to clear the rocks lying off the N.W.
point of the island, the N.E. point should not be brought to the southward of S.E. •

CROC HARBOUR, the central point of the French station, is easy of access,
although somewhat difficult to discover, particularly when making the land directly
from the east; it is well provided with wcod and water. When the north part of Belle
Isle is clear of the southern part of Groais, you will be a little to the southward of the
harbour ; and this mark will not fail to point out its situation, especially as the head-
land, forming the southern shore, is bare of trees, and has a round appearance. The
rocks off this headland will also help to distinguisb it.

The entrance is about two-thirds of a mile wide, between Cape Vent ( Wind) on the
south and Cape Groux on the north, with a depth in mid-channel of 18 to 20 fathoms
at low water, sand, gravel, and rock. At the foot of Cape Vent, just outside the har-
bour, are two rocky islets, having a passage between them lit for boats; the outer rock is
clean close-to, so that a vessel may pass pretty near it, there being 6 to 8 fathoms a
short distance off. In the chart there is a plan of the harbour which should be refer-
red to.*

When within the harbour, the south shore will be observed to run first W. by N.,
and then to the W. by S., forming the S.W. bay, which is seldom used on account of
being exposed to N.' and N.E. winds; yet small vessels, drawing 9 to 10 feet water,
occasionally run up to the head of the bay, and anchor between the islet and small
fishing-station of Petit-Maitre, opposite the stage, but it is necessary to moor fore and

'"^ '<i^

* Chart Gulf and River St. Lawrence.

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

•1

aft A little within the eninnce of the bay, on ita western lide, it • rook above water,
named the Folle or Baleine ( Whale) Hock, on which the lea alwaya breaks i in satlinff
up, it must be left to starhoard, and an soon as passed, you must bear over to a small
ba^, named Hi^re Cove, to avoid a breaker which lies in the direction of the it>Iet| after
this, steer between the islet and Petit- Maitre. From the entrance of the 8.W. bay the
harbour runs N. by W., and after a short distance divides into two arms, one named
the Fond, running to the northward, and the other Epine-Cadoiet, towards the
•outh-west.

There is anchorage, in any part of the harbour, on a bottom of dark slate-coloured
mud, and soundingn of 22 to 9 fathoms; but all parts of the bay are not considered to
be equally good. The best anchorage is considered to be at the entrance of the Fond,
iu 18 or 19 fathoms, (clayey mud, well protected from easterly and westerly winds; at
this poHition Cape Vent is coucealed by Point Genille. With a strong breeze from the
N. W. it is difficult for a large vessel to tack so as to reach this anchorage, in that case
it is prudent to anchor near Point Oroux, the north side of the bay, on a rocky bottom
of 18 to 20 fathomH {'M metres), and to wait until the breeze moderates, so as to allow
you to come more within. There is also anchorage in Epine-Cadoret, but it is seldom
necessary to go so far in. .

The strongest winds are those from the south-west and north-west, which are gene-
rally squally. North-ensterly winds are also prevalent in bad weather, but they never
cause a very heavy sea. In Epine-Cadoret, just after passing a narrow creek, almost
dry at low water, there is a convenient ])lacc on the rocks to heave a vessel down to
careen, where the French ships, Oliviere and Philomdie, were hove down, and the
rocks prepared for the rigging and a capstan. The soil here is said to be wet and
spongy, being composed principally of decayed vegetable matter, and covered with the
dwarf pine, indegenous to the countrv, which does not attain any great dimensions, the
k.-gest tree being not more than 1^, ttiot in diameter, and the wood, when full grown,
of but little value.

The shores of Croc Harbour are bold-to. A frigate can tack in, but great attention
must be paid to veer in good time, as, under the land, the wind is uncertain, and fre-
quently takes aback at the moment of tacking, particularly when it is from the N.W.
and in squalls.

In leaving Croo Harbour, and proceeding to the northward, after passing Point
Oroux, two black rocks are seen close to the shore, named the Havens. Hence to Irish
Island, a black barren rock, very abrupt, the land runs E. by N. A N., 2| miles, and
thence towards the N.E. to the south-west point of St. Julien Island, at the entrance of
the harbour of that name.

The harbours of Great and Little St. Julien and also that of Orandsway are all adjacent
to the Island of St. Julien, and bear to the north-westward of the northern part of the
Island of Groais. The south-west end of the Island of St. Julien is but little separated
from the main, and cannot be distinguished to be an island, until you arrive very near it;
there is at this end no passage, except for boats ; therefore, to sail into either of these
harbours, you may keep close to the north-east end of the island ; and in passing that,
the harbours will open to your view.

Great St. Julien is the easternmost harbour, to which there is no danger until you
get within the entrance, when you will find the starboard shore to be shoal, nearly one-
third over ; but when you have passed the first stages, you may anchor in from'S to 4
fathoms water.

To sail into Little St. Julien you will first steer for Great St. Julien Harbour, in order
to clear a sunken rock, which lies directly bei'ore the harbour's mouth ; and having ar-
rived opposite the entrance of Grandeway, s.i sr into the harbour, and anchor in 5 or 4
fathoms water. It is necessary for all ships using either of these harbours, to moor both
head and stern. Grandsway is not a harbour for shijjping, although it is very con-
venient for shipping craft.

FISHOT ISLANDS.— The largest of the group of these islands, the southernmost,
lies about 3 miles N.E. ^ E. from St. Julien Island, and possesses, on its western side,
a harbour of the same name. In a north-easterly direction these islands extend to the
N.E. island, nearly 4 miles. The N.E. island is surrounded by shoals to some distance,
but between it and the next two islands to the southward there are passages, which, in
fine weather, may be taken. Those well acquainted with Fishot Harbour may approach
it either from the northward or southward, but it is only fit for vessels drawing 10 or
11 feet water. There are numerous shoal rocks scattered about between Fishot Uar-

fK-

I' \
1

■

- j

1 , 'i

f i

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

bour and the N.E. island; but within a third of a mile of the shore, the eastern shores
of these islands are all clear.

HARE BAY. — The entrance of this bay is about 5 miles wide, and is formed by Cape
Goose on the north and Fishot Islands on the south ; thence it extends to the N. W.,
about 6 leagues, to the Northern Arm, and is about 6 miles in width. There are
several good harbours within it, but they are not much frequented. The south side of
the bay is bordered by rocks and islets ; the northernmost and most remarkable are
the Spring and Brent Islands. The Spring Islands lie on the south side, 6 miles within
the entrance of the bay, and the Brent Islands lie 4 miles farther. The Southern
Arm runs in about S.W. by "W., 6 or 6 miles from the eastern side of the Brent
Islands, where good and well-sheltered anchorage may be found in 10 or 12 fathoms;
good anchorage may also be found to the westward of the southernmost of the Brent
Islands, in 5 or 6 fathoms. The north side of the bay is all clear and safe. How
Harbour lies on this side, Hi miles from Cape Goose.

How Harbour is by far the best in Hare Bay, and has safe anchorage in every part.
The entrance to it lies 11^ miles N.W. from Cape Goose, and N.E. by N. Sf miles
from the eastern part of the Brent Islands. To the northward a range of marshes and
ponds extends as far as Pistolet Bay. The-harbour is about If mile long, and nearly
naif a mile wide. Off its western point a small rock lies, but it is very near to the land.
The upper part of the harbour shoals gradually, but in the middle of the harbour are
10 fathoms.

Goose Harbour lies on the western side of Cape Goose. It is small, but very secure,
and possesses excellent anchorage in 4 and 6 fathoms. Vessels can sail in with a
westerly wind ; and rings are fixed, to assist vessels warping in Avith a contrary wind.
Vessels generally moor head and stern in this harbour. Cape Goose is one of the most
remarkable points on this coast, and is visible at a great distance. It lies in latitude
61° 17' 20" N., and in certain positions it appears like an island. There are three re-
markable mountains near Cape Goose, and farther in the interior are the Capillaire
Mountains, which are of a great height.

Cremallire Harbour lies about 2 miles northward of Cape Goose, and is spacious and

food, having excellent anchorage in 7 or 8 fathoms water. It is supplied with abun-
ance of wood and water, and is a good harbour for men-of-war to put into. Between
Notre Dame Island and the port side of the entrance there is a shoal in coming from
the southward, which may be easily avoided by keeping near mid-channel.

ST. ANTHONY HARBOUR.— To the eastward of Cremallire Bay lies St. Anthony
Harbour, which is a safe place, having good anchorage in 6 or 7 fathoms water, on a
bottom of blue clay. Its entrance lies N.W. by W. 1| mile from Cape St. Anthony,
and cannot easily be mistaken, from the remarkable high land on its southern shore,
and being the first opening on the port side as you enter the large bay within St.
Anthony Point. This bay runs in north, 3 miles, and has 25 to 35 fathoms in it, and
is quite open to south and S.E. winds. St. Anthony Harbour is well supplied with
wood and water, and is commonly frequented by French fishing-vessels. Cape St.
Anthony lies in lat. ol° 22' N., and long. 65° 33' W. French Point, which lies 1^
mile to the eastward, has sometimes been mistaken for the cape.
Braha Bay lies 3 miles north-eastward of French Point, and is small but safe, having

food anchorage within it. The bottom is sandy, and the shores are bold and steep-to.
t generally has a few French vessels in it during the fishing season. The Braha Shoal
lies S. 74° E. (true), distant 1^ mile from the Needle Rocks, and 12 feet are reported
to be on it, but Lieut. Bullock says that he never found less than 16 feet. Breakers
are occasioned by it with a little z^a ; but the common current will always create a con-
stant ripple. This is the most dangerous rock on this part of the coast. Between it
and the shore there is a good passage with 22 fathoms just within the rock, and 47
fathoms near mid-channel.

ST. LUNAIRE. — At the southern point of the entrance of St. Lunaire lie two
islands, between which there is but a narrow boat passage. The only channel for ships is
to the northward of them, and is almost half a mile wide, with both shores bold-to.
Having entered between the points of the bay, you will perceive some small rocky
islets a-head of you, on either side of which there is a passage, but none between, for
they are connected by a rocky reef of shallow water: you will, therefore, steer to the
northward of them all. On the northern shore you will see Amelia Harbour, where,
within Red Island, you may anchor in 15 fathoms, or farther in, and nearer the head
of the bay, in less water. The starboard side of this bay is rocky, and it is sheltered

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

from the westward by some high islands, but toward the top of the bay is a sandy
beach, where some small brooks empty themselves. '

To the northward of High Island is a sandy cove, having some little islets within it ;
but the depth is shallow, and there is a knoll, of 3 fathoms, lying before its entrance.
To the westward is an opening, named N.W. Bay, having the land on both sides rather
high, and the passage into it clear of danger; but its farther end becomes suddenly
very shallow. There is also another narrow entrance to the N.W. Bay, behiqd a high
island, which forms its southern boundary ; but this is rocky, and fft only for boats.
Between this high island and the two islanas at the entrance of Lunaire Bay, is a wide
space, with very good anchorage, in 15, 18, or 20 fathoms water, where vessels may He
secure from south-easterly gales, but in going to it you must avoid a rock of only 10
feet water, vihich lies to the westward of Plate Island, about a quarter of a mile, and
exactly the same distance from the eastern point of the high island forming the southern
boundary to N.W. Bay. There is also an opening to the southward, named S.W. Bay,
which has not been explored, but its entrance appears to be clear of danger, and has a
depth of 9, 8, and 7 fathoms ; the shores on eacn side are rocky.

Lieut. Bullock says : — " This excellent harbour will contain 100 vessels in perfect
safety ; is remarkably easy of access, and may always be recognised by the appearance
of the White Cape. The best and most convenient anchorage will be found at Amelia
Cove, in from 5 to 7 fathoms. The approach and entrance are bold and steep-to, only
observing to give the points of the southern islands a good berth. Both wood and
water are to be obtained without difficulty ; and it affords, in every respect, a good and
secure anchorage."

GRIGUET BAY is formed by Stormy Cape to the northward, and White Cape to
the southward, having several good coves or harbours for shipping engaged in the fish-
eries. In this bay lies Camel's Island, rising up in the middle like the hump of a camel,
and scarcely to be distinguished from the main land in sailing along. Behind this
island is situated the S.W. Harbour, a narrow channel, running in nearly 2 miles, with
from 4 to 10 fathoms water in it; there is a shoal at its entrance.

The North Harbour runs in within Stormy Cape ; and has, af its entrance, a rock
above water, which is bold-to all round, and vessels may sail on either side of it, and
anchor in 6 fathoms water.

In the passage which leads to the N.W. and S.W. Harbours there is an island,
which contracts the channel, rendering the passages narrow; the best and safest
entrance is to the northward of this island, giving the outer point of the N.W. Harbour
a small berth, and so soon as you get within the island you will open both harbours;
that which runs in north-westward is the larger of the two, and is 2 miles deep; you
should sail up on its western side, having 14, 16, and 18 fathoms, until you get inside
the point, a little within which is a bank of 7 or 8 fathoms, but when you have passed
over this, you will again drop into 16 and 17 fathoms ; and as you approach the head
of the bay, you will lessen your water to 7, 6, and 6 fathoms, every where good anchor-
age, and well sheltered from all winds. The two islands of Griguet lie outside of Camel's
Island, and, together form between them several small but snug harbours for fishing
vessels.

Lieutenant Bullock observes: — "The north bay is insecure in spring and fall, on ac-
count of its being exposed to southerly gales ; the S.W. bay is, therefore, recommended,
where there is good anchorage in 5 or 6 fathoms water. Camel Island's Harbour will
alway be found too intricate for a stranger, and should never be attempted without the
assistance of a pilot."

WHITE ISLANDS.— The White Islands lie to the north-eastward of Stormy Cape,
from which they are distant one league, and about 2 miles from the shore opposite ;
they are small, of moderate height, and have several rocks inside, both above and under
water ; but these are not considered to be dangerous, as they are easily discoverable
even in fine weather, and the passage between them and the main is very safe, having a
depth of 40 fathoms in it.

UUIRPON ISLAND.— This lies off the north-eastern part of Newfoundland, and
forms the S.E. point of entrance to the Strait of Belle Isle : it is large, high, and barren,
and Cape Degrat is visible, in clear weather, full 12 leagues to seaward.'

There is a_ narrow channel which runs in to the southward of Quirpon, and divides it
from the main, in which lies Little Quirpon Harbour. To enter it there is no danger
but what you will easily perceive. Vessels commonly moor head and stern, and He
there perfectly secure.

EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

' it

'■n

Degrat and Pigeon Coves lie on the eastern side of Quirpon Island, and to the north-
ward of Cape Degrat ; at their entrance are several email rockv islets and rocks above
water, affording behind them very fair security for shipping, in 4 fathoms water, and
ffood conveniences for fishing.

Cape Bauld, the northern extremity of Quirpon Island, lies in lat. 51° 39' N. and
in long. 55° 28' W. It is rocky and steep-to, and may be approached very near with
great safety. Having rounded this cape you will perceive a rocky point to the south-
ward leading to the harbour of Quirpon.

Great Quirpon Harbour lies on the N.W. side of the island, and its entrance is be-
tween it and uraves Island. In your approach towards it from the northward you may
borrow as close as you please to Bauld Head, there being no invisible danger until you
arrive at the entrance to the harbour, where there are some shoals which^must be left
on your port side: to do this, keep Black Head, on Quirpon Island, open oTall the other
land, until Raven Point comes over Noddy Point, then haul in for the harbour, going
not nearer than the distance of half a cable's length from the point of Graves Island.
The anchorage within the island is everywhere good, with room and depth enough for
any ships, and the ground holds welh

The best place to ride in will be towards the upper end of Graves Island, abreast of
Green Island, in 7 fathoms water. The passage to the Inner Harbour, on either side
of Green Island, is very good for ships of moderate water, through which you will
have 3 fathoms, and above Green Island you have excellent riding m 7 fathoms. There
is also a passage to this harbour through Little Quirpon Harbour, but it is too narrow
and intricate for any one to attempt, unless they are perfectly acqainted with the- navi-
gation. In and about Quirpon are conveniences for a great number of vessels employed
m the fisheries, and good fishing throughout; the land everywhere is' high and wears
a barren appearance.

NODDY HARBOUR lies a little to the westward of Quirpon Harbour, and runs in
between Noddy Point and Cape Raven. There is no danger in entering, and you will
pass to the starboard of the little island that lies about a mile within the entrance,
and anchor above.it ifx 5 fathoms water ; or you may, with a small vessel, run farther
up into the basin, and anchor in 2^ or 3 fathoms. There is a stage within the
islaud, and on the eastern side of the harbour, with convenient room for many vessels.

The Gull Rock lies W.N.W. f W. from Bauld Cape, in the Island of Quirpon, dis-
tant 2 miles ; and N.N.E. nearly 2 miles from Cape Raven ; it is always above water.
Maria's Ledge lies nearly S.W. from the Gull Rock, distant Ij mile, and north, about
a mile lirom Cape Raven, being distant about a mile from Maria's Head.

In standing in from the northward, for either Quirpon or Noddy Harbours, you need
not fear any danger from the Gull or Maria Rocks, for both are above water; the pas-
sage between them is half a league wide, and very safe ; it will, however, be prudent to
pass nearer the Gull Rock, because of the N.W. Ledge, which never appears but in bad
weather; this N.W. Ledge bears West a little south, distant IJ mile from the Gull
Hock, and you should not attempt ihe passage between it and the main, on account of
other rocks that are said to lie about, and places of shallow water.

SACRED ISLANDS.— Great Sacred Island lies about N.W. by W. \ W.from Bauld
Cape, distant d^ miles, and S.E. by E. k E. from Cape Norman, nearly 12 miles.
Little Sacred Island is one mile to the south-eastward of the Great Island; the passage
between them is safe, and you may sail round both, for they are high and bold; -within
them, on the main, and to the W.S, -Westward, is Sacred Bay, tolerable large, with nu-
merous rocky islets within it : the shores of this place ahuund with wood, and, there-
fore, it is much resorted to for the use of fisheries at Quirpon and Griguet, &c.

Cape Onion forms the north point of Sacred Bay, being high and steep ; near it is a
remarkable rock, named the Mewstone, and much resembling that in Plymouth Sound.
There is a little cove to the southward of this rock, where a vessel may occasionally resort
to with safety. From Cape Onion to Burnt Cape the course is W. f N. about 4| miles:
Burnt Cape has a white appearance, and rises from the seaward to a considerable height.

HA-HA BAY. — On the eastern side of Burnt Cape is Ha-Ha Bay, which runs in
southerly about 2 miles. It lies open to northerly wiudc, but when you are within
the cape you will find anchorage in 6 or 7 fathoms, or you can go farther up and ride
well sheltered in 3 or 2| fathoms. This is a convenient place for the fisheries and has
plenty of wood.

PISTOLET BAY.— This bay lies between Burnt Cape and the Norman Ledges,
which bear from each other N.W. by N. and S.E. by S. distant 4 miles. It is

SOUTH COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

be-

extensive, and reaches several miles each way, having good anchoring ground in most
parts, particularly on the western side, a little above the islands, in about 5 fathoms
water ; the shore is tolerably well furnished with wood, and contributes to supply
those places which are destitute of that article.

Cook's Harbour, in the N.W. part of Pistolet Bay, and within the islands, is about
2 miles above Norman Ledge Point. These ledges are about 1 mile to the eastward
of the north point. To clear these dangers as you enter, be sure to keep Burnt Cape
well open of the outer rocks, that lie off the islands at the western entrance to Pistolet
Harbour, and if, going in, so soon as you consider yourself to be to the southward of
these ledges, steer in for the harbour, leaving the islands and rocks on your port
side ; keep the southern shore on board, for fear of a ledge of rocks that juts out from
a little rocky island on the other side ; and so soon as you get within the isliand, haul n
over for the northern shore, and anchor in 4 or 5 fathoms water. This harbour might
be made very convenient, with several fishing rooms ; and proper stages, to which thjB
boats might resort and cure their fish, might be erected in all the coves betwee^Jt
and Cape Norman. ^H^

BELLE ISLE lies at the entrance of the strait of the same name, and should be naflH^
the Northern Belle Isle, to distinguish it from those we have already described, lying to
the southward. It is about 9^ miles long and 4i broad, being distant from Bauld
Head in Qiiirpon Island about 14 miles, and from the coast of Labrador 12 miles ; it
is moderately high, and wears an unilbrm sterile appearance. On its north-western
coast there is a small harbour named Lark Cove or Harbour, lying within an island
almost close to the land, and fit only for small craft ; and at the eastern side of the
island is another cove named Batteaux Creek, frequented occasionally bv shallops.
About two miles to the north-eastward of this island lies a ledge of rocks, part of
which appear above water, and over these the sea breaks very high ; this is named the
N.E. Ledge, and you will have 15 and 20 fathoms close to it, and 55 between it and the
north part of the island. The soundings about this Belle Isle are very irregular ;
near the island you will seldom find less than 20 fathoms, except on a small bank,
said to lie to the northward, distant 4 miles from its northern part, whereon are only
5 fathoms. The northern part of this island is said to lie in about the latitude of
62° 1' N., long. 65= 19' W. The S.W. end of the island bears S.E. f S. 19 miles from
York Point, and N.E. f N., 14 miles fiom Cape Bauld, in Quirpon Island.

OAPB NOBMAM is the northernmost point of Newfoundland, and is of a moderate
even height, and very barren appearance, which continues far inland. It is about b
league to the north-westward of the ledges from Cape Norman that the shores of
Newfoundland turn south-westerly, and will be described hereafter.

SOUTH COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

FROM CAPE RACE TO CAPE CHAPEAU ROUGE.

BAOB, the south-east extremity of Newfoundland, is, as before mentioned,
a table land of moderate height. A black rock lies near to it, and several smaller
ones around it. E.S.E. from the cape, and to the southward of Cape Ballard, lies a
fishing bank, named New Bank, about 5 miles long and nearly two miles broad ; on it
are from 17 to 26 fathoms water, with very deep water on its outside, and 30 fathoms
just within it. Vessels making this part of the coast may know their approach toward
the land, by suddenly lessening their water to the above depths.

From Cape Race the land trends 6| miles westerly to Mistaken Point, off which is
a rock above water. From Mistaken Point, the coast tans N.W. by W. a distanct
of 2 miles to French Mistaken Point, off which is also a rock. Thereafter the coast
trends N. by W. into Biscay and Mutton Bays, which are seldom frequented ; it is
considered dangerous to get embayed there, as the sea generally drives in, and there

;■: <

ft i

H •

If I

SOUTH COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

long

are hardly any currents to help you out a^in. Mutton Bay lies between Cape
Mutton and Cape Powles, and is about 2 miles deep, with 12 to 3 fathoms, rocky
bottom. The N.W. part of Mutton Bay is separated from Trepassey Harbour by a
low, narrow, stony beach, over which the yessels in Trepassey Harbour can be seen.
At the extremity of this neck of land is Cape Fowles, which forms the east point of
the entrance into Trepassey Harbour.

TREPASSEY HARBOUR.— The entrance to this harbour is about three-quarters
of a mile wide, and runs nearly of the same breadth for 2^ miles, when it narrows to
one quarter of a mile, but again increases to three-quarters of a mile where the ships
ride. Ships intending to enter this harbour generally steer from Mistaken Point
towards Cape Pine, until they fairly open the harbour ; they may then safely run along
shore as it is bold. The dangers in sailing into the harbour are, a small rock on the
eastern shore, about a mile within the Powles Head, and about one-third of a cable's
length from the shore j and on the west side, a shoal which runs along shore up the

«bour to a low green point. Baker's Point on with a low rocky point at the entrance
be harbour, will carry you clear of this shoal. When you are nearly up with the
'green point you may steer more to the westward, and anchor either in the N.W. or
N.E. arm in 5 or 6 fathoms. Wood and water can be obtained here with facility.

From Cape Powles to Cape Pine, the bearing and distance are S.W. by W. 6 miles.
Qape Pine is moderately high and barren. On the 22nd October, 1850, official notice
was issued that a tower, 50 feet high, and painted with bands of red and white alter-
nately, had been erected on Cape Pine, and that a light would be exhibited on and
after let January, 1851. The character of the light is described to be that of a brilliant re-
volving light, of which the greatest intensity will be apparent in every direction seaward
three times in a minute. It Will bum at an elevation of 302 feet above the level of the sea,
and will be visible in clear weather at a distance of 30 miles. Lat. 46° 37' 12" N., and
r. 53° 32' 27" W.
From Cape Pine to Cape Freels the bearing and distance are West, 1| mile ; and
from Cape r reels to Black Head, W.N. W., a mile : the coast, thereafter, trends N.W.
f W., one mile, to the eastern reef and head of St. Shot's Bay, which bay is about a
mile deep, but entirely open to the sea and very dangerous. From the eastern to the
western head the bearing and distance are N. by W. 3 miles.

8T. Mtkuva BAT. — The eastern head of St. Shot's may be considered the east
point of St. Mary's Bay, while Point Lance forms the west point : these bear from
each other N.W. by N. and SJE2. by S., distant about 20 mfles. The bay runs up 9|
leagues, the land on each side being moderately high. From the western head of St. Shot's
to Gull Island, the bearing and distance are ^. | E. 4 miles. Gull Island is small, and
lies close to the land. From Gull Island to Cape English the course and distance are
N. by E. I E. 4| miles. Cape English is high table land, terminating in a low rocky

Koint, forming a bay, about a mile deep, to the southward of it : at the bottom of this
ay is a low stony beach, within which is Holyrood Pond, running to the E.N.E.
about 6 leagues ; this being within the cape gives it the appearance of an island, when
you are to the southward of it. From Cape English to False Cape the bearing and
distance are N.E. i N. 1| mile; and from Cape English to Point la Haye the bearing
and distance are E.N.E. 6| miles. Point la Haye is low, and has extending from it a
ledge of rocks a quarter of a mile into the sea, and a mile along the shore, on which
the sea breaks in bad weather. This is the only danger in the bay, and must be
avoided.

From Point la Haye to Double Road Point the bearing and distance are E.N.E.
1^ mile. The land between is low and bears a barren appearance. Double Road
Point is the southern extreme of St. Mary's Harbour.

ST. MARY'S HARBOUR.— The entrance to this harbour is above a mile wide,
formed by Double Road Point on the south side, and Ellis Point on the north: within
these points the channel divides into two branches, one to the S.E., into St. Maory's
Harbour, the other to the E.N.E., into what is named Mai Bay. When you are within
Ellis Point haul in to the southward, and anchor abreast of the stages and houses, upon
a flat, in 4 or 5 fathoms, where you will lie land-locked. This flat runs off about half a
mile from the shore, and without it are from 15 to 40 fathoms ever to the other side ;
but the best anchorage is about 2 miles above the town, where it is above half a mile
wide, opposite Brown's Pond, which may be seen over the low beach on the starboard
hand: here you will lie land-locked in 12 fathoms water» and excellent ground all the way
yp to the head of the bay.

»■—-

X A

]
t

t;
g

a
2
b
\
1
a

C(l

SOUTH COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

and

MAL BAY, on the E.N.E. branch, is about a mile wide, and about 2 miles deep, but
there is no good anchorage, a heavy swell generally setting into it. The coast from
Trapeau Point trends N.N.E. ^ N., above 2 miles, to Shoal Bay, opposite to tiie
northern point of which lies Qreat Collinet Island, which is about a league in length
and 1^ mile broad; on either side of it there is a safe channel, taking care to give
Shoal Bay Point, which lies a mile distant from the east end of Great Collinet, a berth
of a quarter of a mile, to avoid some rocks which lie off that point. On the northern
side of the island is a stony beach, off which lies a bank for about a quarter of a mile,
on which are from 7 to 18 fathoms, rocky bottom. Little Collinet Island is distant 1|
mile north-eastward from Great Collinet, and is above one mile long and half a mite
broad : it is surrounded by deep water.

GREAT SALMON BIVER.— The entrance of this river, lying 4 miles E. by N.
from the northern part of Little ColliniBt Island, is about three-quarters of a mile wide,
and runs E.N.E. about 7 miles. Little Harbour is an opening about 3 miles up this river
on its southern shore, opposite to which, in a small cove, is the best anchorage in the
river, although it is generally good throughout: here you may ride in safety in 5 or 6
fathoms water. As you advance up the river it becomes narrow, and towards its farther
end becomes very shallow.

COLLINET BAY.— The mouth of Collinet Bay lies N.E. | E., 6| miles, from the
north point of Little Collinet Island. This bay runs in N.E. by N. about 2 mileSi
where the point of an island on the starboard side narrows the p&dsage ; it then widens
again towards the top, where there is a sandy shallow beach. The anchorage is good
throughout the whole of this bay. Below the narrows you will have from 12 to d
fathoms water; there are 7 and 8 fathoms in passing the narrows, and above it 0, 5,
and 4 fathoms, all good ground. There is a cove between Salmon River and Collinet
Bay, which is 1 § mile deep, and has from 13 to 4 fathoms in it ; but as it is exposed to
the S.W., it is not much resorted to.

The entrance to North Harbour lies W.S.W. 4 miles from Collinet Bay, and is about
three-quarters of a mile wide, and runs up to the northward 3 miles. In it is very
good anchorage, in about 5 or 6 fiithoms water, about 2 miles within the entrance,
where it is not above half a mile wide ; or you may run farther up,* where two sandy
points stretch out, being halfa cablets length asunder: keep the starboard point on board,
and anchor close within the starboard side. In entering North Harbour, always keep
mid-channel, for the eastern land is somewhat shallow.

Between North Harbour and Point Lance the coast trends W.S.W. | S., between
which are one or two coves, but no place fit for shipping. Point Lance is situated in
lat. 46° 48' and is a low rugged point, though the interior country is considerably ele-
vated. From Point Lance to Cape St. Mary the bearing and distance are N.W. | W.,
about 6| miles.

CAPE ST. MARY.— This cape is the east point of entrance into Placentia Bay.
It is a pretty high bluff point, appearing somewhat like Cape St Vincent on the coast
of Portugal. At the distance of^mll two miles, W. by S., from Cape Lance, lie the Bull
and Cow Rocks, which are two flat rocks, lying very near each other, and having many
small rocks about them. Theie is another rock, appearing at half-tide, about a similar
distance, but nearer the main, between which and the shore are 10 fathoms, and be-
tween it and the Bull and Cow Rocks 15 fathoms. In a similar direction to the Bull and
Cow Rodks from Cape Lance, but at 3 leagues' distance, and nearly S.S.W., distant 7
miles from Cape St. Mary, are two other little rocks, appearing just above the surface
of the water, and having the sea constantly breaking over them ; they lie S.S.E. and
N.N.W. from each other, distant 3 cables' length, and have 16 fathoms between them
and the same depth of water all around them, excepting towards the S.S.E. where, at
2 cables' length off, onlv 6 fathoms will be found. There are 30, 25, and 19 fathoms
between these rocks ana Cape St. Mary, and near the cape are 13, 14, and 15 fathoms.
Vessels, therefore, may proceed between them, and also between the Bull and Cow
Hocks and the main, if necessary, for there is no hidden danger ; but perhaps it will
always be more prudent to go to the southward of both.

nukOBfmuk. BAT. — The entrance into Placentia Bay is formed by Cape Chapeau
Rouge on the west side, and Cape St. Mary on the east side, which bear E.S.E. and
W.N.W. from each other, distant about 16| leagues.

Cape Chapeau Rouge is the highest and most remarkable land on this part of th«
coast : it appears above the rest somewhat like the crown of a hat, and, in clear weather,
may be seen 11 or 12 leagues to seaward.

^^!

'11
.1 ■

■■«!

SOUTH COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

From Cape St. Mary to Point Breme, the course is N. by E. abaut 9 miles, and from
Point Breme to the Virgin Rocks, the course is N.E. by N. diatancc 12 miles. These rocks
appear above water, and lie about 1| mile from the main. A little \o the southward of
these rocks there are some whitish cliffs in the land, by which that part of the coast
nay be known, on falling in with it, in thick weather.

From the Virgin Kocks to Point Verde, the course io N.E. by E. 4 E., distance 6
miles. Point Verde is the south point of the entrance into the Road of Plaoentia.

PLACENTIA HARBOUR —Point Verde is a low level green point, with a pebble
beach on the east side, nearly half a mile long, with several fishing stages just within
it. At the end of this beach is a high rockv cliff, that extends to the S.E. corner of
the bay, where it again terminates in a pebble beach. This beach runs E.N.E. on*
mile to the Fort Point : on the inside of this beach stands the town of Placentia, which
faces the S.E. arm of the harbour. A little to the southward. of the town is a high
hill, with a remarkable cliff in the middle of the beach. The oQter point on the north
side is level, with a clay cliff on the outer part. It bears from Point Verde N.E. by N.
nearly, distant 1^ mile : from this point the land forms a small bay, with a stony beach
round it, to the corner of the cliff under Signal Hlli, which is the first hill on the north
side of the road from this point. The cliff continues to Freshwater Bay, which is
formed in a small valley between Signal Hill on the west, and Castle Hill on the east,
with a pebble beach round it. A small rivulet runs down this valley, where ships can
water.

To sail into the road coming from the southward, keep one league from the shore, in
order to avoid ther Gibraltar Rock, which lies W.S.W. from Point Verde, about 2|
miles, with 8 feet water on it. Near the bottom of Placentia Road, on the north shore,
at the top of a hill, stand the ruins of a castle, which is distinguishable far out at sea.
So soon as the castle comes open to the northward of Point Verde, you may haul in
for the castle, taking care to give Point Verde a berth of near 2 cables' length ; and by
keeping your lead going, you may borrow on the flat, which lies on the south shore,
into the depth of 4 fathoms ; the soundings throughout are gradual. The best anchor-
age in the road is under the (liastle Hill, in about 6 fathoms wate?. There is a long
beach at the bottom of the road, which terminates in a point to the northward, on which
stand some houses and an old fortress; there is also a fort on the opposite point. The
entrance into the harbour is between these, and is very narrow, bemg not more than
60 fathoms across, and the tide into it runs more than tour knots an hour. In the en-
trance you have 3| fathoms water ; after you are within the narrows, it is about one-
third of a mile broad, and about 1| mile long ; here you may anchor in perfect safety,
in 6 or 7 fathoms water. The tide rises 6 or 7 feet ; and it is high water, F. & C, at
9h. 15ai. a.m.

The only dangers near Placentia are the Virgin Rocks and Gibraltar Rock, on the
south, and Moll Rock on the north.

The Moll Rock bears from Point Verde N.E. | E., distant 2 miles, and N.N.W. from
Moll Point, three-quarters of a mile. There are only 12 feet of water on this rock, with
10 fathoms around it.

From Point Verde to Point Latina the bearing and distance are N.E. by N. 6 j miles.
At the distance of a mile S.W. from Point. Latina is the Wolf Rock, which lies about
half a mile from the main, and between Placentia Harbour and Point Latina, and, there-
fore, must have a good berth in passing. The shore all the way is low near the sea,
but high and rageed inland. Point Roche is a large mile to the eastward of Point
Latina, and has a shoal off it, extending a quarter of a mile out.

LITTLE PLACENTIA HARBOUR.— This harbour runs in to the southward from
Point Roche ; and S.E. by E. | E. from Point Roche, distant 2 miles, is the opposite,
or Fox's Point, which may be considered to be the eastern entrance to Placentia Sound.
The harbour of Little Placentia lies on the western side of this sound, and extends
W. by S., about 1^ mile, and is nearly half a mile broad.

There is excellent anchorage in this harbour, in a cove on the north shore ; this
cove may be known by the west point being woody, and the land to the eastward being
barren. Off the east point of tne cove lies a shoal for near one-third of the distance
over to the south side of the harbour ; in this cove are 7 and 8 fathoms water.

Placentia Sound is an arm which runs in almost a mile to the eastward ; it has deep
water, but is little frequented. Fox's Harbour is a small sandy cove, fit only for boats.

From Point Latina to Ship Harbour, the course is E,, distance 5f miles ; this har-
bour runs up northerly 2| miles, and is about half a mile broad. The best anchorage

^-.«

SOUTH COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

is in a cove on the west side, in about 10 fathoms water, at about a mile from the
entrance.

Fox iHland is small and round, and lies N.E. ^ N. 3 miles from Point Latina, and
N.W. by W. one league from Ship Harbour Point, which is a low stony point, about
1 i mile to the westward of Ship Harbour. Between Fox Island and Ship Harbour
Point is a range of rocks, which in bad weather break almost across ; between the rocks
are 2i, 5, 7, and 10 fathoms water. N.N.W., l^ mile, from Fox Island, is a steep rock
above water, named Fishing Uock ; and N.N.E., 1^ mile from Fishing Rock, lies a
sunken rock, named Rowland's Kock, which almost always breaks.

THE RAM I SLANDS.— These are a cluster ot high islands, lying about 3 miles to
the N.E. { E. of Fox Island. Long Harbour lies on the eastern side of these islands,
and there is not the least danger in sailing into it. The best anchorage is on the
northern side, to the eastward of Harbour Island, between it and the main, where you
will lie secure from all winds in 6 or 7 fathoms water.

The shore from Long Harbour runsN.N.E., N. by E , and North, a distance of fully
15 miles, in which space there is not the least shelter for vessels, nor scarcely for boats,
until you reach Little Harbour, Little South Harbour, and Great South Harbour.
There are said to be several low islands and rocks within this space : one of which,
named the White Rock, from being covered with the dung of birds, lies N.E. by N.
from Point Latina, distant 13 miles, and directly midway between Fox Island and Little
Harbour. It is situated abreast of a small place, named Tinny Cove, and fully 2 miles
off the land : vessels pass on either side.

Little Harbour is small, with 7 fathoms water ; the ground is bad, and lies entirely
exposed to the S.W. wind, which heaves in a very great sea.

LITTLE SOUTH HARBOUR lies one mile to the north-westward of Little Hai»
hour, and has before its entrance several rocky islands. In sailing into the harbour,
you .must leave these islands on your starboard hand, except one, on either side of which
IS a safe passage of 15 fathoms water. On the southern shore, within the islands, is a
sunken rock, about one cable's length from the shore, which generally breaks; nearly
opposite are also some rocks, about a cable's length from the shore, that show at half-
ebb. This harbour is about 1| mile long, and half a mile wide, with 7 fathoms water,
good bottom.

, GREAT SOUTH HARBOUR lies about a mile to the northward of Little South
Harbour. There is no danger in sailing into it ; and near the head is very good an-
chorage in 6 and 7 fathoms water. To the westward of Great South Harbour is Isle
au Bordeaux, a high round island near the main.

COME-liY-CHANCE HARBOUR.— TheenlranceintrCome-by-Chance Harbour lies
N.N.E. 4 miles from Isle au Bordeaux, and runs up N.E. by E. 3 miles. In it are from
20 to 3 fathoms water, sandy bottom j but it is entirely exposed to the S.W wind,
which heaves in a very great swell.

NORTH HARBOUR.— The entrance of this harbour lies about 3 miles N.N.W.
from the entrance of Come-by-Chance. About two miles from the entrance there is
good anchorage in 7 fathoms water, and no danger in sailing in.

PIPER'S HOLE.— The entrance to Piper's Hole lies N.W. by N. 2* miles from the
entrance to North Harbour. The channel in lies between Sound Island and the main,
and in it you will have 19, 15, and 12 fathoms, and when to the northward of the
island 8, 7, and 6 fathoms. From hence Piper s Hole runs up to the northward full 5
milef! ; but the water is shallow and unfit for shipping. Sound, Woody and Barren
Islands lie in a south-westerly direction from Piper's Hole, and between lem and the
north-western shore there is a channel half a mile wide, in which a. .- from 7 to 20
fathoms, and good anchorage all the way. There is a passage with from ^ to 16 fathoms
between Woody and Sound Island, but there is a much wider and deep «r passage be-
tween Woody and Barren Island, in which there are 40 and 60 fathoms. There is a
small cove, named La Plant, opposite the northern part of Barren Island, but it is fit
only for boats. Barren Island is about 3| miles in length, and one in breadth ; it is
high land, and there is a small cove at its south-eastern part, in which tolerable anchor-
age may be got in from 8 to 16 fathoms. Gulsh is an unimportant inlet lying N.W.
by W. from the southern part of Barren Island ; and farther S.W. are Great and Little
Sandv Harbours.

GREAT SANDY HARBOUR.— At the distance of 4 miles W. ^ S. from the south
end of Barren Island lies Great Sandy Harbour, to which there is a passage between
Ship Island and the main, with 7, 9, and 17 fathoms water. The entrance into the

,; 1

I i

• i !

1 ■ .' ■ i

f, '

hjS

• 40

SOUTH COAST OP NEWFOUNDLAND.

harbour is very narrow, and U nauch encumbered with rocks, which are all abore water,
and have channels between them ; but when you get within the harbour there are 6 and
7 fathoms, and good shelter.

LITTLE SANDY HARBOUR is one-quarter of a mile to the southward of the Great
Harbour. In it you have 6 and 7 fathoms water, good bottom ; but in sailing in, you
should pass to the northward of a low rock, which lies at the entrance.

This tiarbour may be known by the island named Bell Island, which lies S.E. | E.
If mile from the mouth of it, and N.E. by N. 13 miles from the west point of Mera-
sheen Island ; off the south point of the island is a remarkable rock, resembling a bell
with the bottom upwards.

To the S.W. by S. from Bell Island lie the Burgoe Islands, and farther to the south-
ward the White Islands.

CLATISE HARBOUR.— This harbour is situated on the main within the Great
Isle of Yalen, and its entrance lies S.W. by W. about 6 miles from the Burgoe Islands.
The shore all edong from the Sandy Harbours is steep-to, and the passage to the har-
bour is about three-quarters of a mile wide, with 40 and 50 fathoms water; but the
cove itself is very narrow. The best anchorage is in the western branch, which is a
mile long, but not a quarter of a mile broad ; m it are from 17 to 20 fathoms water^
good bottom. Between Great and Little Yalen Islands and the main, there is also a
good channel from th'^ southward, with 20, 30, aud 50 fathoms in it.

Crammer's P.'^cks are a cluster of low rocks, above water, Iving E. by N. | N. If
mile from tlie northern end of Great Yalen Island. Between Great and Little Yalen
Islands there is a passage, which is, however, encumbered with several rocks.

MERASHEEN ISLAND. — This island is high and very narrow and runs to the
N.E. by E. rather more than 6 leagues. At the south-western part is a small but very
good harbour, in which are from 6 to 10 fathoms water. To sail into it, keep the
starboard shore on board, in order to avoid a sunken rock lying one cable's length off
a ragged rocky point on the port hand going in. A small cluster of rocks lies off the
south-eastern part of Merasheen, three-quarters of a mile from shore: these lie between
it and Red Island. A large cluster of rocks and islands, named the Ragged Islands,
lie off its northern shores.

RED ISLAND. — Red Island in high barren land, about 4| miles long, and 2f miles
broad. Its south point lies N.N.W. 11 miles from Placentia Road, and E. by N. 16
leagues from Mortier Head. On the east side, near the northern end, is a small har-
bour, which is only fit for shallops. At the distance of 7 miles, directiy N.E. from Bed
Island, Ues the main body of Long Island ; and mid-way between them is Woody
Island, off the S.W. of which are two small rocks above water. The passage between
Red and Woody Islands is otherwise clear from dangers, and nearly 3 miles wide ',
that between Woody and Long Island is 2 miles across : both have deep water.

LONG ISLAND. — From Point Latina to the south point of Long Island, the course
is N. f E> 13i miles. Its length is nearly 3 leagues, but its breadth is nowhere much
above one mile. The southern point of the island is formed of remarkably high steep
rocks ; and off it lie Iron Island and a small rock above water.

On the eastern side of Marasheen Island, at 4 miles N.W. by W. from the southern
point of the island, is Indian Harbour formed by a small island, on either side of which
IS a safe passage. The only anchorage is to the westward of the island, between it and
the main, and nere the ground is uncertain.

Harbour Buffet lies on the east side of Lon^ Island, about 2f miles from the south
point, and is tolerably good : the entrance to it is narrow, but has 13 fathoms water
in it. There are two arms in this harbour, one running to the westward, the other to
the northward : the best anchorage is in thr north arm, in about 15 fathoms water.
This harbour may be known by the islands that lie in the entrance, and to the
southward of it, and by Harbour Buffet Island, which lies E. f S. one mile from
the entrance. To sail into it you must pass to the northward of the islands at its
mouth.

About 4 miles from the south point of Long Island, on the western side, lies Muscle
Harbour. The entrance into the harbour lies between a I9W green point on your star-
board hand, and a small island on your port hand. The harbour is 1| mile long, and
one broad, and in it are 10 to 22 fathoms water, rocky bottom. Yessels steering for
this place may run in between Woody and Iron Islands from the southward, or
between Long and Merasheen Islands nom the northward ; but in the latter track
there are some rocks to be guarded against, which lie nearly mid-channel between the

« fe--^

SOUTH COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

northern ends of both islands. There are also some rooks above water to the north-
eastward of Long Island, called the Bread and Butter Islands, but these are always
visible, and steep-to.

At the distance of 4 miles, W.N.W. f N., from the south-western point of Merasheen
Island, lies the little harbour of Fresque, in which the water is sutBciently deep, but
there are so many rocks about its entrance, that access to it is rendered very difficult.
The Black Rock lies 2 miles S.W. ^ W. from Presque, and a quarter of a mile within
this rock there is a sunken rock. The Island of Marticot lies 2 miles west from the
Black Rock, and is about a mile in length, and half a mile broad. The harbours of
La Perche and Little and Great Paradise lie within the Black Book and Marticot
Island.

LA PERCHE runs in to the northward of the Black Rock. There is no safe an-
chorage in it, the ground being bad, and it lies entirely exposed to the south-east
winds. To the northward of the east point of Marticot Island and to the westward of
La Perche lies Little Paradise, in which the only safe anchorage is in a cove, at the
head of the harbour, on the port side, where you may moor to the shore, and lie land-
locked. The harbour of Great Paradise is only fit for boats, and lies to the westward
of Little Paradise. Between Marticot and the main is Fox Island : there is a safe pa»-
sage for vessels between these islands, with not less than 9 fathoms water, but there is
no passage between Fox Island and the main.

PARADISE SOUND. — About a mile to the westward of Fox Island, is the entrance
to Paradise Sound, which runs up N.E. by E. 4| leagues, and is about a mile broad.
There is very deep water in it, but until yoii get near its head, there is no safe anchor-
age. Just within the entrance on the east side is a cove, in which there are 10 fathoms,
and several rocks above water, but it is not safe to anchor, the bottom being rocky.
There is a sunken rock, which must be avoided, in passing to the north-westward of
Fox Island. Long Island lies to the south-westward of Paradise Sound, and runa
W.S.W. I S. about 3| miles : it is, for the most part, high land, making in several peaks.

Petit Fort Harbour lies at the distance of a mile to me westward of Paradise Sound.
It is a very good harbour, having in it from 14 to 7 fathoms water, good 1. ^^ .■m. The
entrance is rather more than a Quarter of a mile wide, and lies N.E. 5 miles from the
south point of Long Island, andN. by E. 2^ miles from the north point of Long Island.
There is not the least danger in sailing into this harbour : the best anchorage is on th«
starboard side. The S.E. winds heave in a great swell on the west shore when they
blow hard.

About 1| mile to the westward of Petit Fort Harbour lies Nonsuch Harbour, about
the mouth of which there are several islands but no safe anchorage till you get within
all of them.

Cape Roger Harbour lies at the distance of 1| mile to the westward of Nonsuch
Harbour, and close to the westward of Cape Roger, which is a high round barren head,
lying N. i E. 3| miles from the south point of Long Island. There are several low
rocks and islands lying off the east point of the entrance. In the harbour, at a quarter
of a mile within the entrance on the west side, there is a small island having to the
northward between it and the main very good anchorage in 7 or 8 fathoms water ; or
you may run farther up, and anchor in 6 or 7 fathoms.

Two miles N.N.W. nrom the south point of Long Island, lies a small islet named
Green Island, with a shoal all round it, to nearly a cable's length.

GREAT GALLOWS HARBOUR.— From Green Island N.N.W. 2J miles, lies
Great Gallows Harbour Island, which is a high land. Vessels may pass on either side
of this island into Great Gallows Harbour, which lies one mile to the E.N.E. of the
island. In ^is harbour is exceedingly good anchorage in 7 fathoms water, on the star-
board side, just within a low stony point, taking care to give the point a small berth,
in order to avoid a rock covered at high water.

Little Gallows Harbour lies close round to the eastward of Great Gallows Harbour,
and is only fit for small vessels, which must lay moored to the shore,^ above a rock
which is above water, on the port hand. A narrow neck of land only divides the two
harbours. Little Gallows Harbour Island lies before the mouth of the harbour.

Little Harbour is ^e first harbour to the westward of Great Gallows Harbour, but
it is only fit for boats.

BAY DE L'EAU lies to the westward of Little
rather more than a league. There is deep water in it all the way up, except at its
head where there appears a sandy beach ; nere vessels may ride in 3 fathoms.

Harbour, and runs in N.E. | E.

[

'■>■■•
t-.

SOUTH COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

Boat Harbour lies round the western point of Bay de I'Eau, off which is a rock above
water. It runs up N.E. one league, with deep water to about half a mile of the head.
The coast from Boat Harbour, runs 80u»h-weatward to Bane Harbour, which lies on
the main and is fronted by several islands, the largest of which is named Cross Lslond,
and is high woody land, about 2\ miles in length, and one in breadth. Between Cross
Island and the main are several other islands.

BANE HAKBOUIi is an exceedingly good harbour for small vessels : the passage
into it is very narrow, and has in it 2 fathoms water, but when in, there is sufficient
room to moor in 3 fathoms, good bottom. Between all these islands there are good
channels, by which vessels may pass to the harbours to the northward. Hashnon lies
If mile S."W". from Bane Harbour, but is too shallow for any vessel ; and about the
same distance from Rashoon is Broad Cove, which lies to the north-eastward of a point
of land which juts out, and is named Broad Cove Head. In Broad Cove there is very
good anchorage, in 8 or 9 fathoms water.

RED HARBOUR is a good harbour lying at the distance of 3 miles from Broad
Cove Head. In it are 17, 13, and 9 fathoms, but it is too open to the southward. At
the distance of 3^ miles S.W. from Red Harbour, and situated on the main, is John-the-
Bay 5 in your passage to which, and nearly mid-channel, between Flat Islands and the
shore, is a cluster of small islands, with deep water all round them ; and farther on,
near the land, is a rock above water, on either side of which you may sail. The channel
between it and the land is narrow, and has 17 fathoms; that on the eastern, or outer
side, has 18, 25, and 26 fathoms, and leads directlv out to Placentia Ba)'.

AUDIERNE ISLAND lies half a mile to the' northward of Cape Judas or Middle
Island, on the west side of which is a tolerable good harbour. Vessels bound for this
harbour may pass between Cape Judas and Audierne Island, and between Crow and
Patrick's Island, which are two small islands lying off the S.W. point of Audierne Is-
land. About one cable's length from Audierne Island, to the southward of the harbour,
is a sunken rock ; the mark for avoiding which, in coming from the southward, is not
to haul in for the harbour till you open a rcnarkable green point on the south side of
the harbour. The best anchorage is on the north shore, just within a small island. A
spit of rocks stretches off the Green Point on the south shore, which is covered at high
water.

Off the east point of Audierne Island is a small island, named Ford's Island, having
a sunken rock on its western side at about a cable's length distant, and another on the
east side, both of which almost always break.

At H mile W. by N. from Ford's Island lies Green Island, off which is a little rocky
islet, and another off its western ends. There is deep water all round it, 1 1 fathoms close
to the rocky islets, 70 fathoms between it and Ford's Island, 73 and 60 fathoms be-
tween it and Long Island, and still deeper water towards the Gallows Harbours.

The Saddle back is a small island lying E.N.E. ^'E. Sk leagues from Oorbin Head,
E. by N. 16 miles from Mortier West Point, and E. by S. 3 leagues from John-the Bay
Point. Between it and the main are a great number of rocks and islands, which
render this part of the coast very dangerous. There is a chain of rocks lying l^ mile
to the N.E. by E. of the Saddle-back.

CAPE JUDAS, or MIDDLE ISLAND, is an island about 2i miles in length, and
2 in breadth. It lies 1^ mile to the north of the Saddle-back, and has on its sr ith end
a remarkable round hill, named the cape. Between this island and the main is a
cluster of islands and low rocks, with a great number of sunken rocks about them,
named the Flat Islands, the innermost of which lies about a mile from the main.

At 3j miles W. from the south-eastern Flat Island, and two miles to the N.N.W. of
John-the-Bay Point lies John-the-Bay, in which is tolerably good anchorage in about 8
fathoms water, with sandy bottom.

From Jonn the Bay Point to Mortier East Point the course is S.W. { W., distant
8 miles. At 2 miles S.W. by W. from John-the-Bay Point is Rock Harbour, which is
fit only for boats, on account of the infinite number of rocks in it, both above and under
water. Between John-the-Bay Point and Rock Harbour, lie two sunken rocks, half a
mile from the shore.

MORTIER BAY.— Two miles W.S.W. from Rock Harbour is the entrance into
Mortier Bay. On the west side of the entrance is a small harbour, named Beaubois, in
which there are only 9 feet water at low water. The course into Mortier Bay is N.N.E.
for about 2 miles, and in it there are from 50 to 70 fathoms >*ater, the land on each side
being high ; it then runs to the westward about 2 miles, and is nearly 2 miles wide. In'

SOUTH COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

f 4

tne S.W. corner of the bay is a river, which runs to the S.W. about 6^ miles. On the
east side, at about 3 miles from the entrance, is an exceedingly good harbour, named
Spanish iloom, in which you may anchor in from 4 to 6 futhoms water, good bottom,
and lie secure from all winds. There is not the least danger in sailing* into this har-
bour, giving the low rocks above water at the entrance on the port hand a berth of one
cable's length.

Croney Point and Island lie about 2} miles from the entrance of Mortier Bay. At
about 2 mileH farther southward, and about a mile westward of Mortier East Point, is
Little Mortier Bay, on the west side of which, near the entrance, is a small round
island, named Mortier Island, which is bold-to all round, and may be passed on either
side. Close to the first point, bevond this island on the same side, is another small
island, and about 2 cables' length from this island, in a line for Mortier Island, is a
sunken rock, on which the sea breaks in bad weather. At the bottom of the bay, on
the east side, lies Fox Cove, in which is very good anchorage, and room for one ship to
moor in 9 fathoms, good holding ground, two points open to the sea, from S.S.Eto o.E.
The harbour of Little Mortier lies on the west side, and is a tolerable place for small
vessels, but they must moor to the shore : in the entrance you hi. re 7 fathoms water,
but only 2 in the harbour ; off the starboard point, going in, is a rock which is covered
at high water.

Mortier West Head lies l^ mile S.W. by W. from Mortier East Point, and a mile
beyond it is Iron Island. At 2 leagues S.E. i E. from Iron Island, and S.W. ^ W.
5 leagues from Cape Judas, lies the Mortier Bank, the shoal part of which is about one
league over, and has not more than 4 fathoms on it. In bad weather the sea breaks
very high on it.

Iron Island is a small high island. There is a rock under water off its S W. point ;
at three-quarters of a mile to the southward of it is Gregory's Rock ; S. ^ W. a quarter
of a mile from which is a shoal ramed Galloping Andrews ; and 8. £. by E. one mile
from Iron Island .' the White Horse, a shoai having 8 fathoms on it.

GREAT AND UTTLE BURIN HARBOURS.— The S.E. point of Great Burin
Island lies S.W. ^ W. one league from Iron Island; and W.N.W. 1^ mile from it, is
the north part of Pardy's Island. The harbours of Great and Little Burin lie on the
main within these islands. Vessels bound for the harbours of Burin, may pass
on either side of Iron Island, the only danger in passing to the northward being
the ledge, named the Brandya, which ulmost always break : they lie nearly a quarter of
a mile to the southward of a low rock above water, close under the laud of Mortier
West Head. If the wind should take] you a-head after you are within Iron Island,
take care to keep Mortier West Head open to the westward of Iron Island, in order to
avoid Gregory's Rock, on which are only 2 fathoms water, and which generally breaks.
Vessels may pass with safety between this rock and Iron Island, taking care to give
Iron Island a berth of one cable's length.

On the main, within Pardy's Island, are two conspicuous white marks in the rocks,
the northernmost of which brought on with the north part of Pardy's Island and Iron
Island N.E. | N., will lead on the Galloping Andrews, a shoal, with 5 fathoms of water
on it.

Great Burin Island lies N.N.E. and S.S.W. j it is 3 miles lon^, and high land.
About a quarter of a mile from the easternmost part of Great Burin Island lies the
Dodding Rock ; and near the south end of the island is Cat Island, which is high and
round, and lies E.N.E., about 4 miles, from Corbin Head. From Corbin Head to
Shalloway Point the bearing and distance are N.E. ^ N., 4f miles. Between them,
and nearly in the same direction, lie Corbin and Little Burin Islands, both high and
round, not more than a cable's length from the shore.

Shalloway Island lies N N.W. | W. nearly a mile from Cat Island, and N.E. by E. a
quarter of a mile from Little Burin Island : the passage into Burin Harbours, irom
the southward, lies to the westward of Shalloway Island.

In sailing in, take care to give Poor Island a berth on your port hand ; and, within
Shalloway Island, you may anchor in safety between it apd Great Burin Island, in
from 12 to 18 fathoms. The best anchorage in Great Burin Harbour is in Ship Cove.
The course up to it, after you are within Neck Point, which is to the westward of the
Shalloway Island, is N.N.E. about 1^ mile. It is about a quarter of a mile wide : in
sailing up, keep the west shore on board, in order to avoid a sunken rock on the
eastern shore, at about half-way up, and about a cable's length from the shore. Another
rock, with 2.^ fathoms on it, lies above a cable's length to the S.W. of Harbour Point,

SOUTH COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

which ia round and green, and of moderate height, joined to Great Burin Island by •
low, narrow, sandy neok.

Burin Bay is about a mile N.N.K. of Little Burin Island : it is clear, and about a
mile w'de every way : here ships may occasionally anchor, and lie almost land-locked.
In this bay are two islands, one called Poor Island, low and barren ; the other lies to
the northward, before the entrance of Burin Inlet, and is high and woody.

BUKIN INLET may be entered on either side of the island ; it extends up 6 miles :
a little within the entrance on the east aide, half a cable's length from the shore, is a
rock covered at three-quarters flood ; and If mile from the entrance, near the middle,
is another rook, to the westward of which is good room, and good anchorage, in from
7 to 12 fathoms. There are 15 fathoms in the entrance; and, m the middle, two milea
up, Ifi to 23 fathoms ; and thence up to the head are from 10 to 6 fathoms.

The oast passage in is between Pardy's Island and Iron Island : but is not safe with-
out a commanding gale, and that between the N.N.E. and S.E.

Corbin Harbour is about a mile to the northward of Corbin Head, and is a g^od
harbour for small vessels. At a quarter of a mile eastward from this harbour, and 3
cables' length from the shore, is a sunken rook, of 5 or 6 feet of water, on which the
sea breaks in bad weather. Vessels bound for this harbotir must also avoid a shoal of
2 fathoms of water, which lies E.S.E. from the south point of the entrance about half
a mile. The best anchorage is in the north arm, about half a mile within the entrance ,
opposite a cove on the starboard side.

Sauker Head is a higli hill in shape of a sugar-loaf, off which, to the south-west-
ward, lies a small rock, under water, close in with the land. From Sauker Head to
Cape Chapeau Rouge, the bearing and distance are West, 4 miles ; between lie the
harbours of Great and Little St. Lawrence.

LITTLE ST. LAWRENCE lies to the eastward of the Great St. Lawrence. To sail
into it you should keep the west shore on board, in order to avoid a sunken rock which
lies a little without the point of tbe peninsula, which stretches oif from the east side of
the harbour. The best anchorage is in 3 or 4 fathoms water, on a fine sandy bottom,
above the peninsula, which shelters you from all winds ; there is also anchorage without
the peninsula in 12 or 14 fathoms, on good ground, but entirely open to the S.S.E.
winds. In this harbour are good fishing conveniences, and plenty of wood and water.

GREAT ST. LAWRENCE.— This harbour lies close to the eastward of Cape
Chapeau Rouge. To sail into it, you should be careful with westerly, and particularly
with S.W. winds, not to come too near tho Hat Mountain, in order to avoid the flurries
and eddy winds under the high land. There is no danger but what lies very near the
shore, and the course in is first N.N.W. till you open i,'>3 upper part of the harbour,
then N. | W. to the head of it, Tbe best place for large snips to anchor is before
a cove on the east side of the harbour, a little above Blue Bearh Point, which is the
first point on the west side ; where you may lie in 12 or 13 fathoms water on good
groimd, only two points open. There is also anchorage anywhere between this point
and the point of Low Beach on the same side near the nead of the harbour, observing,
that the ground near the west shore is not so good as the ground on the other side.
Fishing vessels lie at the head of the harbour above the beach, sheltered from all
winds.

Garden Bank, on which there are from 7 to 17 fathoms water, lies about half a mile
off the entrance of Little St. Lawrence, with Blue Beach Point on with the east point
of Great St. Lawrence.

CAPE CHAPEAU ROUGE TO CAPE RAY.

About one mile W.S.W. from Cape Chapeau Rougv^ is Ferryland Head, a high
rocky island, lust separated from the main.

Laun Bay lies W.N.W. 5 miles from Ferryland Head, and has in the bottom of it
two small inlets, named Great and Little Laun : the latter, which is the easternmost,
lies open to the S.W. winds, and therefore is no place fcir anchorage. Great Laun lies
in about N.E. by N. 2 miles ; it is nearly half a mile wide, and has from 14 to 3 fathoms
water; in sailing in, be careful to avoid a sunken rock, which lies about a quarter of a
mile off the east point. The best anchorage is on the east side, about half a mile from
the head, in 6 and 5 fathoms, tolerably good bottom, and open only to South and S.
by W. v/inds, which cause a great swell. The head of this place is a bar harbour,
where boats can aacend at half-tide, and find conveniences for fishing, with both wood
and water.

SOUTH COAST OP NEWFOUNDLAND.

Laun Islands lie off the west point of Laun Bay, not far from the shore ; the western*
most and outermost of which lies W.N.W., weHterlv, 10 miles from Fcrryland Head.
Nearly a quarter of a mile tu the southward of thfl island is a rock, whereon the sea
breaks in very bad weather. There are are other sunken rocks about these islands, but
dangerous, being Tory near the shore.

Taylor's Bay hes open to the sea, about 3 miles to the westward of Laun Islands.
Off tile oast point are some rocks, nearly a quarter of a mile from the shore.

Poii\| Aux Oaul is a low, narrow point of land, which stretches out a little to the
westward of Taylor's Bay. A rock, above water, lies off it at half a mile from the shore,
named Gaul Sliag Rook, which bears from Ferryland Head W.N.W. f W. 5 leagues :
there are 14 fathoms close to the off-side of it, but some rocks on its inside.

From Point Au\ Gaula Shag Rock to the Lamelin Islands, the bearing and distance
are N.W. by W. a league : between is the Bay of Lamelin, which is unfit for shipping,
being shallow, and having several islands and rocks about it. The river at the bottom
of the bay abounds with salmon. Near the south point of the westernmost Lamelin
Island is a rock high above water, named Lamelin Shag Rock.

From Lamelin fshag Rock to Point May, the distance is 8 miles : between He the
Lumelin Ledges, which are very dangerous, some of them being 3 miles from the land.
To avoid them, in the day-time, you should not brine the Lamelin Islands to the south*
ward of E.S.E. until Point May bears N.E. by N. from you, when you may steer
northward between Point May and Green Island with safety. By night, approach no
nearer than in 30 fathoms water.

When navigating this part of the coast, it is well to obserre the appearance of
the land, for Chapeau Rouge and Laun are very high and hilly clone to the sea ; from
Laun Islands to Lamelin, the land is only moderately high ; but from Lamelin to Point
May, near the shore, it is low, with beaches of sand, while inland it beoMpes moun-
tainous.

■T. PIB««B.— The island of St. Pierre, lying at 11 leagues W. by N. from Cape
H Chapeau Rouge, is about 4 leagues in circuit, and barren in the extreme, consisting of

} ^^ a mass of rugged hummocks rising to a height of 4 or fiOO feet directly from the sea,

and destitute of trees. On coming from the westward, Galantry Head, the south-east
point of the island, makes in a round hummock, and the land near it being low gives
It the appearance of a small island ; it may be also recognised by its fixed light, which
is visible 18 miles off. The port is on the eastern side of the island, at only a mile
to the north-westward of Galantry Head, and is bounded on the east by
Chien or Dog Island, eastward of which are two other islands, and several
locks. The passage in, between Dog Island and St. Pierre, is very narrow, and bor-
dered with rocks, but in mid-channel are 6, 4, 3^, 5, and 6 fathoms. The harbour is
small, and has from 20 to 12 feet water; but there is a bar across the entrance, with
onlv 6 feet at low water, and 12 or 14 at high water.

The road lies on the N.W. side of Dog Island, and will admit ships of any burthen
in 8, 10, or 12 fathoms water. The best anchorage is on the north side ; but in gene-
ral it is rocky, and exposed to the N.E. winds. Be cautious, in going in or out, of
some sunken rocks, which lie about a mile E.S.E. from Vainqueur Island, which is the
easternmost of the islands above mentioned.

Upon Canon Point, on the nor^h side of the entrance to the inner harbour, in lati-
tude 46° 46' fi2", longitude 66° 7' 23", is a lighthouse, with fixed light, about a quarter
of a mile eastward of the town, which is kept up from tho \tX May to the 15th Novem-
ber. With the lighthouse bearing W, by N. or W. | N. about two cables* length,
there is anchorage in 5^ and 6 fathoms.

THE ^SLANp OF COLOMBIER lies very ne»r to the N.E. point of St. Pierre,
and is rather high : between them is a passage one-third of a mile wide, with 12
fathoms water. On the north side of the island is a rock, named Little Colombier ; and
about one quarter of a mile E.N.E. from it is a sunken rock, named Basse Colombier,
with 2 fathoms on it.

GREEN ISLAND is about three-quarters of a mile in circuit, and low : it lies
E.N.E. about 6 miles from St. PieiTe, and nearly in the middle of the channel between
it and Point May, in Newfoundland. On its south side ore several rocks above and
under water, extending 1^ mile to the W.S.W.

ZtAMOZST or Little Miquelin.— Langley Island lies to the N.W. of St. Pierre,
with a passage of about 3 miles wide between, free from danger. It is about 8 leagues in
circuit, of a moderate and equal height, excepting at the north end, which is a low

SOUTH COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

K^\

'r .'

point with sand-hills ; off which, on both sides, it is flat a little way ; but every other
part of the island is bold-to. There is anchorage on the N.E. side of the island, near
Seal Cove, in 5 or 6 fathoms, a little to the soi^hward of the sand-hills, on a fine sandy
bottom.

MlQVBXiOiff is joined to Langley, by a long, narrow range of sand-hills, having a
beach on e».ch side. Mi(|uelon is 4 leagues in length from north to south, and about 5
miles in breadth at the widest part. The middle of tlie island is high land, named tha
High Lands of Dunne ; but down by the shore it is low, excepting Cftpe Miquelon,
which is a lofty promontory at the northern extremity of the island. Oa the ^E. side
of the island is the little harbour of Dunne, a bar harbour admitting fishing-shallops at
half flood, but no way calculated for shipping.

Some rocks extend off from the eastern point of the island, under the high land, l.|
mile to the eastward : some are above and some under water ; the outermost are above
water, and there are 12 fathoms water close to them, with 18 and 20 a mile off. N.E.
^ E. about 4| miles from these rocks, lies Miquelon Bank, on which are 6 fathoms
water.

The chief roadstead of the island is large and spacious ; it lies towards the north
end, and on the east side of the island, between Cape Miquelon and Chapeau, which
is a very remarkable round mountain near the shore, off which are some sunken rucks
at a short distance, but everywhere else it is clear of danger. The best anchorage is
in 6 or 7 fathoms, near the bottom of the road, on fine sandy bottom, but exposed to
easterly winds, which bring in a heavy sea; the mark is, the signal-staff in one with
the church, in such a position as to hide Soldier's Point by Chatte Point.

The Seal llocks, two in number, are above water, and lie about 1 j league off from
the north-west side of Miquelon. The passage between them and the island is very
safe, and lJ|ere are 14 or 15 fathoms water within a cable's length all round them.

The isl«nRIs rf St. Pierre, Langley, and Miquelon, were ceded to France by England,
on condition that no forts should be built on either ; that no more than fifty men of
regular troops should be kept there ; and that they should have no military stores, or
cannon capable of making a defence. During the late hostilities, these isles were
annexed to the Government of Newfoundland, having been taken possession of by the
British forces in May, 1 793 ; but they have been restored to France, on the original
conditions, by the treaty of 1814.

ToiLVVNB BAT. — Point May has a rocky islet at its point, and from thence the
land turns N.N.E. towards Dantzic Cove and Point, and thence E.N.E. towards For-
tune Head.

From Point May to Pass Island the bearing and distance are N. by E. 12 leagues.
Between them is the entrance to Fortune Bay, which is about 22 or 23 leagues deep,
and in which are numerous bays, harbours, and islands.

The Island of Brunet lies nearly in the middle of the entrance into Fortune Bay. It
is above 5 miles in length, 2 in breadth, and of moderate height ; the eastern part
appears, in some points of view, like islands. On its N.E. side is a bay, wherein there .
is tolerable anchorage for ships, in 14 or 16 fathoms water, sheltered from southerly
and westerly winds. In the bottom of the bay, at about a quarter of a mile from the
shore, are some rocks, which must be avoided. Opposite to this bay, on the south-
west side of the island, is a small cove, with 6 fathoms water. The islands lying off
the west end of Brunet, to the southward, are n med the Little Brunets, and, with
Brunet, may be approached within a quarter of a mile all round.

The Plate Islands are three rocky islets, of a moderate height, the nearest of which
lies W.S.W. one league J'rom the west end of Great Brunet. The southernmost is
about 2 miles farther off, and bears from Cape Miquelon E. | S. 3^ leagues ; and in a
direct line between Point May and Pass Island, 17 miles from the former, and 19 miles
from the latter. E.S.E., a quarter of a mile, from the Great Plate (which is the
northernmost), is a sunken rock, whereon the sea breaks, and this is the only danger
about them.

There are several strong and irregular settings of the tide, or currents, about the
Plate and Brunet Islands, which seem to have no dependence on the moon and the
course of the tides on the coast.

Sagona Island, which lies N.E., 2 leagues, from the east end of Brunet, is about a
mile across each way, of a moderate height, and bold-to all round. On its western
side there is a small creek admitting fishing shallops, in the middle of the entrance
to which is a sunken rock, rendering it difficult of access, except in very fi.ne weather.

SOUTH COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

A sand bank niirrounds this island, running westerly full 7 miles, upon which are 14,
17, and 20 fathoms water.

Point May, the southern extremity of Fortune Bay, and the 8 W. extremity of this
part of Newfoundland, may be known by a great black rock, nearly joining to the
pitch of the point, and a little higher than the land, which makes it look like a black
nummock on the point. At about a quarter of a mile from this black rock are three
sunken rocks, on which the sea always breaks.

DANTZIC COVES.— N. by E. 1| mile from Point May is Little Dantzic Cova;
and 2 miles farther is Great Dantzic Cove. From Dantzic Point (which is the north
point of the coves) to Fortune Head, the bearing and distance are E.N.E. 2^ leasrues ;
and thence to the villa of Fortune, H mile S.E. by E. This is p. fishing-village ;
and the road where the ships lie has from 6 to 10 fathoms water, quite exposed to
nearly half the compass. It lies S.S.W. from the east end of Brunet. To the N.N.-
westward of Dantzic Point is the long narrow Bank of Jerseyman's, with 24 and 25
fathoms over it, extending from abreast of the point in the direction of the Plate
Islands.

The Cape of Grand Bank is high, and lies one league E.N.E. from Fortune. To
the eastward of this cape is Ship Cove, where there is good anchorage for shipping in
8 or 10 fathoms water, sheltered from south, west, and north-westerly winds. Grand
Bank lies S.E. half a league from the cape, and is a fishing village, where there is no
security for shipping, and the entrance is barred.

From the cape of the Grand Bank to Point Enrag6e, the course is E.N.E. j E., dis-
tance 8 leagues. The coast between forms a circular bay, in which the shore generally
is low, with several sanay beaches, behind which are bar-harbours, fit only for boats, of
which the principal is Great Garnish, lying 4A leagues from the Cape of Grand Bank ;
it may be known by several rocks above water, lying before it, at 2 miles distance from
the shore ; the outermost of these is steep-to, but between them and the shore are
several dangerous sunken rocks. To the eastward, and within these rocks, is French-
man's Cove, a convenient place for the cod-fishery, where small vessels sometimes run
in and anchor in 4 or 5 fathoms water, tolerably well sheltered from the sea winds. The

Fassage in is situated to the eastward of the rocks that appear the highest above water ;
etween them and some other lower rocks lying ofi" to the eastward of the east point of
the cove, there is a sunken rock nearly in the middle of the passage, of which you
should be aware. The shore is bold all the way from Point May to Cape of Grand
Bank, there being 10 or 12 fathoms within 2 cables' length, and 30 or 40, at a mile off:
between the latter and Great Garnish the water is not so deep, and ships may anchor
anywhere in 8 or 10 fathoms water sheltered only from the land-winds.

From Point Em-ag^e to the head of the bay, the course is, first, E.N.E. \ E., 3
leagues, to Grand Jervey ; then E. ^ N., 7k leagues, to the head of the bay. The land,
in general, along the south side, is high, bold-to, and of uneven appearance, with hills
and vallies of various extent^ the latter mostly covered with wood, and having many
fresh water rivulets.

At 7 leagues to the eastward of Point Enrag^e is Bay L'Argent, where there is
anchorage in 30 or 40 fathoms water, sheltered from all winds.

The entrance of Harbour Mill6 lies to the eastward of the east point of L'Argent.
Before this harbou r and Bay L'Argent, is a remarkable rock, which, at a distance,
appears like a shallop under sail. Harbour Mill6 branches into two arms, one lying
to the S.E. the other to the East ; at the upper part of both are good anchorages.
Between this harbour and Point Enrag6e are several bar-harbours, or small bays, with
sandy beaches, but the water all along the coast is very deep : you may safely anchor
anywhere, but it must be very near the shore.

Cape Mill6 lies N.E. k E. one league from the Shallop Rock, above mentioned, and
nearly 3 leagues from the head of Fortune Bay ; it is a high, reddish, barren rocky

{ioint. The width of Fortune Bay at Cape Mille does not much exceed half a league ;
)ut, immediately below it, it becomes twice as wide, by which the cape may readily
be known ; and above this cape the land on both sides is high, with steep craggy cliffs.
The head of the bay is terminated by a low beach, behind which is a large pond, or
bar-harbour, fit only for boats. There are convenient places for building stages in
this, and in all other bar-harbours between this and the Grand Bank, and good
beaches for drying fish, available for the accommodation of numerous boats.

Grand le Pierre is a good harbour, situated on the north side of the bay, half a
league from the head. The entrance cannot be seen until you are abreast of it. There

SOUTH COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

is no danger in going in,
ill \i ■

and yon may anchor in any depth from 8 to 4 fathoms,
sheltered from all winds.

English Harbour lies a little to the westward of Grand Pierre ; and to the westward
of English Harbour is the Little Bay de I'Eau, both of which are small, and only
fit for boats.

New Harbour is situated opposite to Cape Mill£, and to the westward of the Bay
de I'Eau. It is a small inlet, and has good anchorage on the west side, in from 8 to
6 fathoms, sheltered from S.W. winds.

The Harbour Femme lies half a league to the westward of New Harbour ; it is nar-
row, and has in it 20 and 23 fathoms. Before its entrance is an islet, near to which are
some rocks above water. One league to the westward of Harbour Femme is Brewer's
Hole, fit only for boats, before which is also a small island near the shore, and some
rocks above water.

Harbour La Conte is situated one mile to the westward of Brewer's Hole. Before
this are some islands, the outer one of which is named the Petticoat Island, the inner,
Smock Island. There are also two smaller ones between these, and a sunken rock or
two. The best passage in is on the west side of the outer island, and between the two
large ones. So soon as you begin to open the harbour, keep the inner island close on
board, to avoid some sunken rocks that lie near a small island, which you will dis-
cover between the N.E. point of the outer island, and the opposite point on the main :
there is also another rock which appears at low water, and lies higher up on the side
of the main ; and when you get beyond these dangers, you may keep in the middle of
the channel, and will soon open a fine spacious harbour, wherein you may anchor in
any depth, from 6 to 16 fathoms water, on a bottom of sand and mud, shut in from all
winds. There is a small cove to the eastward of the outer island, which is fit for
small vessels and boats, and otherwise convenient for the fisheries.

Long Harbour lies 4 miles to the westward of Harbour La Conte, and N.E. by E.
\ E., distant 5 leagues from Point Enrag^e. It may be known by Gull Island, which
ues at its mouth, and a small rock which lies half a mile without the island, and has
the appearance of a small boat. There is a passage into this harbour on each side of
this island, the western one of which is the broader of the two, and has, nearly in the
middle, a little outside of the island, a ledge of rocks whereon are two fathoms water ;
and a little within the island, on the eastern side, are others, off two sandy coves at 2
cables' lengths from the shore, and visible at low water. Long Harbour runs 5 leagues
up into the country ; but the only anchoring place is in Morgan's Cove, on the N.W.
side of the harbour, about 2 miles within GuU Island, in 15 fathoms water, unless you
run above the narrows. There is a salmon fishery at the head of the bay.

To the westward of Long Harbour is Hare Harbour, fit for small vessels only. Two
miles to the northward of Hare Harbour is Mai Bay, having very deep water, extend-
ing north-easterly about 5 miles, and having no anchorage except at its farthest end.
To the westward of Mai Bay, near the shore, lie the Rencontre Islands, the western-
most of which is the largest, and has a communication with the main at low water.
In and about this island is shelter for small vessels and boats.

Belle Harbour lies 4 miles N.W. by N. from the westernmost Rencontre Island.
The passage into it is on the western side of the island ; and so soon as you have
passed the islands, you will open a small cove, on the east side , where small^vessels
can anchor, but large vessels must run up to the head of the harbour, and anchor in
20 fathoms, where there is most room : it is but an indifferent harbour. About 1°|
mile westward of Belle Harbour is Lally Cove, behind an island, fit for small
vessels only; the west point of this cove is high and bluff, and is named Lally Head ;
to the northward of this head is Lally Back Cove, where ships may anchor, in 14 or
16 fathoms water.

Two miles to the northward of Lally Cove Head, are East Bay and North Bay, in
both of which there is deep water, but no anchorage near the shore. At the head of
North Bay is the largest river in Fortune Bay, which appears to be a good place for
the salmon-fishery, and hence is named Salmon River.

CINQ ISJiES BAY lies to the southward of the North Bay, opposite to Lally Cove
Head, and affords tolerably good anchorage for large ships on the S.W. side of the
islands, in the bottom of the bay. The north arm is a very snug place for small vessels,
and salmon may be caught at its head.

A little to the southward of the Bay of Cinq Isles is Corben Bay, where there is good
anchorage for any ships in 22 or 24 fathoms water.

SOUTH COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND,

About 2 miles south-eastward from Lally Cove Head are two islands, bold-to all
round, about a mile distant from each other. The north-easternmost of these is named
Belle Island, and the other Dog Island. Between Dog Island and Lord and Lady
Island, which lies off the south point of Corben Bay, something nearer to the latter, is
a Hunken rock, with deep water all round it ; and about a quarter of a mile to the north-
ward of Lord and Lady Island, is a rock which appears at low water.

BANDE DE L'ARIER BAY lies on the west point o^elle Bay, and N. i W. 3
leagues from Point Enrag^e.

_ It may be known by a very high mountain over the bay, which rises almost perpen-
dicular from the sea, named Iron Head. Chapel Island, which forms the east side of
the bay, is high land also ; the harbour lies on the west side of the bay, just within the

Joint formed by a naiTow low beach, and is a snug place. Between the harbour and
ron Head there is tolerably good anchorage in 18 or 20 fathoms.

Bande de L'Arier Bank has 7 fathoms water on it, and lies with the beach of Bande
de L'Arier Harbour just open of the west point of the bay, and Boxy Point on with the
north end of St. Jacques Island.

Two miles to the westward of Bande de L'Arier is the harbour of St. Jacques, which
may be readily known by the island before it being high at each end, and low in
the middle. The passage into the harbour is on the west side of the island, free from
danger, as is the harbour, where you may anchor in from 17 to 4 fathoms.

About 1 ^ mile to the westward of St. Jacques is the harbour of Blue Pinion ; and q
little to the westward of that is English Cove.

BOXY HARBOUR.— Boxy Point lies W. a S. 6 miles from St. Jacques Island,
and E.N.E. | E. 12'| miles from the east end of Brunet Island. It is of a moderate
height, and the most advanced to the southward of any land on the coast. Boxy Har->
hour lies N.E. C i./'os from Boxy Point, in which there is anchorage, in 4 or 5 fathoms
watpr, fine santcy f/ ■ • ! • to sail in, bring Boxy Point open of a little black head just
within the point i . .j. . ' riar's Head ; as by following this direction you will keep the
middle of the chan^ >' :A between the shoals which lie off each point of the harbour
where the stages are.

W.N.W. one mile from Boxy Point is the island of St. John, and N.N.W., | a
league from St. John's Island, is St. John's Head, high, steep, and craggy. Between
St. John's Head and Boxy Point is St. John's Bay, quite exposed ; in the bottom of
it is the harbour, fit for boats only. On the north side of St. John's Head are two
rocky islets, named the Gull and Shag, having at their west end several sunken rocks.

Greit Bay de L'Eau is about I5 league to the northward of St. John's Head,
In this bdjphere is good anchorage in various depths, sheltered from all winds.
The passage in is on the east side of the island, which lies in its entrance; for only very
small vessels can enter to the westward.

To the westward of Bay de L'Eau, about 3 miles north from St. John's Head, i^
Little Bay Barrysway, on the west side of which there is good anchorage for large
ships in 7, 8, or 10 iathoms ; and both wood and water can be obtained with ease.

Harbour Briton lies to the westward of Little Barrysway, and N.N.E. 1^ league from
the island of Sagona. The heads which form the entrance are high, and lie from each
other S.E. and N.W., distant about 2 miles. Near the east head is a rock above water.
The only danger in going in is a ledge of rocks, which stretch 2 cables' length from
the south point of the S.W. arm, which is more than a mile within the west head. The
only place for ships-of-war to anchor in is above this ledge, before the entrance of the
S.W. arm, in 16 or 18 fathoms, mooring nearly east and west; the bottom is very good,
and plenty of wood and water are to be obtained here. Opposite to the S.W. arm ia
the N.E. arm, or Jerseyman's Harbour, which is capable of holding a great number of
ships, setiure from all winds, in 6, 7, and 8 fathoms water: it has a i>ar at the entrance,
on which there are 3 fathoms. The mark to sail over the bar, is the point of Thomp-
son's Beech, which is the south point at the entrance into the S.W. arm, open of Jer-
seyman's Head, which is high and bluff, on the north side of the entrance into Jersey-
man's Harbour ; so soon as you open the harbour, haul up to the northward, and
anchor.

From the west end of Harbour Briton to Connaigre Head, the bearing and distance
are W. J N., 6 miles; betvv^en are Gull Island and Deadman's Bay, off which there is
a bank stretching from the shore, between 2 and 3 miles, whereon the depths vary from
34 to 4 fathoms. The sea, during storms, will sometimes break for a considerably way
out from Gull Island. .

SOUTH COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

r. — From Connaigre Head, which is high and orag|7, to Baise-
terre Point, the bearing and distance are N.W. ^ W. 7 miles ; between is Connaigre
Bay, which extends about 4 leagues inland. In the mouth of the ba^ lie the Connaigre
Rocks, above water, which may be approached very near, there being no danger but
what shows itself; the channel between them and Connaigre Head is the safest, as a
ledge of rocks extends a mile from the north shore, which renders the other channel
rather dangerous. ^^

Connaigre Harbour is nearly 5 miles above the head, within a point on the south side
of the bay ; it is ver^ small, and the depth of water is 7 fathoms. The passage in is on
the S.£. side of the island which lies before it. Abreast of this harbour, nearly in the
middle of the bay, are two islands ; and on the south side of the westernmost are some
rocks above water.

Dawson's Cove is on the N.W. side of the bay, and bears N.N.E. about 4 miles from
Connaigre Head, a:.d W.N.W. 2 miles from the west end of the westernmost (and
the greatest) island ; the anchorage is in 6 or 5 fathoms, quite exposed to south*
erly winds.

Basseterre Point, which forms the west point of Connaigre Bay, is of moderate
height, clear of wood, and, from thence to Pass Island, bold-to ; Pas's Island lies nearly
W. by N. distant 3 miles from Basseterre Point.

Pass Island, which is the north-western extremity of Fortune Bay, is a full mile in
length and narrow. It bears from the north point of Miqueon N.E. by N. 7 leagues,
and from Point May N. | E. 11^ leagues. It lies near the shore and is rather lofty.
On its south-western side there are several rocks above water, which extend fully a
mile from the island, and to the N.W. is a sunken rock about a quarter of a mile from
the island. There is a passage between this island and the main, about the length of two
cables' wide, which is frequently traversed by small vessels, that sometimes anchor there,
on a fine sandy bottom, in 6 fathoms water. The cod fishery about this part is generally
considered good and productive.

The general appearance of the land on the northern side of Fortune Bay is hilly,
rising directly from the sea, with craggy barren hills, extending 4 or 5 leagues
inland, having many rivulets and ponds, while that on the southern side of Fortune
Bay has a very difierent appearance, having less of these rugged hills, and being better
clothed with wood of a short brushy kind, giving to the country an air of greenness and
fertility.

In the night time, or in dark foggy weather, too much dependance should not be
placed on the soundings in Fortune Bay, as in many places, the water ne^^he shores,
and in the creeks and harbours, is often deeper than in the middle of the Wly itself.

BBBWITA08 BAT. — This extensive bay is bounded on the S.W. by Pass Island,
and to the northward by the islands that form the Bay of Bonne and Great Jervis Har-
bour, the width being more than 2 leagues ; and by the southern shores of Long
Island, where it begins to narrow. In sailing along the southern coast from Pass
Island, you will discover the Fox Islands, which are distant from Pass Island 10 miles.
These islands are situated opposite to the entrance to Hermitage Cove, about three-
quarters of a mile from the land, and are said to have good fishing about them. Off
tne northern Fox Island are several rocks above water, and a sunken rock lies also off
the south side of this island. To enter Hermitage Cove, you should keep between the
islands and the shore, borrowing somewhat towards the main land, where you will find
30, 32, and 37 fathoms water; here you will see the cove open, and may turn in south,
having deep water and without the least danger ; the anchorage is good, with every
convenience for fishing, and plenty of both wood and water. From hence Hermitage
Bay runs in nearly west for 12 miles, with very deep water, until you get near the head,
where it gradually lessens to 25 and 22 fathoms, and farther in to 9 fathoms ; there is
a small islet or two on the southern side, but no danger whatever.

Long Island, separating the Bay of Despair from Hermitage Bay, is of a square form,
about 8 miles long and nearly 8 leagues in circuit. The eastern passage is verv good,
but narrow, and is between the east end of Long Island and the main, named the Pas-
sage of Long Island. The west entrance into the Bay of Despair from Hermitage Bay,
is by the west end of Long Island. About half a mile from its S.W. point are two
rocks, above water, with deep water all round them.

There are four harbours on the south side of Long Island, the easternmost of which,
nan:e . Oaltaus, is but small, and lies near the south-east point of the island. The best
channel into the harbour is on thp west side of several rocky islands which lie at the
entrance, wherein are 4 fathoms, but in the harbour there are from 15 to 24 fathoms.

SOUTH COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

• The next is PicaiTe, which lies N. by E. half a league from the easternmost Fox
Island. In going in here keep near the west point, in order to avoid some sunken
rocks off the other. The anchorage is in the first cove on the east side, in 9 or 10
fathoms, sheltered from all all winds.

Round Harbour u the next, and is about two miles to the westward of Plcarre. It
u fit only for small vessels, the channel in being so narrow.

Long Island Harbour is the fourth, and lies about 2^ miles from the west end of
Long Island. This harbour has two arms, one running in to the north, the other to
the eastward; they are both very nanow, and have from 40 to 7 fathoms water: the
eastern arm is the deepest, and affords the best anchorage. The passage in is on either
side of an island which lies off the entrance, and has several rocks above water
about it.

BAT or BBBVAXit. — The entrance of the Ba^ of Despair lies between the west end
of Long Island and Great Jervis Island (which lies in the mouth of the harbour of that
name). The distance between is 1.^ mile, and mid-way no bottom is found with a line
of 280 fathoms. The Hay of Despair forms two capacious arms, one extending full 8
leagues to the north-eastward, the other about 13 miles northward. In the N.E. arm
are several arms and islands, and tolerably good anchorage in several places : in the
north arm there is very deep water, and no anchorage excepting in the small bays and
coves which lie on each side of it ; but in an arm of this bay which runs easterly, there
is a fine salmon fishery, and wood in abundance. In the N.E. arm also there are good
salmon fisheries at Little River and Conne River. All the country about this part is
mountainous and barren ; but about the head of the bay it becomes level, and has
abundance of wood, such as fir, pine, birch, witch hazel, spruce, &c.

GREAT JERVIS HARBOUR, situated at the west entrance into the Bay of De-
spair, is a safe harbour, with good anchorage in every part in from 16 to 20 fathoms,
secure from all winds, and plenty of wood and water. The passage in is on either side
of the Great Jervis Island ; but the southernmost channel is the safest, there being no'
danger in it but the shore itself. In the northern channel are several sunken rocks.
To sail in, you should bring the north point between the two rocks above water on the
starboard side, and then steer directly in ; this will carry you clear of some sunken ropks
lying on the west point of the island, which appear at low water. The entrance to t^is
harbour may be known by the east end of Great Jervis Island, which Is a high, steep,
craggy point, named Great Jervis Head, and is the northern point of the south entrance
to the harbour.

BONNE BAY lies about a league to the westward of Great Jer\-is Head, and
nearly N. by E. distant 7 miles from Pass Island. It has several islands at its entrance,
the westernmost of which is the largest and highest. The best passage in is to the
eastward of the largest island, between it and the two easternmost islands. The bay
runs in north, 4 miles, and there is no danger but what shows itself. You may go on
cither sif^e of Drake Island, which is small, and nearly in the middle of the bay ; be-
tween which, and two small islands on the west side of the bay, within Great Island,
there is anchorage in 20 or 30 fathoms ; but the best place for large ships is near the
head of the bay, in 12 or 14 fathoms, clear ground, and convenient for wood and water.
On the N. W. side of Great Island, within the two small islands, is very good anchorage,
in from 16 to 24 fathoms, secure from all winds; the entrance to this from the bay is
to the northward of the two small islands. In sailing in or out of the bay, approach
not too near the south point of Great Island, as there are some sunken rocks lying at
i of a mile from shore. A little to the westward of Bonne Bay is Mosquito Cove, a
small inlet of from 30 to 47 fathoms water.

W.N.W. 4 miles from Bonne Bay is*the entrance to the Bays of Facheux and
Dragon ; this entrance being very conspicuous at sea, the coast may here be readily
known

Facheux, which is the easternmost branch, is very easily seen to seaward ; it runs in
N.N.E., 2 leagues, and is half a mile wide at the entrance, with deep water in most
parts of it. On the west side of the bay are three coves, where ships may anchor, in from
10 to 20 fathoms. Dragon Bay lies in N.W., a league, and is nearly half a mile wide,
with 60 or 70 fathoms water, and no anchorage excepting near the head ; and then you
must lie very near the shore. One mile to the westward of Facheux is Little Hole,
with shelter for small craft; and a league to the westward of Facheux, is Richard's
Harbour, a place fit only for small vessels and'^ishing shallops, with 23 fathomi water
in it.

■ 2

4 J

r i
!

SOUTH COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

1 !

"* Hare Bat Um N. W. by W. a lei^ue from Riohwd's Harbour, which runs ia N.N.E.
about 6 miles, and is about | of a mile wide, with deep water close home to both
shores ii; ill parts of it, except about a league up on the west side, where there is good
au'borage, in from 8 to 16 fathons, with plenty of wood and water ; and a small cova
about a mik up on the east side, where there are 30 fathoms, with gradual soimdings
to the shore.

About 4| miles N.W. from Hare Bay, and 4 miles N.E. from Hare's Ears Point, is
Devil's Bay, a narrow inlet, extending a league to the northward, with deep water, and
DO anchorage until you corao dose to the head.

The Bay of Rencontre lies to the northward of Hare's Ears Point, and runs in N.W.
2 leagues. It ban deep water in most parts of it, and is near half a mile wide at the
narrowest part. The anchorage L iu 30 fathoms, above a low woody point on the
south shore, quite landlocked. Hare's Ears Point is large, with a nggfd rook
upon it, which, from some points of view, looks like the ears of a hare. It divides the
^ays of Rencontre and Chaleur, and bears N.W. i W., 17 miles, from Pass Island. Oft
this point is a fishing bank, extending a full mile from the shore, having from 20 to 36
fathoms over it

Two miles to the westward of Hare's Ears Point is the Bay of Chaleur, which runs
in about 2 leagues N.N.W. It is very narrow, and has deep water in most parts. At
the north entrance into the bay, and close to the land, is a small island, of moderate
height; and half a league within the island, on the N.E. side of the bay, is a rock
above water ; a little within this rock, on the same side, is a small cove with a sandy
beach, off which you can anchor in 28 fathoms, a cable's length from the shore.

West, near half a league from tlie Bay of Chaleur, is Bay Fran^ais, a small inlet,
lunning in N.W. ^ W., a mile, being at the entrance about \ of a mile broad, and 17
fathoms deep ; but just within are SO and 00 fathoms ; at the head are from 30 to
20 fathoms, good anchorage, and very convenient for carrying on the fishing business.

Westward, 4 miles from the Bay Frangais, on the east side of Cape la Hune, lies Oar
Bay : off the east point of the entrance to it is a low rocky islet, and in the entrance of
the bay is another, with a passage on each side of it. The bay runs in N.N.E., about
4 miles, and is one-third of a mile wide, with deep water close to both shores all the
way up ; at the head is a harbour for small vessels, with only d fathoms water. At the
west side of the entrance into the bay, is a small cove named Cul de Sac, with 3 and 4
fathoms water, and good shelter for small vessels.

CAPE LA HUNE is the southernmost point of land on this part of the coast, and
Ues in lat. 47° 31' N. and long. 66° 47' W., bearing W.N.W. i N. 8| leagues from Pass
Island, and N.N.W. | N. 10 leagues from Cape Miquelon. Its figure much resembles
a sugar-loaf; and it may also be known by the high land of La Hune, which lies a
league to the westward of it, appearing flat at the top, and may be seen from a distance
of 16 leagues.

THE PENGUIN ISLANDS lie W.S.W. f S. 10| miles from Cape la Hune, and
N.W. i N. 10 leagues from Cape Miquelon : tbey are an assemblage of barren rocks,
lying near to each other, and altogether about 2 leagues in circuit, and may be ap- ,
proached in the day-time to the distance of half a league all round. On the W.S.W'.
side of the large island, which is the highest, is a small cove, fit for shallops, and
convenient for the fisheries ; the ground about it is considered to be good for fishing.

E.S.E., 7 miles from the Penguin Islands, and S. by W. 3 leagues from Cape I&
Hune, lies the Whale Rock, on which the sea generally breaks; it is about 100 fathoma
in circuit, with 10, 12, and 14 fathoms water close-to all round it From this rook a
narrow bank extends a league to the westward, and half a league to the eastward, with,
from 24 to 58 fathoms water on it, rocky and gravelly bottom. In the channel between
the shore and this rock, and also between the shore and the Penguin Islands, are 120
and 130 fathoms of water, muddy bottom ; and there is the same depth of water at a
league without them.

LA HUNE BAY lies close to the westward of Cape la Hune ; it is about 2 league*
deep, and i of a mile wide, with deep water in most parts of it ; but there is a sunJiea
rock which lies off the west point of the entrance, nearly one-third of the channel over.
In sailing in or out of this bay, you should keep the eastern shore on board, in order
to avoid a sunken rock, which lies off the west point of the entrance into the bc^,.
nearly one-third over.

Two miles up the bay is Lance Cove,iMving anchorage in 14 and 16 fatbqms water»
good dean ground. A cable's length off the southern point of this oots is a iraaU

SOUTH COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

>■ ^

•hoal, with fe«t witer; and between it and the point there are fathome. Ta«ail
into this place keep the east point of the bay open of a red oliff point, off which is a
rook above water, until the round hill you will see over the valley of the cove, ia
brought on with the nordMiide of the valley ; you will then be above the shoal, and
may naul into the cove with safety. There is a narrow bank which stretches ouite
across the bay, from the south point of the cove to the opposite shore, whereon are from
27 to 45 fathoms.

La Hune Harbour lies half a league to the westward of Cape la Hune, and is fit only
for small vessels, and is open to westerly winds: before it lies an island near the shore.
The channel into the harbour is on the N.W. side of the island ; there is no danger

going in, and you muat anchor close up to the head, in 10 fathoms water. Tbid har>
our is well adapted for the fishery, there being good fishing ground about it, and a'
large beach quite across from the head > ' the luirbour to La Hune Bay, a space oi 800
feet, exposed to the open air, %n~' w« mlated for drying fish-

Four leagues N.W. | W. fr C!ape ' 'une, is the entrance < itle River, which
is about 1(W fathoms wide at the entrance, and 10 fothoms de^ ; a little way up there
is anchorage in 10, 8, and 7 fathoms water, g|ood ground. Between Cape la Hune and
Little River the land is tolerablv high, and forms a bay, where there are several small
islands and rooks above water, the outermost of which lie N.N.E. i £. 3 leagues firom
the Penguin Islands, and are called the Magnetic Rocks.

S. by W. i W. 7 miles from the entrance of LiUle River, and N. by W. ^ W. flrom
tfce Penguin Islands, lie the Little River Rocks, which are just above water, with Terjr
deep water all round them.

THE RAMEA ISLES which are of various eitent, both in height and circuit, lie
N.W. I N. d| leagues from the Penguin Islands, and « league from the main. They
extend east and west 5 miles, and north and south 2 miles, and have several rooks and
Inreakers about them ; but more on the south side than on the north. The easternmost
island is the largest, and is very high and hilly : the westernmost, called Columbe, is a
ramarkably high, round island, <^ small circuit, with some rooky islands and sunkoi
rocks near it.

There is a harbour for small vesscK formed by the islands which lie near Great
Ramea end the Columbe, naued Ramea Harbour, where thev may lie sheltered irora
all winds. To enter this from the westward, you should give the southern point a berth,
on account of some rocks that lie off the starboard island, all of them being above .
water ; steer E.N.S. towards the harbour, keeping as nearly mid-channel as you can :
liie passage is above a cable's length broad, and run for the anchorage in Ship Cove.
This is the second inlet on the noith'westem shore ( yen will here ride safely, on clean
ground, in 6 fathoms water. To enter from the eastward, you must keep the northern
aide of Great Ramea on board, until you are up to the west end thereof, tnen steer S.W.
into the harbour, keeping in the middle of the channel, in about 3 fathoms, and anchor
ae before directed. This harbour is very convenient for fishing vessel* ,8b in it, and also
id)out the islands, are several plaoes fit for erecting stages, and drying fish, which seem
to be well calculated for that purpose.

The Ramea Racks are two in number, close to each other, lying about south, 4 miles
from the east end of Great Ramea. W.S.W.^ a league, from tliese rocks is a small bank,
with only 6 fathoms water on it; and nearly in tne middle, between Ramea and the
Penguin Islands, is the New Rank, with from 14 to 60 fathoms water. To run upon
ihe shoalest part of this bank, bring the two Ramea Rocks on with the south-western
part of Ramea Islands, and between them and Columbe ; and the entrance to Little
River N.E. f E.

Four miles to the westward of Little River is Old Mim's Bay, which runs in N.N.E.
about 7 miles, and is nearly a mile wide : the water tbroughou tthe bay is very deep.
About 1^ mile up Uie bay, on the eastern side, is a small island, named Adam's Island,
behind which vessels can ride, if necessary, in 30 and 40 fathoms ; biit tlfe best an-
chorage ie at the head, in 14 or 16 fathoms.

MosquitoHarbourliesabouthalf a league to the westward of Old Man's Bay. It is
a snug and safe harbour, and will hold a great number of vessels in perfect security ;
but tbe Mitrance is so narrow, being only 48 fathoms in breadth, that it is difficult to
pet in or out. The land on both sides is high ; and off the southern point of entrance
M a large white rock, about a cable's length from which is a black rock, above water,,
on the southern side of which is a sunk rook, whereon the sea breaks ; from this black
fook to t^e entrance of the harbour, the cpurse ia about N J7.W. distant one-third of a

SOUTH COAST OF NEWFOUMBLANI).

mile. In ■ailiog either in or out, you should gite the black rock • email berths keev-

and water. In the narrows you will find 12 fathoms, the shores being bold^to. South
and easterly winds blow right in, northerly winds right out ; and with westerly winds
it is commonly either quite calm, or descends in irregular puffs.

Fox Island Harbour is formed by an island of the same name ; it lies about half a
league to the westward of Mosquito Harbour : between are several rodiy islands and
sunken rocks. This is a commodious harbour for small vessels, whieh may anchor in
8, 9, and 10 fathoms water. You may go in on either side of die island, and Uiere i»
ho danger but what shows itself.

White Bear Bay. — This bay lies about 2 miles to the westward of Fox Island Har-
^ hour, and N.N.E. one league from Great Bamea Island : it has several islands at ite
Ip entrance. It runs in N.E. f N. about 4 leagues, is nearly half a mile wide in the nar*
rowest part, and has deep water close to both shores in most parts, to the distance of
8 miles up ; then the ground rises at once to 9 fathoms, whence it shoalens gradually
to the head, with good anchorage. The best passage into the bay is to the eastward
of all the islands. On the S.W. side of Bear Island, which is the easternmost and
largest in the mouth of the bay, is a small harbour, running in about east, half a mile».
widi from 10 to 22 fathoms of water ; but there are several sunken rocks before its
mouth, rendering it difficult of access. At the western entrance is a high, round,
white island ; and S.W. half a mile from this island, is a black rock, above water.
The best passage into the bay, from the westward, will be to the westward of this black
rock, and between White and Bear Islands ; some of the rocks are above a mile off the
land.

At 5 or 6 miles to the westward of White Bay, and nearly north from Ramea
Columbe, are two small harbours, named Red Islana Harbours, formed by Red Island,
which lies close under the land. The westernmost is the largest and best, and hat
from 6 tc 8 fathoms water, good anchorage. In going in, keep the island close on:
board, the outer part of which is composed of steep red cliffs.

THE BUKQEO ISLES are a cluster of islands extending about 6 miles along
^hore, and forming several snug and commodious harbours. They lie about 3 leagues
N.W. by W. from Ramea Columbe. To sail into Burgeo from the eastward, the best

Jtassage is on the N.E. side of Boar Island, which is the northernmost, and lies N.N.W.
rom Ramea Columbe. S.E. by S. from this island, half a league, is a rock, uncovered
at low water, on which the sea generally breaks ; you may go on any side of this rock,
the water being deep all rouna it : so soon as you are to the N.W. of it, keep the
north side of Boar Island on board, and steer W. | N. for Grandy's Cove, the north
point of which is the first low point on your starboard bow; haul round that point, and
anchor in the cove, in 14 fathoms, and moor with a fast on shore. The best place for.
large ships to anchor in is, betwixt Grandy's Gove and a small island lying near the
west point of Boar Island, in 20 or 24 fathoms, good ground, and sheltered from all
winds. To sail into Grandy's Cove from the westward is dangerous, unleqs well ac-
quainted ; there are several safe passages in from the southward and eastward, between
tne islands, and good anchorage ; and, in bad weather, all the sunken rocks discover
themselves, and you may run in any without fear ; but the islands do not afford either
wood or water.

Wolf Bay extends inwards N.E. by E., a league ; the entrance is E.N.E., 2 miles
from Boar Island, and two miles to the westward of Red Island Harbour. The east
point of the entrance is composed of low rugged rocks, off which is a sunken """' , at a
distance of a quarter of a mile from shore, over which the sea breaks in ba. ' ather.
Near the head of the bay is tolerably good anchorage, and plenty of wood ant. water.

King's Harbour lies round the weet point of Wolf Bay, and runs in N.E. by E. f of
a mile ; before its mouth is a cluster of little islands. To sail in, keep the east point
of these islands on board, and steer N. by W. and North for the entrance of the har-
bour, anchoring under the east shore, in 9 fathoms.

HA-HA. — On the south side of the islands before King's Harbour, and nearly
north, a mile from Boar Island, is the entrance into the Ha-Ha, which runs in W.N.W.,
a mile, and is about a quarter of a mile broad, with from 20 to 10 fathoms water, and
good ground all over. Over the south point of the entrance into this harbour is a high
gresunill; and 1| cable's length from, the ^int is a sunken rook, that always showt

SOUTH COAST OP NEWFOUNDLAND.

«f

i 'A

itself. OvMT the head of the He-He ie Rioherd'i Heed, e merk for rpnning upon
Bemee^ Shoal.

About 4 milea to the westward of the Bargeo Isle* is the Great Baraohais Point
which is low, white, and rooky; and E.N.E. | E., half a league, from this point is the
west entrance into the Great Barachais, wherein is room and depth of water for small
Teasels. Between the Burgeo Isles and the Great Barachais Point, are seyeral sunken
rocks, some of which are half a league from the shore.

CONNOIRfi BAY.— N.W. |N. 4 leagues firom the Burgeo Isles, ia the east point
of the Bay of Connoire. This point is so far remarkable, that it rises with an easy
ascent to a moderate higbt, and much higher than die land within it : the west point
of the bay is low and flat, and to the westward of this are several small islands. The
bay runs in N.E. by N., about a league, from the east point to the middle head, which
lies between the two arms and is hau a league wide, with 14, 12, 10, and 8 fathomsj
dose to both shores, good anchorage, and cleat ground, but open to S.W. winds. The
The N.E. arm affords shelter for small vessels from all winds. To sail in, keep nearest
the starboard shore, and anchor before a small cove on Uiat side, near the head of the
arm, in 3^ fathoms. Towards the head of the arm on the north-weatern side, is a bank
of mud and sand, upon which a vessel may run, if necssary, and receive no damage.

THE BAY OF CUTTEAU lies about 2 leagues to the westward of Connoire, and
will admit small vessels only. Round the west point of Cutteaa is Cinq Serf, wherein
are a number of .islands, which form several small snug harbours. Bight off Cinq Serf,
about half a league from the shore, is a low rocky island, named Capt Island, west<
ward of which is the safest passage into the largest harbour : keep near this rook,
steering E.N.E. i E. towards the south-eastern shore, until you get abreast of a small
woody island ; this is the easternmost except one, and lies about a quarter of a mile
E.N.E. from a white rock in the middle of the channel ; haul short round this island,
and anchor behind it, in 7 fathoms water, here you will lie safely, sheltered from all
winds, or you may go farther up, and anchor at its head, in 4 fathoms.

Four miles to the ^'westward of the rocky island of Cinq Serf, is the harbour of
Grand Bruit, which is small but commodious, and may be known by a very high re-
markable mountain over it, half a league inland, wbion is the highest land on all the
coast : down this mountain runs a considerable brook, emptying itself, by a cascade,
into the harbour. Before the mouth of the harbour are several little islands, the largest
of which is of middling height, with three green hillocks on it. A Utile outside of
this island is a round rock, rather high above water, named the Columbe of Great
Bruit ; and a quarter of a mile to the southward of this rock is a low rock : in a direct
line between the low rock and the rocky isles of Cinq Serf, half a league from the
former, is a sunken rock, whereon the sea does not break in fine weather. The safest
passage into Grand Bruit is to the north-eastwaid of this rock, and of the islands lying
before the harbour, between them and the three islands (which are low, and lay under
the shore) ; and, after you are to the northward of the sunken rock, above mentioned,
there is no danger but what shows itself. The harbour extends N.N.E., half a mile,
and is but a quai'ter of a mile wide in the broadest part ; but it is hold-to on both sides,
and has a depth of from 4 to 7 fathoms.

To the westward of Grand Bruit, between it and La Poile Bay, lies the Bay of Rotte,
wherein are a ereat many islands and sunken rocks. The southernmost is a remarkable
high round rock named the Columbe of Rotte, which lies N.W. by W. 8| leagues from
the southernmost of the Burgeos. Between this island and Grand Brmt is a reef of
rocks, some above and some under water, but they do not lie to the southward of the
direct line between the islands.

Within the islands of Rotte there is shelter for shipping: the safest pass&ge in is to
the westward of the islands between them and Little Ireland, which lies off the east point
of La Poile Bay.

LA POILE BAY. — This bay is large and spacious, and has several commodious
harbours. It may be^known by the high land of Grand Bruit, which is only 5 miles to
the eastward of it j and likewise by the land on the east side of the bay, which rises in
remarkably hieh craggy hills. About 1| mile S.W. from its east point lies Little Ireland,
a small low ishmd, environed with sunken rocks, some of which are one third of a mile
off. North, about half a mile from Little Ireland, is a sunken rock that shows itself at;
low water : this is the only danger in going into the bay, excepting sooh as lie v«ry
near the shore.

Two miles within the west point of the bay, and N. | W. 2 miles from Little Ireland,

m :

SOUTH COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

h Tw««d8, or Great Harbour ; its south point is low, and it extends inwards W.N.W.,
a mile ; it is about 1| cable's length wide in the narrowest part, and the anchorage is
near the head of the harbour, in 18 or 20 fathoms, clear ground, and sheltered from all
winds. At hall'a mil&to the northwnrd of Great Harbour, is Little Harbour, the north
point of whivh, named Tooth's Head, ih the first high bluff head on the westsiJe of the
Day ; the harbour extends inwards W.N.W., about a mile. In sailing in, give the south
pomt a small berth. You may anchor about half-way up the harbour, in 10 fathoms
watei, lefore the stage which is on its northern side.

Gaily Boy's Harbour lies on the east side of the bay, opposite Tooth's Head ; it is
email, snug, and convenient for ships bound to the westward. The north point is high
and steep, with a white spot in the cliff, and near its southern point are some hillocks
close to the shore. To sail in or out, keep the north side on board. You must anchor
■0 soon as you are within the inner south point, in 9 or 10 fathoms, good ground, and
sheltered from all winds. One mile to the northward of Gaily Boy's Harbour, between
two sandy coves on the east side of the bay, and nearly 2 cables' length from the shore,
is a sunken rock, that just uncovers at low water.

Broad Cove is about Smiles to the northward of Tooth's Head, on the same side of
the bay. In this there is good anchorage in 12 or 14 fathoms.

The N.E. Arm lies about 2 leagues up the bay, on the eastern side ; and is a spaci-
ous, safe, and commodious harbour. In sailing in, give the low sandy point on the
6.E. side a small berth, and anchor above it, where convenient, in 10 fathoms water,
good-holding ground, sheltered from all winds, and very convenient for wood and water.

Indian Harbour and De Plate lie just within the outer west point of La Poile Bay ;
these are two small coves conveniently situated for the fishery, bu« fit only for small
vessels which may get in at high'water.

Little Ireland bears from the southernmost of the Burgeos N.W. by W. \ W., 9|
leagues; and lies nearly 11 ler.gues to the eastward of Cape Ray.

From Little Ireland to Harbour la Coue, and La Moine Bay, the course is W.N.W.
f W., 9 or 10 miles ; between lies the Bay of Garia, and several coves, fit only for
small vessels, before which there are several islands and sunken rocks scattered along
the shore, but none of them lie without the above course. In bad weather, all the
flunken rocks discover themselves. To sail into Garia Bay, you will, in coasting along
shore, discover a white head, which is the south point of an island, lying under the
land, ofi" the eastern point of the bay, and a little to the westward of two green hillocks
on the main : bring this white point N.N.E., and steer directly towards it ; keep be-
tween it and the several islands that lie to the W.S.-westward. From the white point,
the course into the bay is N. by W. : borrow toward the eastern point, which is low.
The Bay of Garia" aords plenty of timber, large enough for building ships.

The S.W. point of the entiance into Harbour la Coue, named Rose Blanche Point,
(near to which are some rocks above water,) is tolerably high, and the land near the
shore over Harbour la Coue and La Moine Bay is much higher than any other land in
the vicinity: by this they may be known. La Moine Bay extends inwards N.E. f E.,
about 4 miles, and is one-quarter of a mile broad in the narrowest part. Off the east
point are some small islands and rocks above water. In sailing in, keep the west point on
board, until you have entered the bay J then edge over towards the east shore, and
irun up to the head of the bay, where you may anchor in 10 or 11 fathoms, good ground:
here is plenty of wood and water.

To sail into Harbour la Coue, which lies at the west entrance into La Moine Bay,
steer in N.N.W., between a rock above water, in the mouth of the harbour, and tne
west shore ; so soon as you are within the rock, haul to the westward into the harbour,
and anchor in 6 or 8 fttthoms water, mooring with a hawser on shore; or you may
Bteer into the arm, which runs in N.E. by E. from the harbour, and anchor in 20
fathoms, sheltered from all winds. This has been the resort oj the small fishing ves-
sels for many years.

To the westward of Rose Blanche Point is the harbour of the same name ; it is
small and snug, and the anchorage is in 9 fathoms water. The channel into the har-
bour is between the island lying off its western point, and Rose Blanche Point ; give
the island a good berth, on account of some sunken rocks which lie on its eastern side,
and keep the west side of the small island which lies close to the point on board, an-
choring witiiin the N.E, point of this island in 9 fathoms. To enter into the_ N.W.
part of the harbour would be dangerous, if a stranger, because of its numerous island*
and rocks.

v'i y

J \

South coast of NEWFoiwDLANii.

it IS

Mill Face i« a small cove, 2 miles to the westward of Rose Blanche Point, wlMrsfn
is anchorage for small vessels in 4 fathoms. Off the west point of the cove are two
small islands, and several sunken rocks ; the passue in is to the eastward of ^keie.

Seven miles to the westward of Hose Blanche Point are the .Burnt Islands, which
lie close under the shore, and are not easily to be distin(|;uished from it ( behind these
is shelter lor small vessels. Off these islaiitls are sunken rocks, some of which are half
a mile from the shore.

Six miles to the westward of Rose Blanche Point, are Connejr Bay and Otter Bay,
both of which are rendered difficult ofjiccess by several sunken rocks oalaide the pa»>
sage, which do not show themselves in fine weather ; but when once you are aalis
within Otter Bay, there is good riding in 7, 8, and fathoms water.

DEAD ISLANDS HARBOUR.~W.N.W. J W., nearly 4 leagues trout Rosa
Blanche Point, are the Dead Islands, which lie close under the shore. In the Pasaage
to Dead Islands Harbour, between the islands and the main, is good anchorage for
shipping in 6 or 8 fathoms, sheltered from all winds ; but it is very dangerous of access
to strangers, as there are several sunken rooks in boUi the east and west entrances.
The eastern entrance can be known by a remarkable white spot on one of the
islands ; bring this spot to bear N. by W., and steer in for it, keeping the starboard
rocks on board, and leave the white spotted island on your port side. The western Ci-
trance may be recognised by a high point on the main, a little to the westwacd it tan
islands, on the western part of wbioh point is a green hillock ; keep this point close
on board, until you get within a little round rock, near to the westernmost island, at
the eastern point of entrance; then haul over to the eastward for the great island,
distinguished by a high hill, and steer £. f N. keeping the bd'ore-ttentiooed litUe rock
in siffht.

PORT AUX ^SQUE.— From the Dead Isles to Port auz BMque, the course and
distance are W.N.W. about 4 miles ; between lie several small islands close under the
shore, and there are sunken rooks, some of which are half a mile from the shore.
Fort aux Basque is a small commodious harbour, which lies about 2^ leagues to the
eastward of Cape liay. To fall in with it, bring the Sugar-Loaf Hill over Cape Ray
to bear N.N. W. | W., or the west end of the Table Mountain NJi.W. Steer in
for the land with either of these marks, and you will fall directly in with the harbour:
the S.W. point, named Point Blanche, is of a moderate height,' and of white appear-
ances ; but the N.£. poinVis low and flat, and has, close to it, a black rock above water.
In order to avoid the outer shoal, on which are 3 fathoms, and wbioh lies E.S.E., three-
quarters of a mile, from Point Blanche, keep the said point on board, end bring tho
flag-staff which is on the hill over the west side of the head of the harbour, on with the
S.W. point of Road Island : that direction will lead you in the middle of the channel,
between the east and west rocks, the former of which always show themselves, and
these you leave on your starboard hand : continue this course up to Road Itiland, and
keep the west point on board, in order to avoid the Frying-Piiai_RodL« which stretches
out from a cove on the west shore, opposite the island.

So soon as you are above the island, haul to the KN.E., and anchor between it
and Harbour Island wherever you please, in 9 or 10 fathoms, good ground, and shel-
tered from all winds ; this is named the Road, or Outer Harbour, and is the only an-
choring place for men-of-war, or ships drawing a great depth of water, but small ves-
sels always lie up in the Inner Harbour. To sail into it, run in between the west shore
and the S.W. end of Harbour Island, ana anchor behind the said island, in 3 or 4
fathoms. In some parts of this harbour ships can lay their broadtiides so near to the shore
as to reach it with a plank. This place has been f^quented by fishermen for mary
years; it is well situated for their purposes, and is capable of most excellent accommo-
dations. A mile to the eastward of Basque is Little Bay.

GRAND BAY lies about 2 miles to ine westward of Port aux Basque ; there aro
several small islands and rocks in and before it, the outermost of which are not above
a quarter of a mile from the shore ; on these the sea generally breaks. It is only fit
for small vessels.

From Port aux Basque to Point Eorag^e, the beturing and distance are W.N.W.,
about a league, and thence to Cape Kay, N.N.W., nearly 1| league. Point £nrag6e
is low ; off It, and to the eastward of it, are some sunken rocks, a mile from the shore,
on which the sea breaks.

OAMs WkT is the S.W. extremity of Newfoundland, situated in latitude 4T 37' IfT.,
and lon^ude 59^ 23' W. The land of the cape is very remurkable ; near the shore

flt

WEST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

!: i

it ii low, but 8 milet inland ii » Tery high table mountain, which riiei almoit perpen-
dicular from the low land, and AppeAn to be quite flat at the top, excepting a amall
hillock on the S.W. point of it. Tnii land may be seen, in dear westher, from the
dlfitance ot 16 or 18 leagues. Close to the foot of the table mountain, between it and
the pointof the oape, is high round hill, resembling a sugar-loaf, (named the Su^r-
Loaf of Cape Ray,) whose summit is a little lower than that of the table mountain i
and to the northward of this hill, under the table mountain, are two other conical hills,
resembling sugar-loaves, which are not so high as the former ; one or other of these
ingar-loaf hills are, from ail points of view, seen detached from the table moun-
tain.

There is a sandy bay between Cape Ray and Point EnragAe, wherein ships ipay
anchor with the winds from N.N.W. to East, but they should be cautious not to be
surprised there with S.W. winds, which blow directly in, and cause a great sea. The
nonnd is not the best for holding, being fine sand. Towards the east side of this bay
is a small ledge of rocks, a rnile from shore, on which the sea does not break in
^iie weather. The best place for large ships to anchor in is, to brins the point of the
oape N.W., and the high white sand-hill in the bottom of the bay N!e., in 10 fathoms
water. Small vessels may lie farther in. Be careAil not to run so far to the eastward
as to bring the end of the table mountain on with the sand-hill in the bottom of the
bav, by wnich means the ledge of rocks, before mentioned, will be avoided.

a.W. i W., nearly a mile From the point of the cape, is a small ledge of rocks,
named the Cape Kocks, whereon the sea always breaks ; and one mile to the north-
ward of the cap<:i, close under the land, is a low rocky island. There is a channel be-
tween the ledtfe and the cape, with 14 and \6 fathoms water; and also between it and
the island with 4 and ff fatnoms ; but the tides, which run here with great rapidity,
render it unsafe for shipping. #

The soundings, under 100 fathoms, do not extend aboTe a league from the land to
the southward and eastward of the cape, nor to the westward and northward of it, except
on a bank, which lies off Port aux Basque, between 2 and 3 leagues from the land,
whereon are from 70 to 100 fathoms, good fishinff ground. S.E. | S., about 13 leagues
from Port aux Basque, in the latitude of 47° 14' N., is said to be a bank, whereon are
70 fathoms.

THE TIDES. — Between Cape Chapeau Rouge and Cape Ray, in all the bays, &c.,
the tide generally flows til' 9 o'clock, on full and change, ailH its perpendicular rise is
about 7 or 8 feet on springs; but it must be observed, that the tides are everywhere
influenced by the winds and weather. On the coast, between Cape Ciiapeau Kouge
and St. Pierre, the current sets generally to the S.W. On the south side of Fortune Bay it
sets to the eastward, and on the north side to the westward. Between Cape La Hune
and Cape Ray, the flood sets to the westward in the offing, very irregularly ; but gene-
rally 2 or 3 hours after it is hish water by the shore. The tide, or current, is inconsi-
derable, excepting near Cape Kay, where it is strong, and at times sets quite contrary
to what might be expected from the common course of the tides, and much stronger at
one time than at another : these irregularities seem to depend chiefly on the winoii.

WEST COAST OP NEWFOUNDLAND

CAPE RAY TO CAPE NOE^f AN.

Cape Avguille, bearing N. ) E., 17 or 18 miles from Cape Ray, is the northernmost

1>oint of land you can see, after passing to the westward of Cape Ray ; it is high table
and, and covered with wood in the country above it. Between the high land ol the
two capes the coast is low, and the shore forms a bay, wherein are the great and little
riven of Cod Roy ; the northernmost is the great river, which has a bar-harbour fit to

WEST COAST OP NEWFOUNDLAND.

ftdmit tmmIi of 8 or 10 fe«t draucht only at bish wattr. The Bhora may b« a»>

1>roaeh«d between the two capea to naif a league, there being no danger to far off. It
• a good lalmon fiahery, and ii adapted for building amall Teuela and boat*, there
being timber in abundance,

The Island of Cod Hoy lies 1} or 2 miles to the southward of Cape Auguille, close
under the high land, and is a low, flat, green island, of nearly 2 miles in compass, in
the shape of a horse-shoe, forming, between it and the main, a small snug harbour for
Yessels of 10 or 12 feet draught; the safest entrance to it is from the southward.

Cod Ro^ Road lies south-eastward from the island, and affords good anchorage for
shipping, in 8, 7, or 6 fathoms, on a clay bottom. With the south point of the uland
bearing about W.N.W., and the point of the beach on the inside of the k^jj^d, at the
south entrance into the harbour, on with a point on the main to the northward of the
island, you will lie in 7 fathoms, and nearly half a mile from the shore. A league to
the southward of Cod Roy Island is a high bluff point, named Stormy Point, off which
a shoal stretches out a full half mile ; this point covers the road from the S.S.E.
winds, and there is good anchorage all along tne shore, between it and the island.

■V. oaosaa'a bat.-— From Cape Auguille to Cape St. Oeorgn the course and
distance are N.N.E. f E., nearly 12 leagues : these two fapes forn; the Bay of St.
George, which extends inwards E.N.E., 18 leagues from the former, and E.S.E. 11
leagues from the latter. At the head of this bay, on the south side, round a low point
of umd, is a harbour, with ancnorage in 8, 10, or 12 fathoms water. The rive bt.
George empties itself into the head of this bay, but it is not navigable for an' 'hing
but TOats, and it appears to be fast filling up wilh sand. On the north side of the bay,
before the isthmus of Port-au-Port, is good anchorage, in 7 or 8 fathoms, with north-
erly winds : from off this place a fishing-bank stretches two-thirds across the bay, with
from 7 to 19 fathoms water on it, dark sandy bottom.

Cape St. George lies in latitude 48° 28' north, and may be readily known, io<. > >nly
by its being the north point of the Bay of St. George, but also by the steep ^lifiti on
the north part of it, which rise per|)endicularly from the sea to a considerable height ;
and bv Red Island, which lies 6 miles to the north-eastward of the cape, and half a
mile from the shore. This island is about 1| mile in length, and of a miadling height i
the steep cliffs around it are of a reddish colour. There is anchorage with off-snore
winds under the N.E. end of the island, before a sandy cove on the main, which liea
just to the northward of the steep cliffs, in 12 or 14 fathoms ; you will th* re ride»
covered from the S.W.- winds by the island, and from the southerly and easterly winda
by the main land ; but there is no shelter whatever with winds from the N. or N.W.,
although this place was formerly much resorted to by vessels in the fishing-trade.

From abreast of Red Island, distant 4 or 5 miles, to Long Point, at the entrance
into the Bay of Port-au-Port, the bearing and distance are £. by N., 7 or 8 leagues ;
from Red Island to Guernsey Island, in the mouth of the Bay of Islands, E.N.E, nearly
16 leagued ; from Red Island to Cape St. Gregory, N.E. by £., ^ F full 20 leagues }
and from Red Island to Point Rich, which is tne north point lif -.ngrenachoix Bay,
N.E. by E., 49 leagues.

roWLT-AJr-TOKV. — The land between Red Island and the entrance into Port-au-
Fort is rather low, with sandy beaches, except one remarVobie high hillock, named
Round Head, close to the shore, about 2 leagues to the E.N.-Eastward of Red Island;
but up the country, over Port-au-Port, are high lands ; and if you are 3 or 4 leagues
off at sea, you cannot discern the long point of land which forms the bay. This bay ia
capacious, being about 5 miles broad at the entrance, and 4 leagues deep, running in
to the south and south-westward, with good unchorage in most parts of it.

Long Point is the west point of the bay ; it is low and rocky, and a ledge of rocks
exten(U from it E.N.E., nearlv a mile. s.E. by E. f £., 4 miles from Long Point, and
half a league from the east shore, lies Fox Island, which is small, but of middling
height. From the north end of this island a shoal stretches out nearly 2 miles to the
N.N.-Eastward, named the Fox's Tail ; and, nearly in the middle of the bay, between
Fox Island and the west shore, lies the Middle Ground, on one place of which, near
the S.W. end, there are not above 3 or 4 feet water. From the head of the bay, pro-
jecting out into the middle of it, is a low point, named Middle Point, off which, ex-
tending 2 miles N.K by N., is a shoal spit, part of which dries at low water ; this
Middle Point divides the bay into two parts, named East and West Bays.

From the head of the East Bay over to the Bay of St. George, the distance is *
large quarter of a mile ; this isthmus is vwy low, and has a pond in the middle of it.

t I

k-^

lit

n I

West coast op Newfoundland.

into which the sea frequenty dashes over, especially at high tides, and with galas of
wind from the southward. On the east side of it is a tolerably high mountain, rising
directly from the isthmus, and flat at top : to the northward of this, and at about 6
miles distance from the isthmus, is a conspicuous valley or tioUow, hereafter to be used
as a mark. N.E. by E. | E., above 2 leagues from Long Point, and half a league
from the shore, lies Shag Island, which appears at a distance like a high rock, and is
easily to be distinguished from the main ; and W.N.W., about a league from it, lies
the middle of Long Ledge, which is a narrow ledge of rocks, stretching E.N.E. and
W.S.W., about 4 miles; the eastern part of them is above water, and the channel into
the bay of Port-au-Port, between the west end of this ledge and the reef which stretches
off from thlNrest point of the bav, is a league wide.

In sailing in, if coming from the south-westward, advance no nearer to the Long
Point of the bay than 1| mile, until you have brought the valley in the side of the
mountain before mentioned, (on the east side of the isthmus) over the east end of Fox
Island, or to the eastward of it, which will then bear south a little easterly ; you will
then be clear of the Long Point Keef, and may haul into the bay with safety ; but, if
coming from the N.E. without the Long Ledge, or turning into the bay in order to keep
clear of the S.W. end of Ltnig Ledge, bring the isthmus, or the loot of the mountain
(which is on the east side of the isthmus), 'open to the westward of Fox Island, nearly
twice the breadth of the island, and it will lead you into the bay, clear of Long Ledge;
ana when Shag Island is brought on with the foot of the high land on the south side
of Coal Kiver, bearing then £. f S., you will be within the Long Ledge. There is also
a safe passage into the bay, between the Long Ledge and the main, on either side of
Shag Island, and taking care to avoid a small shoaX of 2^ fathoms, which lies W. by
N., a mile from the island.

To sail up into the West Bay and Head Harbour, keep the western shore on board;
this shore is bold-to. In turning between it and the Middle Ground, stand no nearer
to the Middle than into 8 fathoms ; but p ou may stand to the spit of the Middle Point
into 6 or 6 fathoms. The anchorage in West Bay is in about 8 fathoms, and in
Head Harbour in about 5 fathoms. The West Koad lies before a high stone beach,
about 2 miles south-westward of Long Point, where you may lie very secure from
westerly and N.W. winds, in about 10 or 12 fathoms water; this beach is steep-to, and
forms an excellent place for landing and drying fish. There is a good place at the
northern end of Fox's Island for the same purpose. The whole bay and the adjacent
coasts abound with cod, anr^ extensive fishing banks lie all along the coasts.

The East Road lies between Fox Island and the east shore. To sail up to it, you
should keep the high bluff head, which is about a league to the E.N.E. of the island,
bearing to the southward of S.E. by £. ^ E., until the isthmus is brought to the
eastward of Fox Island ; you will then be within the shoal named the Fox's Tail, and
may haul to the southward, and anchor anywhere between the island the main, in from
10 to 18 fathoms.

To sail up the East Bay, pass between the island and the east shore ; and after you
are above the island, come no nearer to the main than half a mile, until you are
abreast of a bluff point above the island, named Koad Point, junt above which is the
best anchorage with i^.E. winds, in about 12 fathoms water. To sail up the East Bay
between the Middle Ground and the Fox's Tail, bring the said bluff point on with the
S.W. point of Fox Island ; this mark will lead you up in the fairway between the two
shoals. Give the island a berth, ard anchor as before directed, in from 8 to 12 fathoms
water.

BAT or XSitAllSB. — From the Long Point at the entrance of Port-au-Port to the
Bay of h lands, the bearing and disiunce are N.IC. by E. | E., 8 leagues. Be careful to
avoid the Lon^ Ledge. The land between is of considerable height, rising in craggy bar-
ren hills, directly from the shore. The Bay of Islands may be known by the many islands
in the mouth of it, particularly th^ three named Guernsey, Tweed, and Pearl, which
are nearly of equal height with the land on the main. If you are bound for Lark ,or
York Harbours, which lie on the S.W. side of the bey, and are coming from the south-
ward, run in between Guernsey Island and ihe South Head, both of which are bold-to;
but with southerly and S.W. winds approach not too near the South Head, lest calma
and sudden gusts of wind should proceed from the high land, under which you can-
not anchor with safety. There are several channels formed by the different islands,
through which you may sail in or out of the bay, there being no danger but what
shows itself, excepting a small ledge of rocks, wniefa lie half a mile nortb^eMtwiurd

WEST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

[alM of
, ruing
about 6
be vised
i league
I, anau
n it, lies
<.E. and
mel into
Btietchet

he Long

de of the ;.

id of Fox

you •will
y ; but, if

er to keep
mountain
nd, nearly
ng Ledjje;
south side
lere is o\so
her side of
lies W. by

J on board ;
d no nearer
iddle Point
ms, and in
lone beach, ^

secure from
ileep-to, and
place at the
the adjacent

.8.

up to it, you
ot the island,
■ought to the
)x's Tail, and
nain»i>i ^^^^

and after you

until you are

which is the

the East Bay

It on wilh ^^^
tween the two
to 12 fathoms

au-Port to the
Be careful to
5 in craggy bM-
le many islanoa
id Pearl, which
ind for Lark, or
from the south-
icharebold-to}
lead, lest calm*
which you can-
iiffeient islands,
ianger but what
'^noctb^«it.'»»^*

from the northern Shag Rock, and in a line with the two Shag Rocks in one. If you
bring the south Shag Rock open on either side of the north Shag Rook, you will go
dear to the eastward or westward of the ledge. The safest passage into this bay from
the northward, is between the two Shag Rocks, and then between Tweed and Pearl
Islands.

From Quemsey Island to Tortoise Head, which is the north point of York Harbour,
and the S.E. point of Lark Haroour, the course and distance are nearly S. by W. | W.,
miles. Lark Harbour extends inwards W.S.W., nearly 2 miles, and is one-third of
a mile broad in the entrance, which is the narrowest part. In sailing into it with
a large ship, keep the port shore on board, and anchor with a low point on the star-
boara side, bearing W.M.W., N.N.W., or N.N.K, and you will ride in 6 or 7 fathoms
water, secure from all winds.

York Harbour lies W.S.W., nearly a league, from Tortoise Head. There is good
turning room between the Head and Oovernor's Island, wliich lies before the harbour;
but you must avoid a shoal which runs off from a low beach point on the west end bf Go-^
vernor's Island, named Sword Point. There is also a shoal which spits off from the next
point of Oovernur's Island, which must also be avoided : Tortoise Head just touching
Sword Point will lead clear of it. In sailing in, give Sword Point a berth ; passing
which, the best anchoring ground is in 10 fathoms, along a sandy beach on the main,
with Tortoise Head open of Sword Point. West and north-westerly winds blow here
with great violence.

Harbour Island lies at the entrance of the River Humber, and S. by E. f E., 7 miles,
from Guernsey Island ; at its 8. W. point is Wood's Harbour, which is unfit for shipping.
The River Humber, at about d leagues within the entrance, becomes narrow, and the.
stream is so rapid in some places, for about 4 leagues up, to a lake, that it is
with great difficulty even a boat can stem the current. The banks of this river
are well clothed with timber, and formerly a great salmon fishery was carried oa
here.

The North and South Arms are both long inlets, with very deep water up to their
heads. On the east side of Eagle Island, between the North and South Arms, is an-,
ohorage in 8, 10, or 12 fathoms water. Under the north side of Harbour Island also
is good anchorage with S.W. winds ; and opposite to the S.E. end of Harbour Island,
on the south side of the bay, is Frenchman s Cove, wherein is good anchorage in from
20 to 12 fathoms.

The Bay of Islands was formerly much frequented by vessels in the cod fishery, and
stages were erected at Small Bay, which lies a little on the outside of South Head ;
and the large beach on Sword Point, in Governor's Island, is an excellent place for
drying the fish.

From the north Shag Rock to Cape St. Gregory the course and distance are nearly
N.E. 8 miles ; and thence 13 or 14 miles, on a similar bearing, will carry you to the
entrance of Bonne Bay. The land near the shore, from the north Shag Ilock to Cape
St. Gregory is low, along which lie sunken rocks, a quarter of a mile from the shore t
but a very little way inland it rises into a high mountain, terminating at the top in round
hills.

CAPE ST. GREGORY is high, and between it and Bonne Bay the land rises directly
from the sea-shore to a considerable height. It is the most northerly land seen when
sailing along shore between Red Island and the Bay of Islands.

BONUS BAT. — ^This bay may be known, at the distance of 4 or 5 leagues, by the land
about it ; all that on the S.W. side of the bay being very high and hilly, and that on the
N.E. side, and thence along the sea-coast to the northward, being low and flat ; but at
about one league inland, is a riDge of mountains, which run parallel with the sea-coast.
Over the south side of the bay is a very high mountain, terminating at the top in a re-
markable round bill, very conspicuous when you are to the northward of the bay.
This bay extends inwards 8.E., nearly 2 leagues, then branches into two arms, one of
which runs in to the southward, and the other to the eastward. The southern arm af-
fords the best anchorage ; small vesssels should ride just above a low woody point at
the entrance into this arm, on the starboard side, before a sandy beach, in 8 or 10 fa-
thoms water, about a cable's length from the shore. There is no other anchorage in less
than 30 or 40 fathoms, excepting at the head of the arm, where there are from
25 to 20 fathoms water. In sailing into the east arm, keep the starboard shore on
board; and a little way round a point at the entrance will be found a small cove, with
good anphwrage in 17 to 20 fatl^oms, but you must moor to the shore.

{p'

lit

V- 'ts

WEST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

There is a snug cove also close within the north point, with anchorage tn 6 or' 7 fathomi
water. In sailing in or out of Bonne Bay, with W.S.W. winds, come not near the w«a-
ther shore, lest you should happen to be becalmed, or should meet with heavy gusts of
wind ; as the depth of water is too great to admit of your anchoring.

At 10 miles to the northward of Bonne Bay is Martin Point, htgh and white; off
which, about three-quarters of a mile, is a small ledge o^^rocks, whereon the sea breaks.
Broom Point is low and white, and lies about a league to the northward of Martin
Point; about half a mile W.S.W. from it lies a sunken rock that seldom shows itself.
On the north side of Broom Point lies the Bay of St. Paul, wherein vessels may anchor
with off-shore winds : but it is quite exposed to the sea.

COW HEAD lies about 3 miles to the northward of the Bay oi 5t. raui| tuls is a
promontory, which has the appearance of an island, being joined to the main only by
a very low and narrow neck or land. About three-quarters of a mile off this head lies
Steeripg Island, which is low and rocky, and is the only island on the coast between
the Bay of Islands and Point Rich. Cow Cove lies on the south side of Cow Head,
and ships may lie there, in from 7 to 10 fathoms, sheltered from northerly and easterly
winds. Shallow Bay lies on the north side of Cow Head, and has water sufficient for
small vessels. At the N.E. side of the entrance is a cluster of rocky islands, extending
E.N.E. and W.S.W. ; and at the W.S.W. side are two sunken rocks close to each
other, which generally show themselves ; they lie a cable's length from the shore, and
there is a channel into the bay on either side of them. Steering Island lies right be-
fore this bay, and you may pass it on either side ; but come not too near its N^E. end,
as there are some sunken rocks extending from it. This is considered the best situated
for a fishery on all the coast, and the ground about its environs *are eminently
productive.

moBBiVAOSonc bat. — Point Rich, the northern point of Ingrenachoix Bay, is
distant about 50 miles, N.E. | E., from Steering Island ; all the way between Shallow
Bay and the south point of Ingrenachoix Bay, the coast forms nearly a straight line
without creek; cove, or shelter from seaward, though vessels may here and there anchor,
with land winds.

About 6 leagues from Steering Island, ^ a mile inland, stands Portland Hill, so
named from its resemblance to the Bill of Portland in the English Channel; the ap-
pearance of this hill continues the same from whatever point it is viewed.

PORT SAUNDERS AND HAWKES HARBOUR.— These are situated within,
and to the eastward of Ingrenachoix Bay.

Keppel Island lies at the entrance of Ingrenachoix, and though at a distance it ap-
pearsjoined to the main land, ]^et theie is a passage on' either side of it. In sailing
into Port Saunders, the island will be left on the starboard side, and when you are | a
mile within the entrance, anchor in 12 or 14 fathoms. Vessels proceeding to the head
of the harbour, must keep the port shore on board, to avoid a ledge of rocks that lies
near the mid-channel. Port Saunders is considered the best harbour for vessels bound
to the southward.

The entrance to Hawkes Harbour is to the southward of Keppel Island. The star-
board shore is shoal, and has a sand bank, which stretches along the land, running out
two-thirds of the passage over, and great par^ of which dries at low water. The course
in is E.S.E., Heeping nearer the island than the main, until the eastern end of the
former, a low sandy beach, bears N.E. by N. or N.N.E. ; then steer S.S.E. i E. for a
small island you will see situated farther up the harbour ; keeping the port shore well
on board, run direct for this island, and when you have brought the point at the south
entrance of the harbour to bear N.N.E.^ N., and are at the S.S.E. point of a bay on
the starboard side of the harbour, you will then be beyolnd the shoal ground, and may
ainchor in 12 fathoms water; or else run within half a mile of the small island, and
anchor there, which will be more convenient for both wood and water. This is the best
harbour for ships bound to the northward. The land round about these harbours is
generally low, and covered with wood. You may occasionally anchor outside these,
in the Bay of Ingrenachoix, accoiding as you find the prevailing winds.

POINT RICH, in lat. 50° 40' 10" N., is the south-western point of a peninsula, which
is almost surrounded by the sea, being everywhere of moderate height, and project-
ing farther to seaward than any other land on this side of Newfoundland, the coast
from thence, each way, taking an inward direction.

Rounding Point Rich, on its northern side, you will meet with Port au Choix,
small, but yet capable of admitting a ship of burthen, mooring head and stem ; to sail

WEST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

r fathomt
the w«a-
gusts of

irhite; off
!a breaks.
>f Martin
ows itself,
ay anchor

5 tliiu iS *

in only by
9 head lies .
t between
3ow Head,
nd easterly
ifficient for
, extenduig
Dse to each
shore, and
1 right be-
i n!E. end,
est situated
eminently

^oix Bay, is
■en Shallow
(traight line
[lere anchor,

and Hill, so
ael; the ap-

ated within,

tanee it ap-
In sailing
you are | a
; to the head
icks that lies
ressels bound

1. The star-
running out

The course
n end of the
E. i E. for a
jrt shore well
t at the south
It of a bay on
und, and may
I island, and
his is the best

harbours is
)utside these,

insula, which

and project-

nd, the coast

ort au Choix,
stem ; to tail

in you should keep the starboard shore on board, and anchor just above a small island
lying in the midale of the harbour. In this place, and also in Boat Cove, which
lies a little to the north-eastward, there are several stages and places for drying fish.

Old Port au Choix lies to the eastward of Boat Cove ; it is a small but safe harbour,
having at its entrance an island, named Harbour Island, and on its western side some
rocks, both above and under water. There is also another island lying E.N.E.
I N., distant nearly a mile from Harbour Island, about which are several rocks, son>e
of which stretch out towards Harbour Island, and render the passage very narrow be-
tween them. There are 4, 6, 6, and 7 fathoms water between Savage Island and the
main, and 4 and 5 fathoms between Savage Island Rocks and Haroour Island, uid
uearly the same depth between Harbour Island and the western shore.

To sail into Old Fort au Choix, on the western side of Harbour Island, you must
keep the island close on board ; but to go in on the eastern side of the island, give the
north-eastern point of the island a berth, and having well entered, you may anchor any-
where on the port side of the harbour, only avoiding the starboard side, for a shoal of
sand and mud runs all along it.

8AT or 8T. JOBit. — ^This is an open and extensive bay, bounded by Point Rich to
the southward and Point Ferolle to the northward, having several islands wi^n it,
and some sunken rocks. The largest of these islands is St. John's, about 2} miles in
length, and 1| broad, and lies E.N.E. distant 8^ miles from Point Rich; on its south-
western side is a small harbour, well calculated for the cod-fishery, but too much exposed
for shipping, as south-westerly winds commonly drive in a heavy sea. On the south-
eastern, or inner side of the island, and between it and One Head Island, vessels may
lie much more secure, in 14 or 16 fathoms water, and sheltered from most winds; and
this is considered to be the only safe anchorage in the whole bay. West from St John's
Island, a large mile, is Flat Island, having a rock above water at its southern end. The
channel between St. John's and Flat Island has from 13 to 25 fathoms in it, and they
are both bold-to. The Twin Islands lie N.E. by N. from Flat Island, distant a league,
and have no danger about them. To the westward of the Twins are several scattered
rocks above water, named the Bay Islands : they have deep water around them, but no
anchorage. At the bottom of the bay the land is very high, and there is the little river
of Castors, the entrance to which is dangerous and shallow, therefore seldom frequented.
From the northern point of this bay a rocky shoal extends all the way to Point Ferolle,
stretching out 3 miles from the shore.

POINT FEROLLE lies N.E. by E. i E. from Point Rich, distant 22 miles; it is of
moderate height, and Joined to the main by a neck of land, which divides the Bay of
St. John's from New Ferolle Bay, making it appear like an island when seen from a
distance. Its northern shore is bold-to ; and this part of the coast will easily be known
by the adjacent table land of St. John's, the west end of which mountain lies from the
middle of Ferolle Point S. by W., and its eastern end S.E. % S.

New Ferolle Bay is a small cove lying to the eastward of the point, and is quite flat
all over, there being not more than 2 and 3 fathoms at any part. It is quite open to
the northerly winds, and has a stage on each side of it, with plenty of room for others.

ST. MARGARET'S BAY is large, and has several islands within it, also various
inlets or coves, affording good anchorage, particularly on its western side, which is the
best situation for ships, being most clear of danger, and convenient for wooding and
watering. On its banks are spruce and fir trees in plenty, and many rivulets of fresh
water. Dog Island is to the eastward of Point Ferolle full 3 miles, and only divided from
the main at high water: it is higher than any land near it, which gives it the
appearance, when seen from the eastward, of an island situated at some distance from
the main.

OLD FEROLLE. — Ferolle Island lies about 5 miles to the eastward of Dog Island.
This island lies parallel to the shore, and forms the harbour of Old Ferolle, which is
very good and safe : the best entrance to it is at the S.W. end of the island, passing to
the southward of a small island in the entrance, which is bold-to. As soon as you are
within it, haul up E.N.E., and anchor under the S.W. end of Ferolle Island, in 8 or 9
fathoms, good ground, quite land-locked. There is also good anchorage anywhere
along the inside of the island, and a good channel up to the N.E. end thereof. There
are some little islands lying at the N.E. end of Ferolle Island ; and on the outside are
some ledges of rocks, a small distance off.

Bay of St. Genevieve. — From the north end of Ferolle Island to St. Genevieve
Head the course is E.N.E. ^ miles; and thence to the west end of Currant island itii

(

;.l » ■

WEST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

north-ewtward, about 3 mile*. There are several small islands lying in aad before this
bay, onlv two of which are of any considerable extent The before-mentioned Currant Is-
land is tne northernmost of the two, and the largest: it is of a moderate height, and
when you are to the E.N.E. of it, the western point will appear bluff, but not high ;
and when you are to Uie westward of it, it appears flat and white. The other, named
Gooseberry Island, lies nearly a mUe to the southward of it, and its west point bears froni
tile west point of Currant Island S.S.W. | W. nearly a mile. Gooseberry Island has a
cross on its S.W. end, from which point stretches out a ledge of rocks near half a mile
to the southward; there is also a shoal about half a mile to the W.S.W. from the S.W,
point of Currant Island. The best channel into this bay is to the southward of these
islands, between the rocks which stretch off them and a small island lying S.S.W.
from them (which island lies near the south shore). In this channel, which is very nar-
row, there are not less than 5 fathoms at low water; and the course in isE. by 8. south-
erly, until you come the length of the before-mentioned island : passing which, you
should haul to the southward, and brin|^ St. Genevieve Head between the small island
and the main, in order to avoid the Middle Bank. You may either anchor behind the
small island, in 5 or 6 fathoms water, or proceed farther, with the said mark on, until
the S.W. arm is open, and anchor in uie middle of the bay, in7 or 8 fathoms water.
Here are wood ana water to be procured. There is tolerable good anchoring in most
parts of the bay ; but the snuggest place is the S.W. arm ; the entrance to it is narrow, '
and has only 4 fathoms at low water. In coming into the bay, if you get out of the
channel on either side, you will shoalen your water immediately to 3 or 2 fathoms.

Bay of St. Barbe. — From the west end of Currant Island to St. Barbe Point it is E .
by N., 2^ miles, and from St. Barbe Point to Anchor Point it is N.N.E., nearly 1^ mile.
Between them lies the Bay of St. Barbe ; it runs in S. by E. about 2 miles from Anchor
Point. To sail in, give Anchor Point, end all the east side of the bay, a food berth,
to avoid the sunken rocks wbioh lie along that shore ; you must be well in before
vou ean discover the entrance into the harbour, which is but narrow; then steer south,
keeping in the. middle of the channel, and anchor as you are within the two points,
in a small cove, on the west side, in 5 fathoms water, on sand and mud, quite land-
looked. Near this place branch out two arms, or rivers, one named the South, and the
other the East ; the latter has 3 fathoms a good way up, but the former is shoal. Be-
tween the S.W. point of the bay^ and west point of the harbour is a cove, wherein are
sunken rocks, which lie a little without the line of the two points. In the open bay
are 7, 8, or 9 fathoms; but the N.W. winds cause a heavy sea to fall in here, which
renders it unsafe.

From Anchor Point to the extremity of the Seal Islands, the course is N.E. | E., a
league* Off Anchor Point a ledge stretches itself W. by S. about one-thira of a mile.
There are no other dangers between it and the Seal Islands but what lie very near the
shorf. The Seal Island are white and rocky, and must be approached with care on
their- i(i;rth and western sides, because there are some sunken rocks near them.

From the N.W. Seal Island to the N.W. extremity of Flour Ledge, it is N.N.E.
nearly 2 miles; part of this ledge appears at low water, and there are 10 fathoms close
on its ttff-side.

From the north part of Flour Ledge to Qrenville Ledge, it is about 1§ mile E. by
S., and Grenville Ledge lies about two-thirds of a mile \V. by N. from the eastern
point of Mistaken Cove ; between which and Seal Islands lies also Nameless Cove and
Flour Cove, neither of which are fit for ships.

SAVAGE COVE. — Close to the eastward of Mistaken Cove is Savage Cove, which
has a little island in its entrance, and is only fit for small vessels and boats. Sandy
Bay lies 1 lailes eastward from Savage Cove, where small vessels may ride in 3 or 4
fathoms water, with the wind from E. to S.W.

About E.N.E., 5 lai^e miles from Samly Bay, is Greenlet Island ; between them, at 3
qiiles distance, W. | S., from Greenlet Island, is the north extremity of Double Ledge,
which extends nearly two-thirds of a mile from the shore, and has only 8 or 9 feet
water on it. Greenlet Island lies about three-quarters of a mile from the main, is two-
thirds of a mile in length, very low and narrow, and agreeable in colour to the name
it bears ; from the east end of it a ledge of rocks extends three-fourths of a mile to
the eastward, on which the sea breaks in bad weather. There are 4 or 5 fathoms
water in the channel between the island and the main, where ships may anchor, if ne-
cessary. To go in from the westward, keep the island close on board for the deepest
^ater, which is 4 fathoms ; and going in from the eastward, keep the main on board.

WEST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

e thU

t, and
high;
lamed
sfrom
I has a
a mile

5S.W,

I these
8.S.W.
ry nar-
, south-
oh, you
i island
lind the
»n, until
I water,
in most
narrow, '
It of the
ois.

titisB.
limile.
a Anchor
od berth,
m before
ler south,
ro points,
uite land-
h, and the
loal. Be-
lerein are
open bay
jre, which

.. i E.,a

of a mile.

ry near the

th care on

^' ^

is N.N.E.

loms close

mile E. by
le eastern
Cove and

them, at 3
uble Ledge,

8 or 9 feet
lain, is two-
3 the naore

of a mile to
5 fathoms

ichor, if ne-

the deepest
in on board.

From tkit island to the opposite paii d tbo Coast of Labrador, iminoci Castle, or Rod
Clift, which is the narrowest part of the Strait of Belle lale, the distance is about 3|
leagues, and they bear from each other N.N.W. and S.S.E.

From Oreenlet Island to Boat's Head it is E. |^N. 8 leagues ; betweem there is no
shelter on the coast, but to the south-eastward of Boat's Head is a cove, named Boat
Harhmur, where small vessels and boats may lie vetw secure, except with N.E. winds.

Cape Norman lies E. 4^ miles from Boat's Head, and is the northernmost point of
land m Newfoundland, as already stated.

^SOUNDINGS IN THE STRAIT OF BELLE ISLE, &c.— In crossing the Strait of
Belle Isle from Quirpon to Chateau Bay, your soundings will be irreguuur, from 20 ta
30, tuid in some places, from 30 to 38 fathoms. In the stream, or middle of the strait,
you will find 25 and 3^ ftthoms, coarse sand and broken shells, and towards Chateau
Bay 4fi jAttO fathoms; within a mile of the Labrador Coast are 35, 30, and 25 fathoms.
To the Wthward, between Belle Isle and St Peter's Bay, there are 59, 86, 90, 96, 66,
and 30 ftithoms.

Castain Bayfield says: — "The soundings in the strait are so irreg^ar that thejF
affora very little asssistance to a vessel at night, or during the fogs which so frequently
prevail. In general the deepest water is on the Labrador side, as, for instance, from
York Point to Red Bay, whereii however, it is interrupted by the shallow water off
Wreck Bay. It is also very deep on that side, from Black Bay to Forteau Bay inclu-
sive ; but the line of deep water is not direct, nor, I believe, continuous through the
strait, and it is still more perplexing, that there is as deep water within 2 miles of the
dangerous Flour Ledge on the Newfoundland side, opposite Forteau Bay, as m any
part of the strait. The depth of water varies in different parts from between 60 and 70
to 20 fathoms, and the nature of the bottom is as various as the depths, being some-
times of rock, and at others of sand, broken shells, pieces of coral, or gpravel. Fogs
occur with alt southerly and easterly winds, and they are frequent likewise with the
S.W. wind ; it is only when the wind is from between the north and west, that clear
weather can be safely reckoned on.

" Near the shores on either side there is usually a regular alternation of flood and
ti-'iT ebb in fine weather, but it is not constant. The flood comes from the northward along
the coast of Labrador, and also from the S.E., from Cape Bauld to Cape Norman.
The latter stream, I have reason to believe, is often turned off to the northward by
Cape Norman, and the same thing takes place at Oreen Island, on the Newfoundland
side towards Greenlet Island, on the opposite side of the strait. There is, moreover,
at times, a stream running from the S.W. for several days together, along the west
coast of Newfoundland. 1 his stream occasionally sets from Point Ferolle obliquely
across the strait towards Forteau Bay. Sometimes, and especially with N.E. winds,
the current runs directly in an opposite durection along the west coast of Newfoundland,
from Point Ferolle past Point Rich. In short, there is no constancy either in the
rate or set of these streams, for the winds and the irregular tides modify the set and
rate of the equally irreeular currents, in a manner which it is extremely difficult, if
not impossible, to calculate upon with any degree of certainty. The prevalent current
froTU the northward comes from between Belle Isle and the coast of Labrador. It is
often at the temperature of the/reezing point, bringing many icebergs into the strait,
and frequently carrying them through it many mues up tne Gulf. Some of these
bergs ground in deep water, whilst others are continually changing their positioon.
They are much more numerous in some seasons than in others, as I have seen 200
bergs and large pieces of ice in the strait in the month of August in one year, whilst
there were not above half a dozen to be seen in the same month of the following
season.

" I have observed this current from the northward and eastward assisted by the N.E.
wind, running 2 miles an hour, whilst at other times it was almost insensible. It is
even reported that there is sometimes a current in the opposite direction, and I believe
that this report of the fishermen is correct, especially during the ebb tide, and when
S.W. winds prevail in the Gulf. At the same time that this current is running to the
westward, there is at times a stream of warmer water running out to the eastward on
the Newfoundland side, especially during the ebb tide.

" Navigation of the Straight at Night. — From these remarks it will plainly appear
that the navigation of the strait is attended with very great danger in dark or roggy
nights, during which no vessel should attempt to run tlurough ; for I have found that,
with all our experience, we could not be sure of the vessel's position within 10 mile's

COAST OF LABRADOR.

I ;

under snch circumRtances. On the approach of a dark or foggy night, therefore, it
would be prudent to anchor in some one of the hays in the north side of the strait,
rather than continue under way. A vessel bound in to the Gulf, and running with an
easterly wind, will, however, find no place fit for that purpose unless she arrives at
Black Bay, and that is not a very good anchorage, tor Red Bay cannot be entered by
a large vessel with an easterly wind. Loup Bay is the first good anchorage under
such circumstances, and there the vessel would be so far advanced in her run through
the strait that it would not be worth while to stop, since she might easily clear every-
thing in the remaining short distance. But with a S.W. wind, at the approach of
night, and appearance of a fog, a vessel bound out through the strait to the eastward
had better stand off and on under easy sail, tacking by her deep-sea lead from the
Newfoundland side till morning, if she be not farther to the*e£v|tward than Point Fe-
rolle. If she be farther advanced, she had better endeavour to make Fagta^ Bay
before dark, and anchor there- for the night. In light winds or calms, dJ^Rg dark
nights or foggy weather, it is better to bring up with a stream anchor anywhere in the
strait than to drive about with the tides, without knowing whither, but then a look-out
must be kept for drifting icebergs."

PART II.

COAST OF LABRADOR.

J YORK POINT TO SANDWICH BAY.

. YORK POINT in long. 55° 56' 30" W. forms the West Point of Chateau Bay ; it
is quite bold, and so is Chateau Point to the westward, but has shoal water 60 fathoms
off It to the S.E. To the N.W. of the point is a ridge of high land named the High
Beacon, estimated to be 959 feet above tne sea at high water. York Point may be con-
sidered to be the north point of the eastern entrance to the Strait o) Belle Isle.

CHATEAU OR YORK BAY lies about 16 miles N.W. i N. from the south-
western part of Belle Isle, and 27 miles N. |- W. from Quirpon Harbour, and may be
easily recognised by its position with reference to the remarkable Table Head and the
St. Peter Islands ; by the high land in its rear; and by there being a straight and un-
broken coast, free from islands to the westward of it, but more especially by the two
wall-sided and flat-topped hills, 200 feet high, which cap the summits of Castle and
Henley Islands. Within the bay are Henley, Antelope, and Pitt's Harbours, the two
last of which are perfectly secure and fit for the largest vessels. The principal en-
trance to Chateau Bay is between Chateau and York Points, the latter bearing from
the former W.N.W. f W. If mile. Within this entrance, at the distance of 1| mile
to the northward, is Whale Island in the entrance of Temple Bay. Temple Bay has
deep water, but no good anchorage, although small fishing-vessels occasionally moor
on the west side, just within Temple Pass (the south entrance to the bay), whe««j as
also on the north-western side of Whale Island, there are huts and stages of the fisher-
men. On the north side of Whale Island is Whale Gut, 200 fathoms wide, with a
clear navigable channel of 100 yards with a depth of 4 fathoms. Exactly half way
between \ork Point and Temple Pass there is a smal^^^ledge of 3 fathoms water.

COAST OF LABRADOR.

ore, it
strait,
rith an
ivet at
red by
under
trough
every-
jach of
istward
om tho
)int Fe-
ku Bay
|| dark
e in the
look-out

Heniey Harbour, formed by Stage laland, is fit only for small vessels, although there
is ft depth uf water of from 4 to 6 fathoms. It is a quarter of a mile long by a cable's
length wide, and its only navigable entrance faces the south, in which direction are
the basalt columns of Custle Island. Some swell rolls in with south-west witlM.

Antelope Harbour is on the east side of the bay to the northward of Henley
Island, and between tho latter and Barrier Point, which, with its reef, separates it
from Pitt's Harbour to the northward. The passage leading into both these harbours
is between Stage and Henley Islands to the eastward, and to the westward "Whale and
Flat Islands. The shoal water extends off to the westward of Stage Island 160
fathoms ; and off to the eastward of the south-east extremity of Whale and Flat
Islands 100 fathoms. Besides these, there are three small ledges, the first and outer*
most of which, with 2 fathoms on it, lies exactly in a line from the west extreme of
Chateau Point to the east extreme i^ Whale Island; and with the sSuth extreme of
the Seal Islands seen through the narrow channel between Castle and Henley Islands
bearing E. % N. ; the second, with 3 fathoms on it, lies 160 fathoms from the east side
of Flat Island ; and the third, with only 9 feet, lies between the east extreme, of
Whale Island and Black Point, the north west point of Henley Island. Off Black
Point is the Black Rock, small and "Ioav, but always above v/ater.

Pitt's Harbour is very superior to Antelope Harbour, being sufficiently roomy to
accommodate a large fleet, and well sheltered from all winds. It is a mile long by
three quarters of a broad, and has a depth of 18 fathoms in the centre, decreasing
graduallr to 4 fathoms close to the shore on either side ; the bottom is of mud.

To enter Antelope and Pitt's Harbours bring Grenville and Black Points in one
N.N.E. i E. and run in on this course, which leaves the first ledge 50 fathoms to the
right, till you arrive between Flat and Stage Islands, leaving the second ledge on the
left ; haul a little to the northward, and pass close to the westward of the Black Rock,
and roundin}!; it to the eastward, you enter Antelope Harbour. To enter Pitt's Harbour,
as soon as Black Rock bears East, change your course to X.W. by N., or keep the
south-west extremity of the basaltic columns of Henley Island open to the westward of
Black Point, and you will clear the BaiTrer Reef, leaving it to the eastward. Con-
tinue to run on this course or leading mark until the oast extremity of Whale Island
and the west extremity of Chateau Point, in Castle Island, come in one, bearing S. f
W. Then change your course to N. | E., or so as to run up the harbour with the last
named marks on, and you will clear the shoal water extending 50 or 60 fathoms off
Pitt's Point, and may anchor where you please.

About a mile to the eastward of Henley Island is Seal Island, and Z\ miles further
is Uuck Island j the space between is named Bad Bay, a place, as its name impijrls, of
no anchorage. It is open to easterly winds, and there are rocks above and under
water.

The St. Peter Islands are a cluster of barcrn islets, with many rocks above and under
water scattered about them, lying about S.W. \ W. 3 miles from Table Head. 'J'he
easternmost of the group are called the Peterel Islands, because those birds breed on
them. Within these islands on the main is St. Peter's Bay, affording indifferent an-
chorage although useful in cases of necessity. It is completely open to the S.E. Nearly
200 fathoms to the westward of the innermost islet is a 2 fathom shoul, and a reef ex-
tends off Point Peter, the south point of the bay, 160 fathoms towards the south-east.
The anchorage is three-quarters of a mile from the head of the bay in 13 to 20 fathoms,
sandy bottom. Wood and water may be obtained.

Table Head, to the N.W. of the Peterel Islands, is very remarkable, being an isolated
mass of basaltic columns upon sandstone, (fiat at top, and precipitous all'round,) the
summit of which is 200 feet above the sea. To the eastward of it is Truck Island;
to the N.E. of Truck Island is White Mica Cove, fit only for boats.

Camp Bay is sheltered towards the N.E. by the Inner and Outer Camp Islands.
In th'; bay are three small islets, having a rock, awash, 162 fathoms to the
Bouth-eustward of the outermost. The Inner Camp Island, about 300 feet high,
and three-quarters of a mile in diameter, is separated from the 8f>uth point of
Niger Sound by a boat- channel in which are fishing stages and huts. The Outer
Camp Islands, \\ mile long, are not quite so high, and are also of bare granite;
they arc separated from the former by a channel 200 fathoms wide, and clear of
danger. On the west side of the islands is a small cove used by the fishermen, who
moor to the rocks, but are unprotected from the south-west winds.

NIGER SOUND is to the north of the Camp llunds, between them and Cape St

1 -1

COAST OP LABRADOR*

Charlea.' It is at)out 1| mile wide, run* up about 6 miles, and contains seyeral
plares of good shelter. About 2^ miles within the entrance is Nicer Island, about 2 j
miles inmctent, and to the southward of this is Smooth Island much smaller and lower.
The chaffiiel between these islands is unsafe, but you may pass north and south of
them without danger. Good anchorage is to be found in Horn Bay at the head of the
Bound, and also in Islet Bay, north of Niger Island.

mt. XAWia SOVMD.— The north point of St. Lewis Sound is Cape St. Lewis, in
lat, 62° 21' 24" N., and long. 66° 41' 23" W., which is composed of precipitous dark red
granite hills. At its southern extremity is a small rocky peninsula, and nearl^a mile
to the eastward of this is Si. Lewis Rock, close to the shore.

The Sound is about 4 miles wide at its entrance, between Cape St. Lewis and North
Battle Island, the bearing between which is S. by W. | W. It is about 8 milea long
in a N.W. by W. direction, from its entrance to Telegraph Point at St. Lewis Inlet. The
shores are for the most part quite bold, and the water is everywhere eztremelv deep,
after exceeding 60 or 60 fathoms. Nearly in the centre of the Sound are the Middle
Rocks, and farther in the River Islands. In the fall of the year, a heavy ground swell
called tne undertow, sometimes rolls into the Sound from the eastward, as far as the
entrance of the Inlet, which comes in tremendous waves, often without wind, and
bursting over islets 30 feet high, proceeds with irresistible force against the sides of
the precipices. It is, however, not so dangerous as the short breaking sea of the
Gulf, and it discovers shoals, as everything with less than 4 fathoms on it is sure to
break.

On the north side of the Sound is a small cove, named Fox Harbour, at If mile
from Cape St. Lewis, which affords secure anchorage in 6 to 8 fathoms, muddy bottom.
The east point of the harbour is low, with several fishermen's houses on it, and has a
small rock to the northward, joined to it by shoal water, which must be left about 60
or 60 fathoms on your right, to avoid a reef, partly above water, which runs off the
south-west extremity of the point separating the harbour from the unsheltei-ed bay to
the westward, and forming the north side of the entrance. Anchor about 300 fathoms
. within the entrance. Water may be procured, but wood is scarce.

Deer Harbour to the westward, of Fox Harbour, is protected from southerly winds
by Marnham Island at the entrance, which breaks the fairway into two channels. The
principal passage in is to the westward of the island, and has 19 to 31 fathoms, and
Dold-to to the rocks on either side ; the other channel is only fit for boats. There are
no dangers which cannot be seen, and the harbour will accommodate any number of
vessels, which can beat in or out with facility.

Open Bay to the south-west of Deer Harbour, affords good anchorage near its head,
'but exposed to the S.E. The water, like that of Deer Harbour, is deep.

ST. LEWIS INLET.— The sooth point of Open Bay has off it some rocks above
'Water, named the Black Reef, between which and the River Islands is the entrance to
St. Lewis Inlet, of nearly a mile in width. The depth is generally above 30 fethoms,
ao that there is no good anchorage until at Black Fly Island, 9 miles from the entrance,
under the west side of which there is good riding in 5 to 9 fathoms, on a bottom of mud
and stones ; here wood and water may be readily obtained. Above this the navigation
is intricate, but it is possible to take a vessel not drawing more than 18 feet 6| miles
farther up. Above Black Fly Island is Wood Island, about a mile in length. When
running for the Inlet, steer N.N.W. I W. 2| miles from the North Battle Island to the
North Middle Rocks, (two bare rocks close together, and about 40 feet high,) and
having given them a berth of two er more cables on your left, steer N.N.W. i W. for 2
miles or more, when the two Seal Islands (small and bare, with shoal water a short dis-
tance off their east ends) will be about 400 fathoms on your left. Change your course
now to N.W. by W. | W., and run in through the channel to the northward of the
River Islands, which is three-quarters of a mile wide, and clear, except two small
islands which must be passed to the southward at the distance of a cable.

The River Islands, forming the south side of St. Lewis Island, consist of Kahniat
Focklington and the Seal Islands. They are of bare granite, about 160 feet high. Off
the east side of the eastern island are several small islets, the easternmost of which are
the Seal Islands ; and there is also a small sunken rock off the south-east end (tf Fock-
lington Island, at the distance of a quarter of a mile. Between these islands and the
mam it is possible to anchor, though the depth is great, exceeding 80 fathoms, with a .
muddy bottom.
Within the River Islands on the main is Fall Harbour, a little place fit only for

I leyflral

bout a^

nd lower.

south of

ad of the

Lewis, in
I dark red
l^a mile

»nd North
nilea long
nlet The
neh deep,
he Middle
Dund swell
ar as the
wind, and
sides of
sea of the
is sure to

at If mile
dy bottom,
and has a
about fiO
ins off the
red bay to

00 fathoms

herly winds
nnels. The
tthoms, and
There are
^ number of

;ar its head,

rocks above
entrance to
30 fathoms,
the entrance,
ttom of mud
e navigation
•et 6^ miles
gth. When
Island to the
; high,) and
IT. J W. for 2
r a short dis-

1 your course
Lward of the
^t two small

Bt of Kahnia*
ethigh. Off
of which are
end of Pock-
unds and the
homs, with a

fit only for

0OA8T OF LABBADOR. fl9

•mall vessels, with inferior riding and exposed to the easterly swell ; the depth is three
fathoms. To the eastward of this is Cutter Bay, fit only for small vesiiels on account
of an inadequate depth of water, and some rocks lying in it. Ithmus Bay is too much
exposed to be of much service ; from hence the coast runs to the north-eastward 2 miles
to Cape Club, off which a reef extends 70 fathoms to the eastward. At 1^ mile S.E. }
£. ftrom the cape ate the .South Middle Kncks, above the water, but it is not advisable
to approach them nearer than 2 cables' length, unless in fine weather when shoals .can
be seen.

On the south tide of St. Lewis Sound are Battle, Caribou, Muddle, Size, and Surf
Islands, among and within which are some good harbours. Muddle Harbour is a
snug little harbour perfectly land-locked, with 4 to 10 fathoms, between Surf Island,
8iie Island, and Muddle Island ; to enter it from St. Lewis Sound, steer W.N.W. |
^ W. 2 miles, to Surf Cape, the north-west extreme of Great Caribou Island, which may

be kept close-to, and steer from it S.W. by W. one mile, to the narrows of Caribou
Channel, between the south>east end of Surf Island, and the west end of Great Cari-
bou; then proceed for 600 fathoms towards the north-west between Surf and Sluddle
Islands, and then haul in to westward, and anchor when you please. The Battle
Islands form the south point of St Lewis Sound, and the south-east island is the
extremity, both south-west and north-east, of the coast of Labrador The Ribb Keefs
ere about half a mile apart, and bear north and south from each other ; the north
reef bears East 1| mile from North Battle Island; the. sea always breaks on them,
and vessels ought to pass outside of them. West of these is Great Caribou Island,
which is 9 miles in circumference ; its south-east side is broken to coves open to sea-
ward, and there are several islets and rocks along it, and one sunken, the Foam Rock,
which is the only danger between Battle Islands and the Great Caribou.

Battle Harbour is between the Battle Islands and the east end of Great Caribou.
It is only fit for small vessels, the entrance being about 30 fathoms wide, 70 or 80
fathoms wide within, and half a mile long. It is generally crowded with the vessels
|. and boats of the fishermen, which moor to the rocks on either side, and the shores are

yif' -'^ covered with their houses and stages. There is a good house snd store on Signal
Island, with a high flag-staff which may be readily seen at sea, and from which the
island derives its name. The south entrance is only fit for boats ; vessels must there-
fore approach from the northward, passing to the west of the North Battle, and the
islands lying between it and Signal Island. There are two small round islets, the
southernmost in the entrance of the harbour ; these may be passed close on either
aide. This harbour is secure during* the summer months, but is unsafe in the fall of
the year, from the heavy ground swell before mentioned. ''

S r. CHARLES HARBOUR.— Cape St. Charles, on the north side of which is the
harbour, may be readily known by the round hill of the same name, 654 feet high,
bearing N.W. by W. 850 fathoms from the cape, and which is the highest land on this

1>art of the coast. The harbour may also be known by St. Charles Island, situated a
ong mile off the cape to the S.E. by E., which is high and about half a mile in
length, with several large rocks close off its inner side ; outside of it is Low Island,
to the south-west of which about one mile, is the situation of a reported danger.
Between these islands and the cape is a clear navigable channel.

The harbour is formed by three islands, which He along the east side of the cape.
The space in which vessels anchor is about 600 fathoms lon^ by 280 fathoms wide ;
and the depth is from 5 to 12 fathoms on mud. South-east winds bring in some sea,
^ on which account it is not considered a very secure harbour for large ver ")ls, except-

ing in the finest months in summer. The south-easternmost island pro. ''ting the
harbour is Fishflake, between which and 'the main small vessels may be perfectly
secure in 9 to 10 feet water, by making fast to the rocks, but this channel cannot be
made use of as an approach to the harbour, being too shallow to be serviceable.
Blackbill, which is high, black, and precipitous, is the next island, and Spare Island is
tlie innermost. The channel out of the narbour tq|the N.W. of Spare Island, is intri-
cate, and only fit for boats. The entrance into the harbour is between Fishfiake and
jBlackhill Islands, and is quite clear. The S.E. extreme of Fishflake Island appears
like the extremity of Cape Charles, and bears E. bv S. 1| mile from St. Charles
Hill. When running for the harbour, steer for the north-east side of Fishflake Island,
CO as to pass its south-east extremity at the distance of about 150 fathoms, steering
N.W. by W., and that course will take you through the entrance between Fishflake
and Blaokhill Islands, into the hajrbour, dear of all danger. There are three small

COAST OF LABRADOR.

■ r

,.■1

i"i

rocks above water off the N. W. point of Fishflake, but they are bold-to, as are also the
shores on either side.*

St. Charles Channel Is between the Caribou, Sizo, and Muddle Islands: it contains
deep water, with no detached shoals. The course up the centre of this fine channel
to the narrows, is N.W. J N. 'i\ miles. A run of half a mile North, through the
narrows, leads into the channel, between Muddle Island and the main, which is deep,
and free from all dangers. The course through this channel to the mouth of Su
Charles Iliver is N.N.W. IJ milcj and a vessel may either run up that bay to the
westward, or through Muddle Channel eastward, into St. Lewis Sound. St. Charles
River runs East, and is nearly a mile broad, but about 2 miles up, it becomes narrow
and intricate. "Wood and water may be had in abundance up this inlet.

S r. LEWIS CAPE has been previously mentioned. Just round the cape is the
entrance of a small cove, named Deepwater Sound, which runs in S.W. ^ W. lor half a
mile, and is vorv narrow, but has IVum 20 to 40 fathoms within it.

PETTY IIAllbOUR.— From the northern part of Capo St. Lewis to the south
head of Petty Harbour Bay, the course is about N.N.E. i E., distant 1} mile; the
.shores are bold and lofty. The entrance is Ij mile wide; and the north point bears
from the southern point NE. by N. The bay runs up nearly N.W. by N., full a mile,
having from 20 to' 40 fathoms water in it. At the bottom of the bay is the harbour,
the entrance to which is to the northward of a low point of land, shutting the harbour
in from the sea, so as to make some difficulty in distinguishing its situation ; it is not
above 50 fathoms broad at the entrance, with 6 fathoms mid-channel, and 3 towards
the sides ; but this narrow passage continues only a short way : for having passed
through it, the harbour opens wide, and vessels will have plenty of room, and may
anchor in any part, in from 7 to 12 fathoms, lying land-locked.

From the north liead of Petty Harbour Bay to Point Spear, the course is N.E. ^ N.,
distant 2^ miles; and from Cipe Lewis to* Cape Spear, in nearly the same direction,
6 miles; between are Barren Bay and Spear Harbour. Bi.rren Bay is a little to the
northward of the northern part of Petty Harbour Bay,- and affords no shelter ; but Spear
Harbour, which lies to the southward of Point Spear, is a very excellent haibour. In
coming from the northward, and making Point Spear, you will open two islands, in the
bottom of a small bay^ between which is the best passage into Spear Harbour. Keep
the northern islands cibm on board, there being 4 fathoms ( longside of it ; and after
you aie about a cable's ien||^h within the islands, steer for tho middle of the harbour,
and anchor in 7 or 8 fathoms : there is good room4o moor. Small vessels may go on
either side of the islands, the least water being 2 fathoms : but it should be observed
that in coming from the southward, you will only be able to distinguish one island, for
the northernmost islands will bo shut in with the land, &o as not to be seen until you
get within the heads.

SOPHIA, CHARLOTTE, and MECKLENBURGH HARBOURS.— From Point
Spear to the entrance of these three harbours the course is N.W. by N., about 3 miles,
passing several small but high islands lying within half a raile of the shore ; these are
commonly namtd S])ear Islanils, and are bol;l-to, with channels between them of 20
fathoms water. N.E. by E. ~ E. from the southern head of the entrance to the three
harbours lie two small inlands, close together, and therefore named the Double Island,
which appear to be as high as they are broad. About a cable's length to the eastward
of these islands are two sunken rocks, over which the sea, in bad weather, constantly
breaks. Nearly in the middle of the entrance, also, are two islands so close to each
other as to seem but one ; these are steep-to, and ships may pass on eltnor side of them,
in 12, 13, and 14 fathoms, anchoring within them, in Queen's Road, in lOfath ns; but
to the southward of these islands you will find the widest passage, and most lo.. ti for
ships to work ov*.

'The first and Sv/uthernmost of these three harbours is Sophia Harbour, running in
S.S.W., about li mile, with from 10 to 15 fathoms water; it then trends away, round a
low point to the eastward, and be6bmes a mile broad; it is thence shoal water, and only
fit for small vessel)-.

Port Charlotte is the middle harbour, and fit for any ship; there is a low flat island
on the starboard side of its entrance, i'rim v\hich a reef of rocks extends one- third of
the channel over, to avoid which ycu must keep the southern side on board : you wiL
then have 9 fathoms dose to the t^hore, until you get a quarter of a mile within the

• St. Chttiles nnd Battle Tlaiboin-s av(; Ihr prinoipn! lisbiug stations on this coast.

9» /

! also the

contains
3 cii.'innel
[>ugh the
I is deep,
th of SU
»ay to the
t. Charles
is narrow

ipe is the
lor half a

the south
mile ; the
:)int bears
ill a mile,
J harbaur,
e harbour
; it is not
3 towards
Ing passed
, and may

^f.E. IN.,
direction,
ttle to the
1 but Spear
hour. In
inds, in the
lir. Keep
and after
harbour,
nay go on
B observed
island, for
until you

?rom Point
out 3 miles,
these are
them of 20
the three
ible Island,
lie eastward
constantly
ose to each
ide of them,
xiY ns ; but
St toy.'n for

running in
lay, round a
er, and only

w flat island
one-third of
d : you wiL
le within the

COAST OF LABUADOtt.

harbour, when you may anchor in any part, in from 12 to 17. fathoms, only giving the
starboard side a berth, to avoid a reef that lies on that side.

Mecklunburuh Harbour, the northernmost of the three harbours, runs in N.N. W. ^ N.
and N.W. by N., about 2 mileu ; in the lower part of it there are 20 fathoms,, but as
you advance the water lessons, so that in the upper p.-irt there eure no more Jban 12
fathoms for ships to moor in. To sail up to tlie head of the bay, you must keep the
port »ide nearest, in order to avoid the edge ot rocks lying on the starboard, about 30
fathoins from the mhnre. These rocks lie within the narrowest part of the harbour, and
above the low point on the starboard side. The best anchorage it at the head of the
harbour.

ST. FRANCIS HARBOUR.— From Point Spear to Cape Francis the course and
distance are nearly NortS, 6 miles, and from the islands at the entrance of the three
1^ harbours to Cape St. Fr<. tcis, N.E. i N., about 6 miles ; between theui, and nearly half

a mile to the westward of the cape, is St. Francis Harbour, a <ug and secure harbour,
though small, and generally filled with vessels during the flslu.ig season, considerable
fisheries being carrio 1 on in its vicinity. There are two entrances to this harbour, one
being to the northward, the other to tne south-westward of Pigeon Island, which lies
directly before its entrance; the south-eastern channel leads to a small but narrow inlet,
named Round Harbour ; and everywhere there is clean ground, with 10 fathoms in the
channel as you enter, and the depth gradually decreasing as you advance towards its head,
where yuu have 5 and 3 fathoms. In entenng to the south-westward for St. Francis
^ Harbour, you should beware of, and give a berth to, the western side of Pigeon Island,
'•for a rocky reef runs off it ; proceed on N.N.E. ^ N., and having got fairly between the
two points of the harbour, you will perceive, on your starboard side, a small white
rock, to which go not nearer than 7 fathoms; steer up North, and having passed mid-
channel, or rather nearer the starboard shore, the rocks above water, which you will see
on each side of you, turn westerly, and anchor in 4 or 5 fathoms. Small vesesls go to
Birnell's Beach, or up to the cove at the northern extremity of the harbour.

Cape St Francis is the eastern point of an island, between which and Granby Island
^ jjf' is a very narrow passage for boats, with 4 fathoms water within it. From this cape, in

a N.N.-Westerly direction, about three-quarters of a mile, is Indian Point, which has
between it and Jauper Islands south-eastern point an opening leading into Indian Bight
and Shoal Tickle, two narrow coves, the latter of which is shallow, and with only 2 and
1 A fathom water in it. To the northward of Indian Point are Hare and Fox Islands,
with a narrow passage running northward between them. On crossing from Indian
Bight to the channel, you will have deep water, but when you enter the passage it will
shallow to 5, 4, 3, and 2 fathoms ; this flat will continue for a quarter of a mile j you
thon deepen your water again to 5, 7, 10, and 12 fathoms. Vessels frequently anchor
in this place, on the western side of Hare Island, or rounding the northern end of Fox
Island, run through ?e>>rce's Tickle into Seahng Bight.

SEALING BIGHT is a very commodious and convenient place for the fisheries.
The best anchorage is on the northern part of the bay, to the westward of Jasper Island,
where you may safely ride in 8, 10, or 11 fathoms, or farther in. with less water. There,
are several coves, situated along shore, to the northward of this anchorage, affording
convenient anchorage for small vessels. Fresh water can easily be obtained ; but wood
is scarce. The soutliern entrance to this place is between Indian Point and Jasper
Island on one side, and Hare and Fox Island on the other ; the water is deep, and there
is no danger, except a reef stretching out to the south-westward from Gull Island, over
^ vhicih the sea breaks very high in stormy weather; it will, therefore, to avoid this reef,

be always prudent to borrow close towards Indian Point, in either sailing in or out of
Sealing Bight. Merchantman Harbour is about 2 miles W. ^ S. from St. Francis
Island; it is small, but has from 7 to 15 fathoms water.

FISHING SHIP HARtOUR.— From St. Francis Island to the northernmost
Fishing Island, the course is N.N.E. l N., and the distance 3 miles. The Fishing
Islands are three in number : the two northernmost are connected by a beach, which,
with the main, forms Fishing Ship Harbour, where ships may lie land-locked, secure
from all winds, in from 14 to 6 fathoms water. The entrance is to the southward, on
either side of the soifthern Fishing Island.

The best passage will be between the two western islands, that entrance bearing
from Hare Island N. by W. There is no danger in this channel, and vessels may saU
riglit through it, in nearly a N. by W. direction, up to the very head of the harbour,
and anchor in 12 fathoms, having good room lor ships to moor. There are two oihei

t \

COAST OF LABRADOlt

pasMfM into this plMW, one to the r/mtward from the entrance of Gitbert'a River, the
other to the noithward of aU the Fishing Islands ; the latter has 7 fathoms through*
out, but is so narrow that you will have Mome difficulty in discovering the opening.

GILBEKT'S RIVER.— Between Fishing Islands and Granb> Island to the south-
ward is the northern entrance into Gilbert s Kiver ; but the southern entrance, be-
tween Denbigh Island and the main, is the widest : there is also an entrance between
Denbigh ana Oranby Islands. The passage in has deep water everywhere. The
course of the river is nearly N.W. by N., for about 6 miles ; it then divides into two
bnmches, one runnii% N.W. by N., 7 or 8 miles, the other 6,W. by W., about 6 miles.
Both these branches are full of rocks, small islands, and shoals ; but in the middle the
anchorage is good all the way up, from 20 to 10 fathoms. This river has also a pes-
■age out to sea, between Hare and the Fishins Islands.

CAPE ST. MICHAEL.~At 6 miles N.N.E. i N. from the northernmost Fishing
Island, and 16 miles N.N E. f N. from Point Spear, is Cape St. Michael, which is high
and steep towards the sea. It lies in lat. 52" 47' N., and besides being high and steep
towards the sea, may be known by a large bay, named St. Miohaers Bay, which forms
to the northward of it, having a number of lar^ and small islands in it. The largest
of these islands, named Square Island, lies m the mouth of the bay, and is 3|
miles long, and is very high land: its north-east point is a high round hill, and
makes, in coming from the southward, like a separate island, being only joined by a
low, narrow neck of land.

OCCASIONAL HARBOUR.— About 2\ miles to the southward of Cape St. ,
Michael, is Occasional Harbour, which may be easily known by the Twins, two large '
rooks, lying f of a mile outside of the entrance. They are very near to each other,
and ve«8els may pass on either side of them ; the entrance to the harbour is between
two high lands, and runs in W. by N. ibr two miles, then N.W. by N. ; both sides
are steep-to, without any dangers, and having sood anchorage, in from 10 to 7 fathoms,
about 2 mileft from the entrance. The wind oetween the high land sets right into or
out of the harbour.

From Cape St. Michael to Cape Bluff the course and distance are about N.N.E., 7|
niles. These two capes form the points of entrance to St. Michael's Bay.

ST. MICHAEL'S BAY.— The best anchorage for small vessels in St. Michael's
Bay, is on the south side ; that is, keep Cape St. Michael's shore on board, then keep
along the south side of the first island you meet ""ith, which is named Long Island, till
you are ndarly as far as the west end of it, where you may anchor in from 12 to 20
fathoms, land-locked, and may work out to sea again on either side of Long Island.

From Cape St. Michael to the entrance of Square Island Harbour, the course is
N.N.W. 3^ miles ; in the entrance lies a small isle of a moderate height, to the west-
ward of which is the best passage into and out of the harbour, there being only 2
fathoms water in that to the eastward of it.

About a league N.N.W. from Square Island Round Hill, lies the entrance into
Dead Island Harbour, which is only fit for small vessels, and is formed by a number
of islands. Between these islands and Cape Bluff there is a passage out to sea.

Cape Bluff is very high land, ragged at the top, and steep towards the sea. Cape
BluffHarbour is small, and only fit for small vessels. To sail into it, keep Cape Bluff
shore on board tillyou come to a small island, then pass to Uie eastward of it and anchor.

From Cape Bluff to Barren Island the course is north-eastward, about a league ; and
from the south point of this island to Snug Harbour the course is N.W. by W., 1^
mile. This is but a small harbour, but m it there is very good anchorage in 26
fathoms water, and there is no danger in sailing in or out.

One mile to the northward of Barren Island lies Stony Island ; and within these
islands, on the main, are Martin and Otter Bays, in the northernmost of which is very
good anchorage and plenty of wood, and no danger but wlAt shows itself.

DUCK HARBOUR. — On the western side ot Stony Island is Duck Harbour, which
is very good for small vessels. Large vessels may anchor between the west point of
Stony I^nd and Double Island, in 20 or 24 fathoms water, and may sail out to sea
again, on either side of Stony Island, in great safety.

HAWKE ISLAND lies a mile to the northward of Stony Island. Within Hawke
Island lies Hawke Bay, which runs to the westward 2 leagues, and then branches into
two arms, one running to the W. by S., 2 leagues, and the other N. by W., 5 miles :
these arms are well supplied with wood. After you are within Pigeon Island there ia
very good anchozage up to the heed of both arms.

00A8T OF LABRADOR.

On the south side of Hawhe Itlmd Hm Bagl« Oove, wherein it rmj good mehortM
for Urge veaseis, in 30 or 40 fftthomi rater, omall Tenele may anchor at the bead m
7 or 8 fathomi.

CAPLIN BAY.— On the main, within Hawke Island, about 5 mileeto the B. by If.
of Hawke Bay, lies Caolin Bay, in which is ?ery good anchorage and plenty of wood.

PARTRIDOR BAif lies 4^ miles to the northward of Hawke Island. In this bay
is very good anchorage, but difficult of access, unless acquainted, on account of a nam-
ber or small islands and rooks which lie before the entrance of it. The land hereabout
mav be easily known, for the southern point of the bay is a remarkable high Uble hill,
and baiTou ; and all the land between this hill and Cape 8t. Michael is high, but tho
land to the northward of it is low.

SEAL ISLANDS.— From Cape St. Michael to the southemmest of the Seal Islands
the course is N.E. | N., 9 leagues ; and from thence to Round Hill Island the
course is about N.E., 11^ miles; this latter island is the easternmost fand on this
part of the coast, and may be known by a remarkable high round hill on the western
part of it.

From Round Hill Island to Spotted Island the coarse is N.N.W. ^ N., distance 1|
league. From Spotted IsUnd the land trends N.N.-Westerly, and is fronted with
numerous islands.

SHALLOW BAY.— From the southernmost Seal Island to White Rock, the 3oun«
is N.N.E. I K, about 6 miles ; and from this rock the course into Shallow Bay is W. h
S., 4 miles. There is tolerably good anchorage in this bay, and no danger except a small
rock which lies off a cove on the port hand, and about one-third of the bay over : thia
rock is uncovered at low water. There is ver%- little wood on the shores ot this bay.

From White Rock to Porcupine Island the course is N.N.W., distant 2 leagues.
This island is high and barren, and you may pass on either side of it into Porcupine
Bay, where you will have very good anchorage, but there is little or no wood.

SANDY BAY lies on the southern part ot the Island of Ponds, and N. ^ W. 5 miles

from White Rock. In it is very good anchorage in 10 fathoms water, on sandy bottom,

r A / and it seems very convenient for a fishery, but for the absence of wood. Between this

bay and Spotted Island are a great number of islands and rocks, which render this part

of the coast dangerous.

SPOTTED ISLAND is high barren land, and may be known by several large white
spots on its eastern side. It is about 3 miles long, and 3 miles broad, and the northern
part lies in lat. 53° 25' N. Within this island, to the westward, lies Rocky Bay :
you may sail into this bay by passing to the northward of Spotted Island, and between
either of the islands that lie before the entrance of the bay. There is no^ood anchor-
age in the bay, the ground being rocky, until you are between Level Pcnnt and Eagle
Island, where you may anchor in 8 or 10 fkthoms water, good bottom, taking care to

J;ive Level Point a good berth. The best anchorage is on the west side of Eagle
sland, in 8 or fathoms water, mud. Passing between £^gle Rocks and Duck Rooks,
you may borrow on either side to within two-thirds of a cable's length, or may run up
and anchor on the south side of Narrow Island, in Narrow Harbour, and be handy for
wooding and watering.

From Spotted Island to Wolf Rock, the course is N.N.E. | N., 18 miles. This roek
just appears above water, and is about 10 miles from the main. There are some sunken
rocks abont it, and several islands between it and the coast.

Indian Island lies 2 miles to the northward of the entrance of Rocky Bay ; it is r»>
markably high land, the western end being highest. Be ween this island and the main
is tolerably good shelter for small vessels, and it appears to be a good place for a seal
fishery.

SAND-HILL COVE. — About 4 leagues to the westward of Indian Island lies Sand-
Hill Cove (so named from several sand-hills lying on the southarn side of the entrance) :
in this cove is tolerably good anchqrage about ^ a mile within the entrance, in 3 and 4
fathoms water, sandy bottom. In sailing into the cove take care to give the north
point a good berth, there being a ledge of rocks stretching off from the point about a
cable's length, and which run to the westward along shore for about 2 cables' length.

TABLE BAY.— The south head of this bay lies 2 leagues to the N. by W. of Ssnd-
Hill Cove, and may be known by a remarkable table hill on the north side of the bav,
at about 8 miles within the entrance ; this hill may be seen from the Wolf Rock,
whidi lies N.W. | N., 7^ leaeues from the entrance of the bay. In the bay, about 4
miles from the entrance, lies Ledge Island, so named from a ledge of rooks streUdiisf

COAST OF LABRADOR.

to the westward from the island up the bay for about 2 miles. On the south side of
this island is anchorage, 'n 12 or 14 fathoms water, in what is named South Harbour,
or you may run higher up and anchor in Table Harbour. On the north side of the
bay, Just within Ledge Island, lies North Harbour, in which is very good anchorage.
In sailing up the bay to Table Harbour, take care to keep the main close on board, in
order to ^void a rock that lies nearly half-way between the ledge off Ledge Island and
the n':'fn.

THE GANNET ISLANDS are a cluster of islands lying from about 7 to 11 miles
from the main ; the ouicr one bears N.N.W. l W., 10 leagues, from the Wolf Rock.

CURLEW HARBOUR lies nearly S.W. of Gannet Islands, and may be known by
a round green island lying before its entrance. The channel into the harbour is be-
tween this island and a low point of the main to t'le southward of it, having a sinall
rock above water, close to tho point : there is no dan^ii- in sailing into this harbour.
The best anchorage for large vessels is about a mile within the entrance, bringing the
fmall rock off the point of the entrance on with the northern point of Long Island
(which lies about half a league to the N. by W. of Green Island) ; they will then lie in
14 or 15 fathoms water, good bottom. Small vessels may run higher up, iind anchor
in 10 or 7 fathoms water. On .the south side of the harbour is a shoal, lyinw at a
small distance off shore. There is no wood to be had in this hrrbour, but there is
plenty of water.

ISTHMUS BAY — Round the western point of Curlew Harbour lies the entrance
into Isthmus Bay : io sailing into it from Curlew Harbour, you should keep Great
Island on board, in order to avoid a shoa! that stretches off the point towards the
island. There is another passage into Isthmus Bay, between the western point and a
small bare rock, of a moderate height, that lies off the south point of Great Island :
this passage is narrow, and has 5 fathoms water in it. Both wood and water may be
obtained here.

HARE Hi^RBOUR. — One league to the westward lies Kfare >Iarbour, which is
only fit for small vessels, the ground being foul, until you are near the head, where
you may anchor in 85 fathoms water, good ground. Hare Island, which lies before
the entrance to the harbour, is high land. The eastern point of Huntingdon Island
lies about 2 miles to the northward of Hare Island, and W.S.W. I W., 13 miles from
the outer Gannet Island; it is of a moderate height, and is in length, from east to
west, 7 miles. There is a safe passage along the south side of Huntingdon Island,
which leads into Huntingdon Harbour : in it you may anchor in from 15 to 5 fathoms
water, but the best anchorage is in about 6 fathoms near the island ; here you will
lay secure from all winds, and be very handy for wooding and watering, there being
plenty of both on the island.

SANDWICH BAY. -On the S.W. side of Huntingdon Island lie's Earl Island,
on either side of which is a passage into Sandwich Bay, which is a very.fine one, being
6 or 8 miles broad and 6 leagues deep, having ])lenty of wood, aivd lour fine rivers
that seem to be well stored with salmon. There is very good anchoraiie iu a cove on
the east side of this bay, and on the nortl side under a high mountain ; from the
shore at the foot of the mountain and for about 5 miles to the westward, the sound-
ings stretch off gradually from 5 to 25 fathoms, muddy bottom, and are about 3 miles
from the shore. The passage into the bay, on the west side of Huntingdon and Earl
Islands, has not been sufficiently sounded to be recommended, though by far the
widest. The passage on the east side of Earl Island is narrow, and has but 3 fathoms
water in it.

FROM YORK POINT TO CAPE WHITTLE. ,

Proceeding westward from York Point, along the Labrador side of the Strait of Belle
Isle, the coast is straight and bold to Wreck Bay.

WRECK BAY has a small river at its head, affords no shelter, and bears W. f 8.,
lOj miles from York Point. Off the east point of this bay, at the distance of 2^ mile*
S. by W. lies a small patch of rocky ground, with 5 fathoms least water. On it the>
basaltic columns of Henley and Castle Islands are just open to tlie southwaid of York
Point ; and Barge Point, the next extreme to the westward, bears W. by S., distant
6 miles. The bottom can be plainly seen on this patch in fine weather ; there is a
heavy swell upon it in easterly gales, and frequently a great rippling : icebergs often
ground upon it. ^

COAST OF LABRADOR.

7«

on Island
niles from
m east to
in Island,
5 fathoms
you will
lere being

irl Island,

one, being

tine rivers

a cove on

from the
;he sound-
ut 3 miles

and Earl
)y far the
3 fathoms

ait of Belle

rs W. 1 8.,

^f 2i mile*
On it thei
.id of York
8., distant
; there is a
bergs oftea

1 side of

larbour.

de of the

chorage.

joard, in

and and

11 miles

Hock.

nown by

ur is be-

g a avnall

harbour.

■\

iging the

g Island

len He in

d anchor

y'm!^ at a

t there is

entrance

3ep Great

vards the

lint and a

t Island :

r may be

•which is

ad, where

les before

Barge Buy, i\ miles to the westward of Wreck Bay, affords no anchorage.
GKEEXISII BAY, 5^ miles W. by N. from Bar^e Bay, is about 2 miles wide at the
entrance, but narrows within. Small vessels occasionally anchor in it; but the ground
is of sand, not very good for holding, and it is open to the wind and sea from the S.K.
About 1^ mile W. by S, from the west point of the bay is Oil Islet, a small, low, and
bare rock, the soutli extreme of which bears W. 5 N., 65 miles from Barge Point, the
extreme of the land to the eastward. Nearly I5 .ile to the westward of this islet, and
with its south extreme and Barge Point in one, l._aring E. 7 S., lies the Sunk Ledge,
a small patch of rocks awash at.low water, on which the sea usually breaks. The rocks
bear S. E. ^ IL, about S-oths of a mile from Twiti,^and, which stands close to the east
point of Hed Bay.

RED BAY is a beautiful little harbour, perfectly sheltered from every wind. It is
formed by Saddle Island, lying off the entrance of a bay of the main, which island has
a hill at each end, about 100 feet high. To the westward of Saddle Island, at the dis-
tance of three-quarters of a mile, is West Bay, affording tolerable anchorage in westerly
winds, in 10 or 12 fathoms water, over sandy bottom, but exposed to easterly winds.
The outer Harbour of Red Bay is between Saddle Island and Harbour Isle, at the
entrance of the iflner harbour, with a depth of from 6 to 9 fathoms, over mud bottom.
The entrance of this harbour from the westward is about 100 fathoms wile, and the
space to anchor in is 400 fathoms long, by 200 fathoms wide. Immediately to the
N.E. of this anchorage is the entrance to the inner harbour, which is between Harbour
Isle and the main to tlie eastward, and 100 fathoms wide ; but shoal water on either
side diminishes the deep water channel to about 50 fathoms in breadth. The depth
that can be carried In is 7 fathoms. Within there is a capacious basin, nearly three-
quarters of a mile in diameter, 16 or 17 fathoms deep, over muddy bottom, and where
any number of vessels might safely winter.

Captain Bayfield says that " Red Bay is easily entered with a leading wind, but
nothing larger than a schooner of 150 tons can beat in or out. The dangers outside
the harbour to be avoided are the Sunk Ledge, off the Twin Island ; another small
rocky shoal about 170 fk»<homs off the south side of Saddle Island ; and a rock awash
about 70 fathoms south from Peninsula Point. Running for the harbour from the
eastward, the first will be avoided by keeping Greenish Point just open to the south-
ward of the bare islet to the westward of it, till the west extreme of Saddle Island
bears N.W. g N. Then sleer N.W. 5 W. for the entrance of the bay between Saddle
Island and the point of West Bay, taking care not to go nearer to the former tliao a
quarter of a mile, or by the lead than 11 or 10 fathoms. As soon as the west end of
Saddle Island bears N. by AV., you may haul up for it, and round it to the eastward
within 20 fathoms; butobseive that farther, in, that is, off the north point of the
island, thcit; is a reef running out 70 fathoms to the northward, or towards Harbour
Island. The channel between this reef and the shoal of large stones connecting Har-
bour Isle with the mainland to the westward of it is only 100 futhoms wide. As soon
as you are through this entrance, you laaf choose your ancliorage, only observing that
there is shoal water all along the inner side of Saddle Island, and to the distance of
70 fathoms. A vessel moored here M'ill be perfectly secure from all winds ; but if you
wish to go into the inner liarbour, there will be no difficulty in doing so with your
chart, or if you first send a boat to look at the narrow entrance.

" In approaching Red Bay from the westward there is nothing in the way, excepting
the rock of the Peninsula Point near West Bay, already mentioned ; aiid which, being
so close to the shore, may be easily avoided."

Cauol Cove, about 3^ miles W. by S. from Red Bay, is very small, but affords ac-
commodation to a few vessels. About 4 miles to the south-westward of Carrol Cove
are two small islands, a mile apart, named the Little St. Modest Islands, which have a
dangerous rock awash at low water off them, half a mile S.E. by S. from <he west ex*
treme of the western isle. St. Modest Isle, on the opposite or west side of Black Bay,
is bare ; within it, fishing vessels moor to the rocks on either side.

BLACK BAY, 11 miles west of Rod Bay, is 3 miles wide, and about 2 miles deep.
It is open to S.E. winds, which send in a heavy swell, but there is tolerable anchorage
in 10 fathoms off a tine sandy beach, to the west of a rivei at the head of the bay. There
is a rocky shoal of 3 lathoms, cue mile N.W. of St. Modest Island.

From St. Modest Island, l^nile S.W., is Cape Diable, and to the west of this is
Diable Bay, which with Loup Bay, 3 miles farther, may be readily known by the
magnificent cliffs of red sands-lonc, 300 or 400 feet high, which extend two or three

r^'

COAST OF LABRADOB.

>^'-

miles botween them. Schooner Cove is on the S.W. Side of Loup Bay ; it is open to
the eastward, but fishing vessels use it in the summer months. There are a fishing
establishment and severu houties in this cove. The anchorage in Loup Bay is e](-
tremely good, particularly in the N.E. corner of it ; and although open to the south,
vessels ride here all the summer.

FORTEAU BAY, 4 miles west of Loup Bay, is 4 miles broad between Point Belles
Amours, the S.E. point, and Point Forteau, the S.W. point, which bears E. \ S. from the
other ; it is about 2| miles deep, and runs to the northward. At the head of the bay
is a large and rapid river, abounding in salmon, and a fine sandy beach. There is a
fine fall of water \\ mile within the bay, from Puint J^'orteau, which, with a remarkable
high rock off the S.W. of Point Belle*Amour8, willservetopointoutthe bay to strangers.
It is considered to be the best roadstead in the Strait of Belle Isle, and the Jersey
vessels employea in the fishery lie moored all the summer ; they have large fishing
establishments on the west side of the bay. The best anchorage is on the N.W. side,
opposite the fishing establishments. From Point Amour, across the entrance of the
Strait of Belle Isle, to the N.W. extremity of Newfoundland, the distance is 9| miles.

Four miles W.N.W. from Forteau Point is a small bay open to the southward,
named St. Clair, which affords no anchorage. Off its east point a sn«ll low islet and
reef extends some distance.

About 3 miles to the westward of St. Clair Bay is the bay of Blanc Sablon, v*hich is
exposed to westerly winds, but sheltered to the S.W. by two islands named Wood and
Greenly. It is an unsafe anchorage, particularly in tne fall of the year, and during
winds irom the west, which send in a very heavy sea. It is a mile deep, and l'| mile
wide ; and on a projecting point at the head of the bay, are the buildings of a fishing
establishment. Close to the east side of this projecting point is a reef of rocks which
runs off 300 fathoms from the shore.

Wood Island, off Blanc Sablon Bay, is low and barren, and about 1§ mile long ; it
has some fishing establishments on its east side. Off its west side a reef extends a
quarter of a mile.

Greenly Island lies 1| mile west of Wood Island, and. between them is a clear
channel. Off the south point of the island, at the distance of about 200 fathoms, is a
rocky shoal. On its east side is a cove sometimes used by the fishers, but this anchor-
age, as well as that under Wood Island, is not good.

One mile and a half Avestward of Blanc Sablon Bay is Gulch Cove, a small inlet of
the main, off the entrance of which there are some rocks which shelter it; it is so nar-
row, that there is not room for the smallest schooner to turn about in it, hence the
vessels which frequent it are warped out stern foremost.

From Blanc Sablon Bay to Grand Point, the distance is 2| miles. Off it is a dan-
gerous reef of rocks, 350 fathoms to the south and west; and eastward of it, for \\
mile, there are rocks above and under water, extending off the shore for a quarter of a
mile in some places.

Perroquet Island lies N. by W. I W. \\ idtle from Grand Point. It is high, and less
than half a mile in diameter, and frequented by vast fiocks of puffins. It is nearly half
a mile from the land, but there is no channel between.

Three miles in the same direction (N. by W, \ W.) from Grand Point, is the edge of
the shoals on the south side of Ledges Island, between which island and Perroquet is
the passage to Bradore Harbour. Opposite to the centre of this island, ou the main,
to the eastward, is an establishment which is about If mile N.N.E. from the west side
of Perroquet Island.

BRADORE HARBOUR.— Bradore Harbour, on the east side of Ledges Island, should
be approached from the southward, between a chain of islands off the island, which are
quite bold-to, forming the western side of the channel, and the coast of the main, on
which is the before- mentioned establishment, the eastern side. There is no passage to
this harbour to the north or west of Ledges Islands, as the space is crowded with rocks
and dangers, although there is a narrow and very deep channel for small vessels close on
the island. To enter Bradore Harbour, coming from the eastward, give Grand Point
a berth of half a mile, to avoid the reefs lying off it, or take care that the west extreme of
Perroquet Island does not bear to the west of North. Perroquet Island may be passed
as near as a quarter of a mile. Having passed it, haul towards the entrance till the
west extreme of Greenly Island is half a point open of ,ithe west e.\treme of Perroquet
Island, or bearing S. \ W., In order to clear the Gull Rock and Ledge, which bear
S.W. by W., and are distant 280 and 490 fathooiB respectively &om Point Jones, on

COAST OF LABRADOR.

>pen to

fishing

i» ex-

! south,

, Bellea
rom the
the bay
sre is a
larkable
rangers,
Jersey
fishing
W. side,
le of the
miles,
athward,
islet and

vrhich is
^ood and
during
11 mile
I fishing
.8 which

i long ; it
extends a

Is a clear
loms, is a
13 anchor-

,11 inlet of
is so nar-
hence the

is a dan-
it, for Ij
juarter of a

gh, and less
nearly half

the edge of
*erroquet is
)u the main,
he west side

sland, should
id, which are
the main, on
o passage to
id with rocks
saels close on
Grand Point
!8t extreme of
my be passed
ranee till the
of Perroquet
, which bear
int Jones, on

1)vhich the houses .srand. The rock just covers at high water, and therefore can always
be seen ; but the ledge has 2 fathoms least water; and therefore is exunuely dangerous.
On the west side of this ledge, the west ends of Perroquet and Greenly Islands are in
one, and they may therefore be avoided by the courbe above-mentioned. Proceed on
this course N. | E., till Jonea's housb bears E.N.E. and the northern islet on the east
appearing like the north extreme of Ledges Island, X.E. by N. ; then steer for the
latter, leaving the Gull Rock to the east, and looking out for a small rock lying off an
Island on til e opposite side, after passing which, the channel is clear, keeping nearer
the islets than the main. A run of about 700 fathoms from the houses, will bring you
Opposite the entrance of the harbour, when you must haul sharp round to the west-
ward, between the islets into the harbour ; this entrance is 80 fathoms wide and 8
fathoms deep. The harbour is perfectly landlocked, and will accommodate but a small
number of vessels; the depth being from 4 to 17 fathoms, muddy bottom.

In approaching Bradore Harbour from the west, beware of the reefs, extending three-
quarters of a mile to the south-west of Ledges Island, which may be cleared by not
bringing PeiToquet Island to bear to the southward of S.E. by E. until Jones's House
bears N.E. by E.; then steer for the latter, until the marks come on for clearing the
Gull Rock and Ledge, when you must proceed as before directed.

To the north-west of Bradore Harbour are the Bradore Hills, conspicuous as being
Ih'i highest land on the coast. They consist of three round-backed mountains, the
northernmost of which is the highest, being 1264 feet above the level of the sea.

Bradore Bay, between the harbour and Point Belles Amours, is consirlered to be
dangerous on account of the straggling rocks scattered about, and of its exposure to
southerly winds which send in a heavy sea. Point Belles Amours is a mound of red
granite, 60 or 70 feet high, and will be easily recognised.

BELLES AMOURS HARBOUR.— This harbour lies to the north-east of PointBelles
Amours, the north-east side of the entrance being named Stony Point. At 1^ mile S. byE.
from Stony Point are the Flat Socks. To enter the harbour by the eastei n passage,
steer N. by W. h W., so as to leave the Flat Rocks a quarter of a mile on the star-
board hand, until you approach the east side of Harbour Point, a bare granite hill 150
feet high, with several beacons of stones on it, as near as 100 fathoms, taking care not
to approach Stony Point within a cable's length. Then steer N. until you are abreast
of the rock above water off the sandy part of Harbour Point, when you must haul a
little to the westward, so as to bring the east side of Harbour Point and Pond Point
(nearly opposite to Stony Point) in one. Keep them in one, in order to round the
north entrance of the Flat, and you will have 4 fathoms until Mark Point (the extreme
on the north side within the harbour) comes on with Peak ^'oir.t (a remarkable rocky
point in Middle Pay), seen over the low land at the head of the harbour, and bearing
W. ^ S. As soon as this mark comes on, haul sharp round to u- westward, keeping
at a iess distance than a cable's length from the high I'ot-ih^ s^^o-e writt' you are weU
within the sandy spit, when you may haul to the southward, arc aa^hor anywhere, the
bottom being of mud, and the depth from 5 to 7 fathoms.

Between Point Belles Amours and the Flat Rocks, there is a rocky pntoh of 13 feet
water; there are other patches of 3^ fathoms between t'ls and the poinr. To enter
the harbour by this westerly passage, which is preferaoi c- in wesi .;rly 'vinds, take care
not to shut in Stony Point behind Point Belles Amours, for fear of the Middle Ledges,
which lie off Middle Point, the outermost 600 fathoms off shore. Pass Point Belles
Amours at the distance of 200 fathoms, and l^ep at that distance from the shore till
past Pond Point ; then bear away to Harbotjp'oint, and proceed as before directed.

At 11 mile W. j N. from Point Belles Amours is Middle Point, with several rocks
off it, and 1^ mile farther is Five Leagues Point, the coast between bending inwards
two miles, and forming a fine open bay named Middle Bay, in which you may anchor
in from 4 to 13 fathoms, sandy bottom, free from all danger. For the first r lie in, the
shore should not be approached nearer than 1 60 fathoms.

Five Leagues Point is the extremity of a low peninsula which is remarkaMe for an
isolated and precipitous iiill nearly 200 feet high, at three-quarters of a mile torth-east
from the point. Off the point a reef runs a quarter of a mile to the south-west, outside
of which, in the same dire'^tion, are the two Barrier Reefs which may be cleared by
bringing the south extremities of Middle and Belles Amours Points ii\ one, bearing
E. i S.

To the westward of Five Leagties Point is the harbour, which is quite unfit for any
but small vessels. At 3| miles, W. by N. from Five Leagues Point is Salmon Islet,

COAST OF LABRADOR.

\.%

V ■'!

which is nearly joined by a spit of sand to Caribou Island, off which the shoala extend
nearly 400 fathq|p8 to the S.K. Retvween Caribou Island and the main, to the east of
it, is the eastern entrance to Salmon Bay, which has but 6 feet depth at low water;
the other entrance to the bay is from Bonne Esperance round to the north of Caribou
Island, in which is plenty of water, and is well sheltered.

BONNE ESPERANCE HARBOUR, considered to be the best on tiiis part of the
coast, lies to the westward of Caribou Island. A good mark for the harbour is Whale
Island, the south-easternmost of the Esquimaux Islands, which Mes N.W. by W. \ W.,
18i miles from Greenly Island, at the entrance of the Strait of Belle Isle, and is very
conspicuous by a roundish hill near its centre, having on its summit a pile of stones,
as there is also on almost every one of these islands. Whale Island bears W.S. W. h W.,
4^ n>iles from Salmon Islet before-mentioned. Between them lie the islands forming
the harbour, which are very steep, anc' of bare granite. To the south-west of Caribou
Island lies Goddard Islana, which is joined to it and another islet by shoal water; it
has a small rock above water off it, 130 fathoms to the s luth-west, and 'JoO fathoms to
the south of it is Goddard Rock Viiich dries at low wat r. On the other side of the
channel, opposite to the:3e rocks, aic thp '-v't tch, a small uncovered rock, and Breaking
Ledjjje, which just cover;^ at high water; the entrance to the harbour between these, is
460 fathoms wide, and r» fathoms deep. Beacon Isle^ lies W.S.W. A W., nearly a
mile, from Goddard Islet ; it is rather low, and a pile of stones on it. Three-quarters
of a mile west of it is Red Head, an island bearing E.N.E. 900 fathoms from Whale
laland ; between them is Fish Islet. To the north-east of Red Head Island is Cliain
Island, formed of two peninsulas, and beyond it Bonne Esperance Island, three-
quarters of a mile long and 150 feet high. Lion Island lies a quarter of a mile east of
Bonne Esperanoe Island, and between them is a low islet joined to Lion Island by
shoal water, but leaving a narrow and difficult channel between it ant] Bonne
Esperance Island. Off the east side of Lion Island is the Whelp Rock, always un-
covered, at 50 fathoms from the island. Between this rock on the west, and God-
dard and Cp 'ibou Islands on the east, may be termed the inner entrance from the
mi'in chann,.! ; it is 450 fathoms wide, and from 10 to 13 fathoms deep.

To enter the Bonne Esperance Harbour, being to the eastward, and the wind from
the east, stand toward Caribou Island, and when oft" the south side, at half a mile
from it, the south sides of Beacon and Red Head IsIjs, and the north side of Fish
Islet, will be in one, bearing W. \ N. Bear up on this mark, or else steer Wrst,
keeping the lead going, and a sharp look-out for Goddard RocK. You will have about
9 fathoms at low water, until past this, when it will deepen suddenly to 15 or 19
fathoms, and then you will be in the channel. Steer immediately N. by E., and
Whelp Rock will be right ahead and appear in one with the west side of House
Island, which lies close under the tnain land, about a mile from Lion Island, and has
a house on it. Keep on this bearing till past the Bold Rock, off the south-west point
of Goddard Island, wlieit you must bear a little eastward to clear Lion Bank and
Whelp at a cable's length, and then run up W.N.W. close along the inner sides of
Lion and Bonne Ksperance Islands into the harbour, anchoring whwe you please, in
12 to 16 fathoms, over a muddy bottom. The whole baj' may be considered as a har-
bour, and will afford accommodation for a fleet. Wood and water may be had in
abundance from the main land, but not from the islands.

In coming from the west with a westerly wind, keep half a mile from the south poitit
of Whale Island, and steer E. by N., to avoid two 4f;ithom dangers; one the Whale
Patch, lying half a mile E. by S. from«fte centre of Whale Island; the other two-
thirds of a mile sou*;h of Heiicon Islano, named the Middle Patch. These may be
avoided by not coming within a less depth than. 10 tathoms, or by keeping south-
ward of the track above mentioned. Keep on this bearing till Whelp Rock and House
Island are in one, hearing N, by I'L ; then hrail in upon that bearing, and proceed as
before. There are several otiier entrances into Bonne Esperance Harbour, between
the surrounding islands.

To the north of Bonne Esperance Harbour are Esquimaux Bay and Harl)our.
Esquimaux Inland hes in the middle of the hay, and forms, witti the main to the east,
a very narrow channel, which riniK H mile E.N.E., and tiien opens into a wide space
with two islets in it. The mouth of the Rivor and tlie trading post may be reached by
keepinu; along tlie east coast. The trading post is on a sandy point, backed by spruce
trees, 2 miles aljovc l<',squin)anx Island. Th(M'iver abounds with salmon. The approach
to this river from the westward is so intricute, from the number of islands, that no direc-
tions can be given.

i|.

COAST OF LABRADOR.

ESQUIMAUX ISLANDS.— These islands commence at Curihou Island, and extend
for 14 miles to the westward. They are generally bare of trees, and are of all sizes and
heights under 200 feet. Thoy form an endless number of channels, which it would be
impossible to describe; and off them are several small rocks and shoals, some of which
are fully 4 miles from tlie main land.

Proceeding westward from Whale Island, outside the islands, 4^ miles W. by N., we
come to the outermost of the Fort Rock3, a cluster of low rocks extending 650 fathoms
to the south west of Old Fort Island, which is of moderate height, and H mile in
diameter. The only channel through the islands, between Whale and Old Fort Island,
is the Whale Channel, betwe 'n Whale and Tent Islands.

Mermot Islet, at 1| mile W.N.W. of the outer Fort Rock, is low, and has a ledge
off it a quarter of a mile to the south-wost. Midway between Fort Rocks and Mermot
Islet, the course in through Old Fort Channel will be N.E. - N., with very deep water
the whole way to Old Fort Bay, which runs toward the north-east for 4 miles, with deep
water to its head.

The Dng Islands lie to the west of the Fort Rocks ; they are very numerous, and
surrounded with innumerable rocks and shoals, although there is anchorage between
the northern of them and the main, which can only be got at easily by running down
with a westerly wind from Shecatica, close along the main land, and in the channel
between the latter and the scattered rocks arid ledges which lie off it ; where there is
very deep water the whole way, of nearly 60 fathoms in some places.

To the northward of the Mermot Islands, and eastward of the Dog Island*^, is a
group of rocky islets, named the Eiders.

About 3j miles, W.N«W, \ W., from the outer Dog Rocks are two or three black
rocks alove water, named the Porpoises, lying three-quarters of a mile from shore.
Fiirther on, in the samu direction, at the distance of 3j miles, is the Boulet, a small
round-backed islet, green at the top and about 70 feel high, which, together with the
opening to Lobster Bay, 1| mile E.N.E. from it, will serve to indicate to a v.ssel its
position oft' the coast. Lobster Bay is completely exposed to south-westerly winds; it
is about 4 miles in extent, by about 200 fathoms in width, arid has 35 fathoms at the
entrance, decreasing gradually L., 14 lathoms half-way up, after which there is^anchor-
age quite to the head, witli muddy bottom.

At half a mile N.W. from the Boulet is Crab Islet, and 4^ miles W. by N. from it
are the Four llocks, having within them the Inner Islet. These are the only islets
between the Boulet and Shecatica ; but theie are many rocks and ledges between them,
and also off" the Boulet, to seaward. Of these the most dangerous is the Peril Rock,
wliich is very small, dries at half-tide, and lies 1^ nji'e S.S.W. fro;n the Boulet. It is
the outermost and greatest danj^er off this part of the coast; the sea, however, almost
always breaks over it, and also over the others wh'ch lie between it and the Four
llocks. There is no warniug by the hand-lead in aj)i)roaching any of these rocks.

About- a mile t: 'he eastward of Lobster Bay is Rocky Bay, on tiie eastern side of
which, at a mile witiiin the entrance, there is a small cove frequented by the fishermen,
who anchor in 5 fathoms, muddy bottom, and well sheltered from all winds; here there
is a house and stage. To the westward of Lobster Bay, and Very similar to it, is a
straight and narrow inlet named Narpetejjee Bay, wliich runs up to the north-eastward
about 4i miles, and affords no sh.clter with a southerly whid, being open to the sea.

About ;i -, miles W.N.W. from Boulet Island is Sliecatica Island, which has near it, close
to the main, the Island of Mistanoque, within which is the bay of the same name, which
runs inland 3 miles to the north-eastward, and has 27 fathoms water in the centre,
decreasing to 17 fatlioms at the sides close to the rocks. Half a mile from the head is
anchorage on mud, where the depth is less than at the entrance.

Opposite the mouth of the bay, on the north side of the island, is Mistanoque
Harbour, having a depth of 15 to 20 fathoms on a bottom of mud. Vessels may anchor
in lerNS water (about 12 fathoms) a little to the east, between the cast point of the bay
and the island, but the channel is only 80 fathoms wide, tialf a mile to the westward
of Mistanoque is Enter Islet, and 90 fathoms farther Diver Islet, having on thp
southern side a reef, wliich runs out to the distance of 130 fallioms. These islets are
low. About 400 ruthonis to the N.W. of them is a group of sniali islands, Ibrming with
the otliers the western channel to the harljour, which is quite clear. There is notliing
immediately outside of Shecatica, Mistanoque, Enter, or Diver Islands ; so that no
other in-tructiuiis iippear to be necessary than to run through the centre of either
tlianucl, whicli may be ^.i-eferrcd.

i 1

1 1

lit

C?OAST OF LABRADOR.

Nearly 7| milea, W. f S., from Mistanoque is Shaji Islet, which ts very remarkable,
beings small and high, with a round-peaked hill looking green in the middle, and is an
excellent guide for making Mistanoque from the westward, as the Boulet is from the
eastward. There are many rocks to the S.E. by E. of it, the outermost of which, the
Shit g Rock, is 2 miles distant. When three-quarters of a mile to the southward of
the Shag Rock, the south point of Shecatica will bear E.N.E. 8 miles off, and
this course will take you a mile to the south of the Three Rocks, lying midway between
them.

The coast hence to the southward is broken into immense bays and inlets, forming
islands of moderate height, and partially covered with moss. The outer mast is lined
with small islets and rocks, whicn are very ditlicult to pass through; while within them
there is a great depth of water in the intricate channels and bays between the island*
and the main.

CUMBERLAND HARBOUR lies N. by E. J E., about 3 miles, from the outer Shag
Rock, and may readily be distinguished by a remarkable high hill on the main land,
appearing like a castle at its summit, being a steep cliff, looking like walls ; this hill
lies N. by W., nearly 3f leagues, from the entrance to the harbour. The islands forming
the harbour, and rani-^f' the Duke and Cumberland Islands, are moderately high, the
eastern one making in *we round hills. The harbour should be approached between
the Shag Rock and ae Three Rocks, which bear E.N.E. and W.S.W. of each other,
distant 2^ miles, li ente.'ing this harbour there is no danger but what appears above
water, excet^ilK^, • r r 11 rock, which lies S. by W. rather more than half a mile from
the west piinl f entrance. The entrance is about 200 tathoms wide. As soon as you
arrive withit.i it:- >uter oints, haul over to the western side, and run along it to the
inner point ci I'dt "^ide, bearing N. oy W. i W. about three-quarters of a mile from
the outer eu^t poiin: ff entrance. As aoon as you arrive there, you may haul to the
eastward, and arjL r <v! gre you please, in from 7 to 20 fathoms water, over good
ground. This is aa fx :e]!ent harbour, the best and easiest of access on this coast ; and
good water can be had in plenty on the east side of the harbour.

Shecatica Bay lies 3 or 4 miles to the nonh-eastward of Cumberland Harbour, and
runs inland to the northward many miles. It has many islands, branches, and narrow
crooked passages, too intricate for any one to attempt who is not perfectly acquainted
with thf coast.

SANDY HARBOUR.— This harbour lies N.N.W. f W. 2* miles from Shag Islet,
and is 8itu*»ted on the south side of Sandy Island. To sail in, pass to the eastward of
the Egg Rocks, bearing N.W. by W. If mile from Shag Islet, and keep the starboard
noint of the bay (which is the west extreme of Duke Island, bearing N.E. more than
half a mile from the Egg Rocks,) on board in going in. You will then see a small
rock above water, to the northward, which lies over towards the east side off the
entrance of the harbour, and which you may pass on either side, and then steer in
N.N.E. I E. for the harbour, there being nothing in the way but what appears. After
you are in through the entrance, which is about 2 cables wide, you must haul to the
N.W. into the harbour, and choose your berth in 5 or 6 fathoms. This is a very safe
harbour, with good ground. There is no wood to be had, but plenty of water.

Port Augustine is a very small harbour, with a very narrow and intricate entrance,
and is fit for small craft only. The approach it is ^ ^ the westward of Augustine
Chain, a chain of small islets, the outermost c. ^nich is a round "mooth rock, with a
high black rock half a mile to the westward cC 't. Between the last-named rocks
there is a ledge, which shows at one-third ebb. he passage is on either side of this
ledge, and then northward along the west side of Augustine Chain.

The south extremity of Augustine Chain bears W. i S. about 7 miles from Shag
Islet. Between them lies Square Channel, the larg?st in between the islands, towards
the mainland. It is too intricate for description ; but 14 or 15 miles up it, in a N.W.
i N. direction, is the entrance of the River Augustine with a saiA bar across it, dry
at low water. There is plenty of wood at this river.

Eagle Harbour, on Long Island, is unfit for anything but small vessels, the entrances
being narrow and intricate. This part of the coast is very dangerous, on account of
the numerous islets and rocks off it.

Ofl" the entrance of Fish Harbour, N. ^ W., 4| miles, from the Bottle, on the north of
Great Mecattina Island, is Wood Island, so called from its being covered with wood.
The entrances to Fish Harbour is on either side of Wood Island, •.he northern being
the best, there being a ledge to the south of the island, which always shows ; and a

^mr^

"MV

COAST OF LABRADOR.

markable,
and is aa
from the

rhich, the

thward of
off, and

y between

forminflr
)t is lined
thin them
le island*

mter Shag
nain land,

this hill
Aa forming
high, the

between
ach other,
ears above
mile from
M)n as you
it to the
mile from
aul to the
over good
coast ; and

'hour, and
ad narrow
icquainted

Shag Islet,
lastward of
: starboard
more than
lee a small
ide off the
en steer in
ars. After
laul to the
a very safe
er.

3 entrance,
Augustine
)ck, with a
imed rocks
ide of this

From Shag
Is, towards
in a N.W.
ross it, dry

i entrances
account of

lie north of
with wood,
hern being
ows ; and a

irock of 2 feet one-third of a mile S.S.E ^ E. from the east point of the island. Wood
and water may be obtained, and there is a trading establiithment here.

HA-HA BAY. — This bay lies on the main, to the westward of Eagle Harbour,
and has several small islandfs at its entrance, forming separate entrances. Ti»e best of
these is that which lies between Seal Point and Round Island, leaving all the islands
on the starboard side : this is a wide and safe passage, having no danger but what is
visible. Ha-Ha Bay run» in to the N.E. by N. 8 miles, and has many islands at its
head, on the starboard side. Within these islands, to the eastward, are numerous
anchorages, with from 9 to 20 fathoms water. Vessels may also occasionally anchor
all along the eastern side of the bay, in 12 and 14 fathoms, muddy bottom ; but on the
western side the water is too deep. N.N.E., about 2 miles from the entrance on the
west side, is a high bluff head. Round this head, J^.W. by W. half a mile, is a small
but safe harbour for small vessels, in which you will have 12 fathoms, goo^ ground.
This harbour is formed by an island, on either side of which there is a narrow but safe
passage.

GREAT MECATTINA ISLAND, to the southward of Ha-Ha Bay, is 2 miles S.E. "
from Red Point, the nearest part of the main. It is 3J miles long, north and south,

3 miles wide, and about 500 feet high in the centre. It is granitic, and the position of
the island, with relation to the high land inside of Cape Mecattina, 4 or 5 miles
W.N.W., distinguishes it from any other island in the Gulf.

Nearly joined to its north point is the Bottle, a high round islet, with a small rock
elose off it, to the N.W. by N. ; and half a mile in the same direction, is a rocky shoal
of 4 fathoms. Bluff Head is the high N.E. point of the island ; and between it and
the Bottle is a cove, one mile deep, named Island Harbour, sheltered from the east by
a cluster of small islets and rocks, leaving a passage on either side of them. The an-
chorage is near the head of the cove, in from 14 to 20 fathoms.

Treble Hill Island lies E. by S. about 3 miles from the centre of the island. Flat
Island lies S.S.E. 7 E. 3 miles from the south point, and the Murr Islets lie S.W. about

4 miles from the same point, and a quarter of a mile N.E. by E. from the easternmost
of them is a ledge, on which the sea generally breaks. These islands are quite hold-
to, and swarm with sea-fowl. The Murr Islets are of considerable height, and flat at top.

MECATTINA HARBOUR, behind Mecattina Island on the main, is safe but small,
yet will admit vessels of burthen, there being not less than 3 fathoms at low water
.in either passage to it ; but they must moor head and stern, there being no room to
•moor otherwise. This harbour lies 3J miles N.W. by W. | W. from Hound Head, a
high peninsula on the west side of Great Mecattina Island, and 5^ miles N. by W. 5 W.
from the Murr Islets. It is only 28 fathoms wide in the western entrance, and 60 or
70 fathoms wide within. It may be safely taken by small vessels in fine weather, but
■not in stormy weather, the entrance being so narrow ; the least neglect in steering
might place the ve ssel on shore. To sail in through the western passage there is no
danger, but to sail in through the eastern channel you must observe the following direc-
tions : — From the eatitern point of Mecattina Island steer N. by W. towards the
main land, keep that close on board, until you get the western point of the island on
with the point of Dead Cove ; this is a small cove on the main,* which lies open to the
eastward ; the land which forms it is very low, with some brushwood upon it ; then
fiail on, in that direction, until you get abo^e a stony point, which is the north side of
the said cove ; or until you bring the north point of Gull Island, which is a small
island lying E. by N., distant a mile from Mecattina Island, on with the E.N.E. point
of Mecattina Island, ) su will then be within a spit of rocks which stretches off the
island, and must haul over for Mecattina Island, in order to avoid a ledge which runs
off from the point of Dead Cove ; and when you bring the western passage open, you
may anchor in 6 or 7 fathoms water. Vessels coming from the eastward, atid bound for
the harbour of Mecattina, in passing to the northward of Gull Island, should be careful
either to keep Gull Island or the mainland close on board, in order to avoid a sunken
rock that lies nearly half-way between Gull Island and the main, on one part of which
there are noi above 3 feet water. The highest part of the land between Grand Point and
Ha-Ha Bay is dire( tly over the harbour of Mecattina.

CAPE MECATTINA is tKe extremity of a promontory, which runs out from the
main land ; it is low at the point, but rises, inland, gradually, until it becomes of con-
siderable height ; it may easily be recognised by the adjacent islands and rocks, the
nearest of which is a small low rock not far from the point. Two of these islands are
much larger, and rise much higher Ihaa the others, and are named the Dyke Islands ; the

«-/-••

COAST OF LABRADOR.

outei^tnost are small, low, rocky islands, lying 2\ miles off the point ; they all lie in ft
S.S.E. I E. direction from the poiot The cape is situated in lat. 50° 10" N., and Ion.
69" 2' 30" W.

Portage Bay to the westward of Mecattina Harbour, is 2 miles N. by E. from th«
south point of Cape Mecattina. It runs in about 1\ mile to the northward, and
affords some shelter. A small islet lies in the mouth of the bay, towards the east side,
"which £oyms a small harbour, the western entrance to w^ich is the best. In the
approach to this harbour there are two 15-feet ledges to be avoided, one 400 fathoms
S. ^ "W. from the west end of Mutton Island, and the other half a mile N.E. by £,
from the southern Seal Rock, which is three-quarters of a mile N.E. by N. from the
south point of Cape Mecattina.

The Great Island of Mecattina being the most remarkable point of land about this
part, vessels frequently make it their point of departure, and shape their courses from
it to other places. When without the Murr Rocks a W. by S. course, 55 miles, will
take you without the rocks to off Cape Whittle ; but this course will take you very
near to St. Mary's Reefs. From the Murr Islands to Wood Island, near Grand Point,
at the entrance of the Strait of Belle Isle, the course is E. \ N., 75 miles ; continuing
on the east course 60 miles farther, brings you to the eastern entrance of the strait.

LITTLE MECATTINA ISLAND is 7* miles long, in a N.N.E direction, and 3
miles wide. It lies W.S.W ^ W., 15 miles, from Cape Mecattina ; between them is
a large bay, studded with numerous islands and rocks, which should have a good
berth given to them. Salaberry Bay, on its west side, cuts it nearly in two parts.
The northern part of the island is low, and composed of moss and sand, and is joined
to the southern part by a very narrow isthmus. The southern part of the island is
high, being 500 to COO feet above the level of the sea. Little MecaUina River is
large and falls 30 feet over granite, a short distance within the entrance, and about 2;^
miles N.N.W. from the north end of the island.

Little Mecattina Island, having no channel between it and the main for vessels,
and scarcely even for boats at low water, may be considered as forming the west side
of a large bay. The promontory of Mecattina forms the east side of this bay, which,
as already mentioned, is filled with islands and rocks innumerable, among which no>
vessel could find her way, and where it is possible to lose oneself for a time in a boat.

Hare Harbcur, on the east side of Little Mecattina Island, has depth and roora^
enough for the largest ships, but has several roeka and ledges in it, which render it
difficult to strangers. As it opens to the southward, the prevailing westerly or easterly
winds are favourable for sailing in, and are generally accompanied with a smooth sea
in the entrance. It is only when the wind is well to the southward, that there is any
swell, and even then it never rolls into the harbour so as to aff'ect a vessei.

In order to enter this harbour with an easterly wind, you ought to pass to the
southward of the Fin, Scale, and Single Hocks, giving them a berth of about half an
mile. The Single Rock is just awash, and has three sunken rocks near it, and should
not be Approached nearer than a quarter of a mile, as the sunlsn rocks are 150»
fathoms from it. There is nothing in the way to the westward of the line fiom Single-
Rock to the Eden Islands, excepting the Cat Hocks, above water, and Staff Islet and
its ledges. When abreast of the Single Rock, haul round to the north-westward by
degrees, and when you are half a mile to the westward of the rock; the entrance of the
harbour will bear N.N.W. , with nothing in your way, and you may steer dh'ectly for it.

In coming with a westerly wind, steer N.N.E. | E., passing Point Antrobus, the-
eastern point of Little Mecattina Island, at the distance of one-third of a mile ; continue
on N.N.E. i E., leaving the Cat Rocks and Stafl" Islet and Ledges on your port hand,,
coming no nearer the latter than a quarter of a mile ; and, when abeam, you will see
the entrance of the harbour bearing N. f W., distant a mile. You cannot mistake it
because there is no other channel through which you can see clear into the harbour
from that position. The entrance, 170 fathoms wide and 20 fathoms deep, is betweea
Daly and Price Islands ; or, from the former position abreast of Staff Islet, continue on
N.N.E. 4 E., 300 fathoms farther, till the entrance bears N.N.W., then haul directly ia
for it, leaving Eden Islands and Price's Island on your right hand, and giving the
S. W. extreme of; the latter a berth of not less than 30 fathoms. Daly Island on your
left, or to the westward, is quite bold.

About 170 fathoms, within the entrance on the east, or Price Island side, you willi
see the small Watch Bock above water, and farther in a very small islet, named Bol(i
Islet, which lies about one-third of a mile within the entrance and 80 fathoms W.N.W,_
from the inner end of Price Island, and is quite bold. On the west side, bearing N. i

COAST OF LABRADOR.

all lie in *
}., and Ion.

E. from th«
hward, and
le east side,
■St. In the
too fathoma
N.E. by E.
N. from the

»d about thia
jouises from
)5 miles. vriU
ake you very
Grand Point,
,. continuing
the strait,
rection, and 8
veen them w
I have a good
r in two parts.
, and is joined
f the island w
aUina River is
I, and about 2i

ain for vessels,
g the west side
this bay, which,
mong which no.
I time in a boat.,
iepth and room
which render it
iterly or easterly
[lb a smooth sea^
that there is any

issel.

t to pass toXM
I of about halt a.
,ar it, and should
, rocks are lo«>
line from Single
d Staff Islet ^nd,
orth-westward by
e entrance of the
er directly for it.
nt Antrobus, the
•a mile; continue
n your port hand,
am, you will see
cannot mistake it
into the harbour
deep, is betweea
r Islet, continue on
en haul directly la
nd, and giving the
ily Island on your

iland side, you wi^

islet, na'^e^T^^Jr
fathoms W.N.W..

side, bearing N. i

W. 200 fathoms from the east extreme of Daly Island, lies Safe Rook, very snaall and
above water, and is quite safe on its cast side; and nearly midf way between Safe Rock
and Bold Islet lies Hag Ledge, which just dries at low water. This is the principal
danger in the way, but it can almost always be seen from the rigging, and tnere is a
dear channel on either side of it, a long cable wide and from 12 to 16 fathoms deep.
The western channel, however, is the best ; and the course from the centre of the en-
trance to it, so as to pass within half a cable of the Safe Rock, is N. ^ W., one-third of
a mile. When within these dangers, you must choose youi anchorage by the lead, for
there are several patches of rock with from 4 to 6 fathoms, although the bottom
is in general of mud, with from 9 to 14 fathoms water. In doing this, how-
ever, there is one more danger to be avoided. Foul Sock, a 2-fathom patch bearing
exactly north 600 fathoms from the S.W. point of Price Island. Until within
this rock, therefore, )ou should keep more than half-way over from the islands forming
the east side of the harbour, towards its western shore. You may, if.you choose, run in
nearly half a mile farther than this patch, and anchor to the eastward of Cluster Point,
which consists of some low small islets and rocks extending off the Little Mecattina
shore ; this position being the most secure in the harbour.

The south shore of Little Mecattina Island, as far as Cape Mackinnon, is high and
bold, with remarkable beaches of white boulder stones occasionally. About 1 ^ mile
W.N.W. f W. from the cape is a dangerous reef, awash at low water, named the Spray
Reef, which should always be passed to the westward when entering Aylmer Sound ;
it is bold-to all round.

Aylmer Sound, to the westward of Little Mecattina Island, affords no anchorage
until beyond the Doyle Islands at its head, behind which is Low Road and Louisa
Harbour, in the latter of which, vessels can ride in 4^fathom8, in the southr^m part of
the harbour : this haibour is open to the W.S.W., but protected in a great measure by
the Doyle Islands. To sail into this harbour or into Low Road, keep the eastern side
rf the Doyle -Islands aboard, by which you will clear some ledges lying in the entrance
of Salaberry Bay to the N.E.

The western side of Aylmer Sound is formed by a cluster of high i8lan4s named the
Harrington Islands, the extremity of the outer one of which is named Cape Airy. There
is no passage between these islands on account of the multitude of rocks. Off Cape
Airy at the distance of 2 miles, S. by W. | W., is the Black Reef, composed of low
black rocks above water, and W. by N. 1^ mile from the cape is Major Reef, awash
at low water, and 3 miles farther are the Netagamu Islands, within which and the Har-
rington Islands, the mainland bends inwards and forms a bay, having a quantity of rocky
islets at the entrance. On the largest of the Netagamu Islands is a remarkable mound.

About 1% mile, N. by W., from the Netagamu Islands is the river of the same name,
which may be known by the sandy beach, backed with a thick growth of fir trees, on
either side of the entrance, which is narrow, with deep water, and 1| mile from which
are the falls, 50 feet high. A bar of sand, with 3 feet over it, extends a mile from tlie
entrance, and is extremely dangerous to boats because of the heavy surf. The current
of the river is rapid.

Ten miles, W.S.W., from Cape Airy are the St. Mary Islands estimated to be 200 feet
high ; they are composed of bare steep granite, and bold all round. To the westward
of them are the clusters of the Cliff and Boat Islands, separated by a channel half a
mile wide, with 17 to 30 fathoms in it.

To the northward of these clusters of islands, is Watagheistic Island, 3 miles long
and above 1| mile broad, lying at the entrance of a large bay, within which is a large
sound containing several good anchoring places, but unapproachable without passing
through 7 miles of dangerous navigation. To the north of the St. Mary Islands are
several islets, rocks, and reefs, the largest of which islets is Cove Island, bearing 4 miles
N.N.W. from the north point ; there are thickly scattered rocks both above and below
water, between it and the Netagamu Islands. The eastern entrance, between Wata-
gheistic Island and the main, is narrow and intricate, but the western entrance is half a
mile wide ; and though there are several rocks and ledges in it, yet it can be safely
sailed through with proper care ; but there is no good anchorage on the route to, or
outside either entrance to Watagheistic

St. Mury Reefs are four very dangerous ledges, just under water, extending a mile,
N. and S. ; the southernmost bearing S.W. f S., 3^ miles, from the S.W. extreme of
the Boat Islands ; W.S.W. i W., 6 miles, from the S.W. extreme of the St. Mary
Islands, and S.E. ^ S., 3^ miles, from the westernmost of Southwest Islands. The Ten-
der Rock, small and awash, lies N. by W. | W.a mile from the northernmost St. Mary

COAST OF LABRADOR.

•:i;

Rouk, and 2 miles S. | \V. from the westornt/ost of the Middle Islands, which lie within
the Boat iNlnnds, between them and Watagheistic.

Between the Middle Islands and Wapitagun, the coast is broken into coves, and lined
with islets and rocks innumerable, among which nothing but a very small vessel, perfectly
acquainted with the coast, could find her way. There is nothing worth noting except
the Etamamu River which enters the sea at 4 miles N.E. from Wapitagun : it is rapid,
and there is a trading and salmon-fishing post at its mouth.

Mistassini Rocl'^ is a remarkable block or granite, resembling a mortar, and sometim«'s
named the Oun by the fishers. It is an excellent guide to the eastern entrance to Wa-
pitagun, from which it is distant three-quarters of a mile to the westward.

Southmakers Ledge lies S. ^W. 1 ^ miles from the Mistassini Rock, West 9 miles
from St. Mary Rocks, and 6J miles S.E. I E. from Cape Whittle. The course from
this dangerous reef to Greenly Island, near the entrance of the Strait of Brl'e
Isle, is E. I N., distance 128 miles. It is a small rock, which is never entirely covered
in moderate weather; the extent of the reef around it is 130 fathoms E. and W. and
60 fathoms N. and S., and there is no danger near it. The soundings are very irregular
rotund it.

WAPITAGUN HARBOUR is a long narrow channel between the outer islands of
Wapitagun, which are of bare granite, and appear as but one island, and Wapitagun
Island to the northward of them, and is completely sheltered ; the western entrance
to the harbour is sharp round the western extremity of the outer Wapitaj^un Islands,
which lies E. ^ S. from Cormorant Point, 600 fathoms off". This entrance is about 80
fathoms wide, and the harbour itself is narrow and unsuitable for vessels above 150 or
200 tons.

To enter from the southward with an easterly wind, steer for the eastern entrance,
which has ben indicated, and you will meet nothing in the way. On the west side of
the entrpnce there is a rock and ledge which shows, and therefore you must keep on
the east side, steering N. W. by N. ; one-third of a mile within the entrance there are
three small islets, and to the northward a cove, in Wapitagun Island, running into the
westward, round a steep rocky point, which lias a sunken rock close off it to the S.E.
Leave all three islets to the left, passing cio.ie to them, and bear up to the westward
between them anil tlic steep-rocky point ; tliis is the safest passage, but a good look-
out ought to be kept.

To enter the harbour with a wcste) !y wiad, run down between the Southmakers
Ledge and the Cormorant Rocks, which lie to the south of Lake Island, bearing to the
north to pass the S.E. Cormorant Rock, at the distance of half a mile. This rock will
be readily known from the Nest Rock, covered with birds and whitened by them, and

'> fathoms to the west of it ; 400 fathoms to the N.E. of the S.E. Cormorant, is a
r'.i' •'fithom ledge, which must be left on the left. Then haul to westward a little, so as
..vethe Slime Rock or N.E. Cormorant, not less than 300 fathoms on your left, to
,»vad another two fathom ledge, bearing N.E. ^ N. one-quarter of a mile from that
rock. Passing close to the east of this, steer for the islet in the channel, which you
will see between the west extreme of the outer Wapitagun Islands and Cormorant
Point ; but lo pass to the eastward of Long Ledge, lying midway between Slime Rock
and Cormorant Point, the course must not be above N.N.W. | W., or the west end of
the before-mentioned islet, on with the high point, which is the east end of Lake
Island, lying northward of the islet. When within 2 cable's length of the islet, the
harbour will begin to open to the eastward, when you must bear up quickly for it, leav-
ing the islet to the northward, keeping 200 fathoms off the west point of the outer
Wapitaguns, to clear a ledge lying off it, and when it bears to the eastward of north,
proceed into the harbour and anchor where you please. The best berth is in a small bay
on the south side of the harbour, 600 fathoms within the western entrance, in 7 fathoms.

CAPE WHITTLE, the south-west point of Lake Island, has many dangers off it to
the southward and westward, the two outermost of which, named the Whittle Rocks,
are half-tide rocks. All these rocks are steep, with from 20 to 40 fathoms water be-
tween them. The cape is considered to be in iat. 64° 10' 44" N., and long. 60° 6' 46^'
W., and from it the coast of Labrador changes its south-westerly direction, which it had
hitherto maintained, to west. Wood can be obtained on Lake Island, but for water H
is necessary to visit the mainland.

The flood from the eastward and ebb from the westward usually run past the entrance
of Wapitagun, at a rate varying from a half to a mile j but both stre " ■^ are much in?
fluenced by the winds.